Service Manual - Brivo OEC 865 5358651-1EN

GE Healthcare
Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product

Service Manual
Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC 785/Brivo OEC 865
5358651-1EN
Rev. 9
© 2013
General Electric Company
All Rights Reserved
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual
Revision History
Revision Date (Month & Year) Description of Change
1 June 2012 Initial Release
2 Sep. 2012 Update Information
3 Oct. 2012 Update Information
4 Nov. 2012 Update Information
5 Feb. 2013 Update Information
6 Mar. 2013 Update Information
7 June 2013 Update Information
8 July 2013 Update Information
9 Nov. 2013 Update Information
IMPORTANT SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. PLEASE READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC
785/Brivo OEC 865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product.
This manual may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, without the written permission of GE Healthcare.
Other product and company names mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
The contents of this document are accurate at the time of publication. However, changes in design and
additional features can, at any time, be incorporated in the hardware and software and may not be reflected in
this version of the document. Contact GE Healthcare Technical Support for clarification, if discrepancies arise.
The text of this manual was originally written, approved and published by the manufacturer in English.
GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd., a General Electric company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd
No. 1 Yongchang North Road
Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area
Beijing, P.R. China 100176
Tel: 8610-58068888
Fax: 8610-67881850
i
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), international standards organization, when
applicable.
Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC 785/Brivo OEC 865 complies with the regulatory requirements of the
following:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices.
CE label affixed to the product testifies compliance to all requirements of the Directive.
The location of the CE 0459 label is described in this manual.
0459
European Representative:
GE Medical Systems S.C.S.
Quality Assurance Manager
283 rue de la Minière
78530 BUC France
Tel: +33 1 30 70 40 40
ii
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

(BG)  Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента
е да осигури превод.
 Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали
упътването за работа.
 Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на
доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар,
механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的伤害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受傷。
UPOZORENJE Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.
(HR) Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni
priručnik.
Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili
pacijenta uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

(CS)  V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je
zajištění překladu do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
 Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod
a pochopili jeho obsah.
 V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka
prodejního servisu, obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu,
respektive vlivem mechanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.
(DA)  Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens
ansvar at sørge for oversættelse.
 Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
 Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk
stød, mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAARSCHUWING Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.
(NL)  Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk
voor de vertaling ervan.
 Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding
werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
 Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de
operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok,
mechanische of andere gevaren.
iii
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

(EN) If a customer's service provider requires a language other than english, it is the customer's
responsibility to provide translation services.
Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted
and is understood.
Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient
from electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles
(ET)  Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab
klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
 Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga
tutvumist ja sellest aru saamist.
 Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi
vigastamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI)  Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia,
tarvittavan käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
 Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän
huolto-ohjeen.
 Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston
käyttäjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun
vaaratilanteen vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d’installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.
(FR)  Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais,
il incombe au client de le faire traduire.
 Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d’installation et de
maintenance n'a pas été consulté et compris.
 Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou
le patient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
(DE)  Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des
Kunden für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
 Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen
und verstanden zu haben.
 Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des
Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge,
mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙ∆ΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται μόνο στα αγγλικά.
(EL)  Εάν ο τεχνικός σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός των
αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει τις υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
 Μην επιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό αν δεν έχετε
συμβουλευτεί και κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
 Αν δεν προσέξετε την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός
στον τεχνικό σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς ή
άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZTETÉS Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.
(HU)
 Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a
fordítás elkészíttetése.
 Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben
leírtakat nem értelmezték.
 Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg
áramütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
iv
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.

(IS)  Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það
skylda viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
 Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og
skilin.
 Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða
sjúklings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTENZA Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.
(IT)  Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è
tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
 Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il
presente manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto.
 Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla
manutenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti
meccanici o altri rischi.
このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA)
サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業者の
責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでください。
この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、感
電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.
(KO)
고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는
것은고객의 책임입니다.
본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지
마십시오.
본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해
서비스 제공자, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다.
Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.
 Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta
pienākums ir nodrošināt tulkojumu.
 Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
RĪDINĀJUMS  Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena,
(LV) mehānisku vai citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai
pacientam.
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

(LT)  Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo
paslaugas privalo klientas.
 Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio
eksploatavimo vadovo.
Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai
dėl elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
v
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

(NO)  Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å
sørge for oversettelse.
 Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
 Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren,
operatøren eller pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre
farer.
OSTRZEŻENIE Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.
(PL)  Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi
tłumaczenia jest obowiązkiem klienta.
 Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem
serwisowym i zrozumienia go.
 Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta,
operatora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia
mechanicznego bądź innego.
AVISO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.
(PT-BR)  Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao
cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
 Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistência técnica.
 A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou
paciente decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.
(PT-PT)  Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma,
é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
 Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de
assistência técnica.
 O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do
operador ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.
(RO)  Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză,
este de datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
 Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui
manual de service.
 Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau
pacientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖНО! Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на
(RU) английском языке.
 Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на
английском, а на каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно
обеспечить перевод.
 Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь
к данному руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
 Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому,
что специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар
электрическим током, механическую травму или другое повреждение.
UPOZORENJE Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.
(SR)  Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi
prevodilačke usluge.
 Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
 Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca
ili pacijenta usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
vi
UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

(SK)  Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie
prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
 Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a
neporozumiete mu.
 Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb,
obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné
ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.
(ES)  Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el
inglés, el cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
 No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este
manual de servicio.
 La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de
servicios, el operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas,
mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska. .
(SV)  Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar
kunden för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
 Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här
servicehandboken.
 Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på
serviceteknikern, operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska
faror eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.
(SL)  Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka
zagotoviti prevod.
 Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
 Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali
drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.
(TR)  Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse,
bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
 Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
 Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen,
operatör veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
vii
Contents
Chapter1. Introduction and Safety .......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1. Objective ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2. Scope ................................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.3. Service Philosophy ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.4. Qualifications ................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.5. Unauthorized Modifications .................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.6. Manual Organization and Use ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2. Safety ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1. Safety Hazard Alerts ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.2. Ingress of Fluids .......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3. Electrical Shock............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.4. Explosion ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.5. Thermal hazards ......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.6. Equipment Stability .................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.7. X-Radiation .................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.8. Motorized Mechanical Movement ...................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.9. Work on Parts with Lead Materail ...................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.10. Safety Interlock ............................................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.2.11. Labels ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.12. Locations of the Labels .......................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.13. Symbols ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-24
1.2.14. Electromagnetic Compatibility Statement ................................................................................... 1-25
1.2.15. Lock-Out, Tag-Out .................................................................................................................................... 1-30
Chapter2. System Overview ....................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1. System Descriptions ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1. System overview ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2. Component Locator .................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.3. System block ................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2. Subsystem ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.1. Power Distribution and Control ........................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.2. Mother Board.............................................................................................................................................. 2-16
2.2.3. Mainframe Control Board ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
viii
2.2.4. Display Board ............................................................................................................................................. 2-32

2.2.5. Keyboard Control Board ....................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.2.6. Updown Board........................................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.2.7. System Interface Board ........................................................................................................................ 2-42
2.2.8. Collimator Control Board ...................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.2.9. kV control and IGBT assembly ........................................................................................................... 2-50
2.2.10. Filament Driver Board ............................................................................................................................ 2-55
2.2.11. Monoblock ................................................................................................................................................... 2-58
2.2.12. X-Ray/key Switch and Emergency Switch ................................................................................... 2-60
2.2.13. Image Chain................................................................................................................................................ 2-62
2.2.14. Computer and Peripheral ..................................................................................................................... 2-71
2.2.15. UPS .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-73
Chapter3. Installation ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2. Pre-Installation ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1. Dimensions and Weights of System .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2. Site Requirement ......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3. Power Supply Requirement .................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.4. Environments ................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.5. Tools and Test Equipment....................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3. Unpacking .................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.1. Shipping Container Inspection ............................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2. Unpack C-Arm .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.3.3. Unpack Workstation ............................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4. System Inspection ............................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.1. Label Inspection ........................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.4.2. External Inspection .................................................................................................................................. 3-14
3.4.3. Internal Inspection ................................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.5. System Setup......................................................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.5.1. Power Supply Adaption ......................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.5.2. UPS Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.5.3. System Power On ..................................................................................................................................... 3-19
3.5.4. System Configuration in Admin Interface .................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.5. DICOM Setup and Check....................................................................................................................... 3-23
ix
3.5.6. DICOM Worksheet .................................................................................................................................... 3-31

3.6. Functional Checks ............................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.6.1. Workstation Checks ................................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.6.2. C-Arm Checks ............................................................................................................................................. 3-37
3.6.3. Auto Technique Tracking ...................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.6.4. Image Resolution ...................................................................................................................................... 3-44
3.6.5. Dose Limitation Check ........................................................................................................................... 3-44
3.6.6. Beam Alignment Check ......................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.6.7. DAP Accuracy Check ............................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.6.8. System Status Backup ........................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.6.9. Fill in the product locator card ........................................................................................................... 3-46
3.7. Options Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.7.1. CD/DVD Burner Installation ................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.7.2. Laser Aimer.................................................................................................................................................. 3-48
3.7.3. Video distributor ........................................................................................................................................ 3-51
3.7.4. Printers........................................................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.7.5. Film cassette holder ................................................................................................................................ 3-54
3.7.6. Tube Skin Spacer ...................................................................................................................................... 3-55
3.7.7. Dual pedal footswitch with save button ....................................................................................... 3-56
3.7.8. Removal Filter and Sensor Installation .......................................................................................... 3-56
3.7.9. Removable Grid ......................................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.7.10. Wireless DICOM ......................................................................................................................................... 3-59
3.7.11. Mono LCD monitor installation .......................................................................................................... 3-65
3.7.12. Software Option Installation ............................................................................................................... 3-65
3.7.13. Room Interface (RIF) ................................................................................................................................ 3-65
3.7.14. Fill in the product locator card for Option .................................................................................... 3-66
3.8. Installation Check List ........................................................................................................................................ 3-67
Chapter4. Calibration ..................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2. kV Measurement and Adjustment ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.1. kV Measurement and Accuracy Check ............................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.2. kV Adjustment .............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3. mA Measurement and Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 4-8
4.3.1. mA Measurement and Accuracy Check .......................................................................................... 4-8
x
4.3.2. mA calibration............................................................................................................................................ 4-11

4.4. mAs Measurement and Calibration ........................................................................................................... 4-15
4.4.1. mAs Measurment and Accuracy Check ........................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.2. mAs Calibration ......................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.5. X-Ray Generator Warm .................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.6. Beam Alignment and Image Calibration ................................................................................................. 4-16
4.6.1. Camera Centering.................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.6.2. BAFT Installation: ...................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.6.3. Collimator Centering............................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.6.4. Collimator Check and Calibration .................................................................................................... 4-25
4.6.5. I.I. Field Size Check and Calibration ................................................................................................. 4-34
4.6.6. Limiting Field Size (Collimator Iris Field Size) ............................................................................... 4-36
4.6.7. ABS Tracking Check and Adjustment ............................................................................................. 4-37
4.6.8. Limiting Resolution .................................................................................................................................. 4-39
4.6.9. Shading Correction Check and Calibration ................................................................................. 4-43
4.7. DAP Accuracy Verification and Calibration ............................................................................................ 4-45
4.7.1. DAP Calibration Verification: ............................................................................................................... 4-45
4.7.2. DAP Accuracy Application Verification: ......................................................................................... 4-47
4.7.3. DAP Calibration: ........................................................................................................................................ 4-50
4.8. Monitor Brightness and Contrast Adjustment ...................................................................................... 4-51
4.8.1. Keys assignment and operation LED ............................................................................................. 4-51
4.8.2. Lock and unlock the OSD menu ........................................................................................................ 4-51
4.8.3. Key functions in the OSD menu......................................................................................................... 4-51
4.8.4. Brightness and Contrast Adjustment ............................................................................................. 4-52
4.9. Power Input Tolerance Check ....................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.9.1. Input Voltage Check: ............................................................................................................................... 4-54
4.9.2. Input Voltage Calibration: .................................................................................................................... 4-55
Chapter5. Software...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2. Service Tool ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1. System Information.................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2. Configure Product ....................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3. Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.4. Exposure Management ............................................................................................................................ 5-6
xi
5.2.5. Imaging Processing Config .................................................................................................................. 5-12

5.2.6. Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.2.7. Log Viewer ................................................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.3. Software Installation and Upgrade............................................................................................................. 5-17
5.3.1. Install Operating System ....................................................................................................................... 5-17
5.3.2. Install Application Software................................................................................................................. 5-22
5.4. Firmware Upgrade .............................................................................................................................................. 5-26
5.4.1. MCU Firmware Upgrade ....................................................................................................................... 5-26
5.4.2. CPLD Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................ 5-35
Chapter6. Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2. Error Recovery Steps ............................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.3. Event Messages ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.1. Structure of Message Code ................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.2. Definition of Code ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.3. Message List.................................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.4. Troubleshooting Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 6-68
6.4.1. Workstation and Control Panel Boot up Display ....................................................................... 6-68
6.4.2. Shut down Workstation and Control Panel Display................................................................. 6-68
6.4.3. Troubleshooting Tree .............................................................................................................................. 6-69
Chapter7. Replacement .............................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1. FRU list ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2. Locations of FRU .................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3. Replacement ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-8
7.3.1. General Screws Fastening torque Reference ............................................................................... 7-8
7.3.2. Calibration Matrix ..................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.3. Calibration Tool Matrix ........................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.4. System Covers ........................................................................................................................................... 7-12
7.3.5. Brake, Handle and Wheel ..................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.3.6. Monoblock.................................................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.3.7. Collimator ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.3.8. PWAs ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.9. Parts in Computer and Peripheral .................................................................................................... 7-33
7.3.10. Exposure Indicator (5331638) ............................................................................................................. 7-36
xii
7.3.11. Monitors ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-37

7.3.12. CCD Camera ............................................................................................................................................... 7-38
7.3.13. Image Intensifier with power supply .............................................................................................. 7-39
7.3.14. Image Intensifier Power supply ......................................................................................................... 7-41
7.3.15. UPS (5075513) ............................................................................................................................................ 7-42
7.3.16. Misc. Parts .................................................................................................................................................... 7-43
7.3.17. Interconnect WKS (5085708) .............................................................................................................. 7-52
7.3.18. Bundle cable: (5085700) ........................................................................................................................ 7-54
7.3.19. Fuse kit (5075919) .................................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.3.20. Linear Actuator (5075921) ................................................................................................................... 7-59
7.3.21. Switches ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-63
7.3.22. Others ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-65
Chapter8. Periodic Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1. Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1. Safety ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2. Tools and Test Equipment....................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2. PM Checklist .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3. Administrative Information................................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4. Safety Inspection .................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.1. Antistatic Drag Wires................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.4.2. Electrical Plug and power cord ............................................................................................................. 8-6
8.4.3. Interconnect cable and Connector .................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.4. Footswitch cable and pins ...................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4.5. Ground Continuity ....................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.5. PC Clean and UPS Performance Check ....................................................................................................... 8-8
8.5.1. PC clean ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.5.2. UPS performance check: ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6. System Function checks .................................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.6.1. Perform Power On Checks ................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.6.2. C-Arm Checks ............................................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.6.3. Workstation Checks ................................................................................................................................ 8-13
8.7. X-ray Generator Accuracy Tests .................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.7.1. kVp Accuracy.............................................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.7.2. mA Accuracy .............................................................................................................................................. 8-14
xiii
8.7.3. mAs Accuracy ............................................................................................................................................ 8-14

8.8. Image Quality check .......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.1. Field Size Check ......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.2. Auto Technique Tracking ...................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.3. Image Resolution ...................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.8.4. Shading Correction Check.................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.9. Dose Check ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.9.1. Dose Rate Check ....................................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.9.2. DAP Accuracy Check ............................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.10. Reporting ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.10.1. Install Equipment Covers ...................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.10.2. Complete PM Comments ...................................................................................................................... 8-16
Chapter9. Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2. System Specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.1. Safety Classification .................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.2.2. Environmental Requirements ............................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.3. Power Requirements................................................................................................................................. 9-2
9.2.4. Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2.5. Earth leakage current............................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.6. Physical Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.3. Specification of Key Components.................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.1. X-Ray Generator ......................................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.2. X-Ray tube...................................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.3. X-ray tube assembly ................................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.3.4. Collimator ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.5. Others ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-10
9.4. Tube Rating Chart................................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.4.1. Filament Emission Characteristics ................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.4.2. Single Load Ratings ............................................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.4.3. Thermal Characteristic ..................................................................................................................................... 9-13
9.5. Radiation Safety Specification ...................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.5.1. Scatter Data ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-14
9.5.2. Scatter radiation specification ....................................................................................................................... 9-15
xiv
9.6. Material Safety Data Sheets .......................................................................................................................... 9-21

9.7. Material Recycling ............................................................................................................................................... 9-21
Appendix-System Schematics
xv
Chapter1. Introduction and Safety
1.1. Introduction
1.1.1. Objective
Provide Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product service documentation that is consistently
organized, easy to access and is designed to aggressively expedite fault isolation and decrease product
down-time.
1.1.2. Scope
This manual’s contents document the necessary information for service.
1.1.3. Service Philosophy

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Products use precision components and utilize complex
manufacturing techniques. Component-level repairs that maintain compliance with these requirements
are sometimes not possible in the field. The system is therefore designed to be field serviceable at the
modular or Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) level.
1.1.4. Qualifications
Reading this manual does not qualify an untrained person to service the equipment. This publication
assumes the reader is a skilled and fully qualified electronic technician who has experience servicing
medical imaging systems. Factory trained service personnel will benefit the most from this material.
1.1.5. Unauthorized Modifications

GE HUALUN Medical Systems, Inc. certifies that when assembled according to the manufacturer's
instructions, this equipment meets applicable international standards. Unauthorized modifications to the
equipment may impact adherence to these standards and make the equipment unsafe to operate.
The owner is responsible for verifying continued compliance with all applicable regulations and
standards. Consult local, state, federal and/or international agencies regarding specific requirements
and regulations applicable to the use of this type of medical electronic equipment.
1.1.6. Manual Organization and Use

The information documented here has been analyzed and divided into several sections. This manual
contains the following types of information:
 Introduction and Safety-Information of the system and safety.
 System Overview-General description of the system and subsystem. The subsystems have been
analyzed and divided into functional sections. Each functional section contains major assembly
and control locations, theory, functional tests and other information relevant at the subsystem
level.
1-2
Introduction and Safety
 Installation Procedure –Information of pre-installation, unpacking and installation check.

 Calibration-Procedures for tuning and calibration relevant at the subsystem and system level.
 Software Maintenance- Provides procedures for software maintenance and service mode
utilities.
 Troubleshooting- Provides error code, error messages, and diagnostic programs that expedite
the diagnostic process.
 Replacement- Removal and installation procedures for fuses, covers and field replaceable units.
 Periodic Maintenance Procedure-Procedures for periodic maintenance.
 Technique Reference-Technique Reference of the system.
 Appendix-System Schematics.
1-3
1.2. Safety
Do not attempt to service or maintain this equipment before reading this entire section.
1.2.1. Safety Hazard Alerts

There are three hazard classifications used in this document. They are:
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
CAUTION moderate to minor injury, equipment damage or loss of data.
NOTE is given in situation requiring special attention.

NOTE
1.2.2. Ingress of Fluids

Excessive amounts of fluids such as antiseptics, cleaning solutions or bodily fluids may damage internal
components if they are allowed inside the equipment.
The equipment is not rated for water-tight operation. Do not allow any liquids to leak into
WARNING the equipment where they can cause electric shock, fires, and short circuits. If leakage
does occur, ensure that all internal circuitry is completely dry before attempting to
operate the equipment.
Never store or operate the system in the presence of conductive fluids like water or
WARNING saline solution unless the system is adequately protected by an approved bagging or
draping system.
1-4
1.2.3. Electrical Shock

If the equipment must be serviced with the covers removed, observe the following precautions:
Equipment that contains high power electrical components must be serviced only by
WARNING personnel familiar with proper safety procedures for working near these components.
Disconnect AC power (and battery packs if used) before discharging static electricity in
WARNING components such as electrolytic capacitors and high voltage cables. Failure to heed this
message will result in death or severe personal injury.
Allow adequate time for static charges to discharge through bleeder resistors. Use a
WARNING high wattage resistor when discharging circuits to avoid burns.
Have someone watch while you work near high voltages. This person must remain
WARNING clear of all circuitry and be prepared to turn off the power to the system and render aid
in an emergency.
High voltage cables, electrolytic capacitors, and CRTs can retain a dangerous static
charge for long periods after power has been removed. Some devices can acquire a
WARNING charge spontaneously without direct contact with other circuitry. Do not touch these
components unless power has been completely removed and they have been
discharged.
Never operate the system unless all safety ground wires (green wire with a yellow stripe)
CAUTION
and related components are fastened in place. Dangerous electrical shock and
improper equipment operation can otherwise result.
Remove all metal rings and watchbands before working on system circuitry. Skin burns
CAUTION and damage from involuntary muscle contractions can result if metal jewelry shorts
electrical circuits.
1.2.4. Explosion
If an abnormal condition occurs, such as the room fills with flammable gas, steps must be taken to
prevent the gas from contacting components within the equipment. Follow these guidelines:
1. Do not turn the system on or off.
2. Do not un-plug or plug-in system or peripheral equipment power cords.
3. Do not operate light switches or other electrical equipment.
4. Evacuate all personnel immediately.
5. Notify the hospital administration and/or fire department.
1-5
6. Ventilate the room to clear the air of all flammable vapor or gas.
7. Identify and remove the source of the flammable liquid, vapor, or gas.
1.2.5. Thermal hazards

Before removing the cover of the system for maintenance or service, please pay attention to the points
with high temperature, for example, the current limiters, internal power distribute circuit etc. Otherwise it
may harm your hand or body.
1.2.6. Equipment Stability

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is mounted on wheels. And if it is moved or
operated improperly it could roll out of control. Follow these guidelines:
Two people should maintain control of the equipment when moving up or down an incline.
Place all mechanical assemblies in their most compact (transport) position and lock brake handles prior
to moving the equipment.
Use the handles designed for moving the equipment and mechanical assemblies.
Never attempt to move the system up or down steps.
Do not operate the equipment on unlevel floors.
Do not lock the wheel brakes and leave the equipment unattended on unlevel floors.
Always apply the wheel locks when the system is in its final position.
Do not move the equipment if the castors or wheels are not functioning properly.
Mechanical shocks to the equipment while disk drives are accessing information may cause damage to
the disk drive and loss of data.
1.2.7. X-Radiation
This equipment either produces or is used in the vicinity of ionizing radiation. Observe
CAUTION proper safety practices during operation. Use lead aprons, eye protection, thyroid
protection, and similar devices to protect yourself and others.
CAUTION Where local Entrance Exposure Rates (EER) are different than the GE HUALUN rate
specified, the EER should be adjusted to the lower of the two.
1-6
1.2.8. Motorized Mechanical Movement

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product has motorized mechanical assemblies. Please
follow these guidelines:
Always observe mechanical assemblies when operating the motor to avoid pinching or collision with a
person or object.
Use care when working around equipment to avoid unintentional motor actuation. Do not carelessly
place objects on the equipment or bump or lean against the equipment.
Observe and prevent articles of clothing from getting caught in moving parts.
1.2.9. Work on Parts with Lead Materail

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product has parts with touchable lead material. They are
Monoblock, Image Intensifier, Image Intensifier cover, lead ring of collimator and collimator cover.
CAUTION When working on those parts, Do Not directly touch the lead material.
1.2.10. Safety Interlock
WARNING Never bypass, jumper, or otherwise disable any equipment safety feature.
1-7
1.2.11. Labels
NOTE Even though this manual is supplied only in English, some labels may have a foreign
language equivalent that will appear on your system.
Item Label Quantity Description
This label indicates the position of

the C-Arm Wig-Wag movement
handle. When the handle is
1 1 rotated to dashed position, the
Wig-Wag brake is released. When
the handle is in solid line position,
the Wig-Wag brake is locked.

the C-Arm rotation handle. When
the handle is rotated to the
2 1 dashed position, the brake is
released. When the handle is in
solid line position, the brake is
locked.

the C-Arm rotation handle. When
the handle is rotated to the
3 1 dashed position, the brake is
released. When the handle is in
solid line position, the brake is
locked.

the C-Arm orbital movement
4 1 rotated to the dashed position,
the brake is released. When the
handle is in solid line position, the
brake is locked.
1-8

the C-Arm orbital movement
brake is locked.

the C-Arm horizontal movement
brake is locked.
This label indicates that the

7 1
Mobile C-Arm’s mechanical
subassemblies position should be
placed in their most compact
position before transporting or
moving the system.
8 1
Pay attention to your feet keep

9 1
away from this area.
1-9
This label is attached below

Workstation handles to note that
do not use the workstation
handles to lift this system;
This label is attached by printer
cabinet to note that please pay
attention to the printer slide when
moving the workstation.
This label is attached on the
10 5 control panel to note that please
refer to operator manual to
operate the control panel.
This label is attached by UPS shut
down button to avoid misusing.
Only when UPS can’t shut down
automatically after system power
off process complete, the user
should press the UPS shut down
button to shut off UPS manually.
Monoblock heat label

11 2
This label on the control panel of

the C-Arm indicates the
12 1
procedure of shutting down and
restart to avoid data missing.
Potential equalization terminal

13 1
label.
1-10
Pay attention to keep your

14 7 hands/fingers away from this
area.
This label indicates that you

should not touch the connector
and the patient at the same time.
The connector must be
connected to the appointed
15 2 device only.
This port is only used for user to
store patient image by USB stick.
Any other equipment is forbidden
to be connected strictly.
This label on the footswitch

means that the degree of
16
IPX8 1
protection of the footswitch is IP
X8. The electrical mechanism
within the footswitch is protected
from the effects of continuous
immersion in water.
This symbol indicates the location

17 1 of Emergency Stop Switch on the
system.
1-11
System rating plate indicates

18 1 manufacture information and
input power requirements.
19 1
Generator tube head rating plate.
1-12
20 1 This is the label of collimator.
This is the label of laser warning.

21 1 (The label will only be required if
there is laser aimer.)
This label warns the operator or

the patient not to look at the laser
22 1
beams directly. (The label will only
be required if there is laser aimer.)
This label indicates the

equipment was tested by a
Notified Body and was found to
0459 be in compliance with the
23 2
requirements of all relevant
directives and standards in effect
within the European Union at the
time of manufacture.
This label indicates that waste
electronic and electrical
equipment must not be disposed
of as unsorted municipal waste
and must be collected separately.
24 1
Please contact an authorized
representative of the
manufacturer for information
concerning the decommissioning
of your equipment.
1-13
25 2 This is the label of branding.
26 Blank N/A Not used
This label indicates the system

was tested by ITS authorized
body and was found to be in
27 1 compliance with the
requirements of all relevant
directives and standards at the
time of manufacture.
This label can be found on the X-

Ray generator. It indicates the
location of the X-Ray source and
the controls used to produce
28 1 ionizing X-Radiation. Use
appropriate precautions and
protective equipment when using
the system and at all times when
X-Rays are present.
29 1 USB warning label
1-14
30 1 C-Arm weight label
31 1 Workstation weight label
Image Intensifier label for Brivo

1
OEC 715/785.
32
Image Intensifier label for Brivo

1
OEC 865.
1-15
Hg label is attached on the

33 2
monitor back.
34 1 removable copper 0.1mm Cu
35 1 removable Grid
36 1 skin spacer
This label indicates the system

complies with the Brazil local
37 1
regulation. It is only on the
system in Brazil.
1-16
This label indicates the key

switch. Turn the key switch
located on the C-arm interface
38 1
panel to enable X-Rays and
motorized mechanical
movement.
This is the label of functional

39 1
earth ground connection.
40 1 This is the label of J1 connector
41 2 This is the label of Mark A.
0.4mmAl. It’s on the tube. For

1
Brivo OEC 715/785.
42
0.8mmAl. It’s on the tube. For

1
Brivo OEC 865.
1-17
43 1 This is the label of fuse
This is the label of J3 connector.

Remove the workstation back
44 1
cover. The label is near the
connector on the bottom.
45 1 PLC label
46 1 DC BUS fuse
WIFI label. Only available when

you choose Wi-Fi Internet
47 1
Adapter option for some
configuration.
48 1 FCC ID label.
1-18
The Circuit Breaker or other over

current protector used in power
49 1
supply for this product shall meet
the requirements.
50 1 This warning label is on the

Workstation front cover.
51 2 Packing label.
2 Brivo OEC 715 Product Brand

name.
2 Brivo OEC 785 Product Brand

name.
52
Brivo OEC 865 Product Brand

name.
2
1-19
53 1 Component, Spot Film Device

label.
This is the label of collimator.

54 1 Remove the tube head cover. This
label is on the collimator.
1-20
1.2.12. Locations of the Labels
25 25
32
14 2 3
5 21 22
4
11 11
17 6
8 7
39
1
14
28
19
1-21
54
46
1-22
10
52
47
29 12 15
50 48
15
31/27/24
18/49 45/23
40
44
41
13
41
43
1-23
1.2.13. Symbols
Be familiar with the following symbols that may appear on equipment and schematics so you can safely
maintain and operate the system:
Dangerous Voltage
This symbol identifies areas where hazardous voltages may be present. Use appropriate
safety precautions.
Protective Earth Ground
This symbol identifies the system’s main protective earth ground terminal, which connects to
the facility earth ground through the grounding prong on the AC power plug. This connection
must be in place at all times for safe system operation.
Earth Ground Connection
This symbol identifies an earth ground connection that is necessary to maintain grounding
throughout the system.
X-Ray Source
This X-Ray Source symbol is used to identify controls that will produce ionizing X-radiation
when activated. Always use appropriate safety precautions when generating X-Rays.
This X-Ray Source symbol is used to identify controls that will produce ionizing X-radiation
when activated. Always use appropriate safety precautions when generating X-Rays.
Potential Equalization Terminal
This symbol identifies system terminals which, when connected together, are at the same
potential (not necessarily earth ground). Green/yellow wires normally connect potential
equalization terminals together.
Attention
Attention, see accompanying documentation for information. You can refer to this manual for
the operation instructions.
1-24
Type B
This symbol indicates the equipment is protected against electric shock by a protective earth
ground connection.
Ionization Radiation
This symbol indicates that there is ionization radiation.
1.2.14. Electromagnetic Compatibility Statement

This equipment may generate and use radio frequency energy. The equipment must be installed and
used according to the manufacturer’s instructions in order to avoid radio frequency interference. If this
equipment generates or receives interference do the following to correct the problem:
 Verify that the equipment is the cause by turning the system on and off.
 In the event of unintended motor actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
 In the event of unintended X-Ray actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
 Reorient the equipment until the interference stops.
 Relocate the equipment with respect to other equipment in the room.
 Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the equipment and the receiver are on different
branch circuits.
 Use only input/output (I/O) cables supplied by GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd.
This product conforms with IEC60601-1-2: 2007 Ed3.0 EMC standard for medical devices.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. The equipment
NOTE may cause or be subject to radio frequency interference with other medical and non–
medical devices and radio communications. To provide reasonable protection against
such interference, the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system complies with emissions limits for
a Group 1, Class A Medical Devices and has applicable immunity level as stated in IEC
60601-1-2: 2007 Ed3.0.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation.The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system needs special precautions regarding EMC
and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided
in the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Operator manual.
Use of RF (Radio Frequency) sources that intentionally transmit, such as cellular

telephones, transceivers, radio-controlled products, or other RF emitting equipment may
cause performance outside the systems published specifications or other adverse
operation. Keep the power to these RF sources turned off when near this equipment.
1-25
Recommended separation distances and information regarding compatibility with other

equipment are located in the EMC Declaration Table as below.
If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by switching

the equipment on and off), the user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to
correct the problem by one or more of the following measure(s):
1. Reorient or relocate the affected device(s).
2. Increase the separating space between the equipments and the affected device.
3. Power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device.
4. Consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions.
Use of accessories, transducers, cables and other parts other than those specified by the
WARNING manufacturer of this equipment may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference
caused either by the use of interconnect cables other than those recommended, or
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
WARNING equipment and that if adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the Brivo OEC 715/785/865
system should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will
be used.
NOTE To comply with the regulations applicable to an electromagnetic interface for a Group 1,
Class A Medical Device, and to minimize interference risks, the following requirements
shall be applied:
1. All interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly
grounded. The use of cables that are not properly shielded and grounded may
result in the equipment causing radio frequency interference in violation of the
European Union Medical Device directive and FCC regulations.
2. All of the recommended guidance regarding electromagnetic environment shall
be followed.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the specified
electromagnetic environment. The purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-
Ray Product should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below:
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment Guidance

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray
Product uses RF energy only for its internal function.
1-26
RF Emissions Group1 Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not
likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
CISPR11 equipment.
RF Emissions Class A The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray

Product is suitable for use in all establishments other
CISPR11
than domestic and those directly connected to the
Harmonic emissions Not public low-voltage power supply network that supplies
applicable buildings used for domestic purposes.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/ Not
flicker emissions applicable
IEC 61000-3-3
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray
Product should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below:
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Compliance Level Electromagnetic
Environment Guidance
Test Level
Electrostatic 6 kV contact 6 kV contact Floors are wood, concrete, or
discharge (ESD) ceramic tile, or floors are
8 kV air 8 kV air
IEC 61000-4-2 covered with synthetic material
and the relative humidity is at
least 30 %.
2 kV for power 2 kV for power supply Mains power quality is that of a
supply lines lines typical commercial and/or
Electrical fast
transient Pulse 1 kV for hospital environment
1 kV for input/output
IEC 61000-4-4 input/output lines
lines
Surge 1 kV Line(s) to 1kV Line(s) to Line(s) Mains power quality is that of a
Line(s) typical commercial and/or
IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV Line(s) to earth hospital environment.
2 kV Line(s) to earth
Voltage dips, short <5 % UT (>95 % dip in Mains power quality should be
interruptions and UT) for 0,5 cycle that of a typical commercial or
voltage variations hospital environment. If the
40 % UT (60 % dip in
on power supply user of the Brivo OEC
UT) for 5 cycles
input lines 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-
70 % UT (30 % dip in Ray Product requires continued
IEC 61000-4-11 <5 % UT (>95 % dip in
UT) for 25 cycles operation during power mains
UT) for 5 s
<5 % UT (>95 % dip in interruptions, it is
UT for 5 s recommended that the Brivo
OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm
X-Ray Product be powered
from an uninterruptible power
supply or a battery.
1-27
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic

magnetic field fields are at levels
(50/60Hz) characteristic of a typical
IEC 61000-4-8 location in a typical commercial
and/or hospital environment.
NOTE：UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the specified electromagnetic
environment. The purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product should assure
that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below:
IEC 60601 Compliance Level Electromagnetic Environment
Test Level
Conducted RF 3 V rms [V1 =] 3 V Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment are used no closer to any part of
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to
the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-
80 MHz Ray Product, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation appropriate for the
frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
3,5
d =[ ] P
Radiated RF 3 V/m [E1=] 3 V/m 3
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 3,5
d =[ ] P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
2.5 GHz 3
7
d =[ ] P 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
3
Note: P is the power rating of the transmitter
in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended
separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey
a, are less than the compliance level in each
frequency range b.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:
a: Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for cellular telephones and land mobile radios, amateur
1-28
radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be estimated accurately. To assess the electromagnetic
environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be performed. If the measured field
strength exceeds the RF compliance level above, observe the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product to
verify normal operation in each use location. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the [EQUIPMENT and/or SYSTEM].
b: Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths are less than 3 V/m.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
Note3: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
The Recommended Separation Distances are listed in the next table.
Recommended Separation Distances for Portable and Mobile RF Communications

Equipment and the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system
The Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product is intended to use in the electromagnetic
environment where the RF interference is controlled. According to the power rating of the
communication equipment, the purchaser or user of the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray
Product can prevent the Electromagnetic interference by the recommended separation distance below:
Separation Distance/m
Rated Power of
Transmitter/W
150KHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
3,5 3,5 7
d =[ ] P d =[ ] P d =[ ] P
3 3 3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.38 0.38 0.73

0.1
1.2 1.2 2.3

1
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a power not listed above, the Separation DISTANCE can be estimated using
the equation in the corresponding column, where P is the power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Note 1: NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Note 3: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
1-29
1.2.15. Lock-Out, Tag-Out

This procedure meets the basic LOTO requirements established by OSHA and follows the policy of GE
Healthcare for energy-isolation during the service/maintenance of this equipment. It is designed to
insure that each employee involved in servicing this equipment has exclusive control over when the
equipment is reenergized (i.e. each employee maintains a personal lock with a unique key).
It is the obligation of each employee to follow this procedure and understand that failing to do so can
cause serious injury or death.
Only Field Service Engineers who have complete LOTO Authorized and initial LOTO Verification training
will be permitted to execute Lockout/Tagout on this system. All other non-authorized individuals will be
considered “affected” individuals.
Specific Source of Energy
TYPE SOURCE MAGNITUDE STORED
Electrical Facility 120VAC/240VAC NO
Electrical Capacitors 310VDC YES
Electrical Inverter module(Connected with 310VDC YES
Capacitors)
Gravitational Potential (C-arm) ~50 lbs. YES
Energy Control Procedures

1. Notify all affected individuals of a shutdown.
2. Verify safety of work area.
3. Identify all electrical sources.
4. Position C-arm for service.
5. Shut down system via the power breaker.
6. Remove A/C plug from wall power.
7. Remove interconnect cable from C-arm.
8. Apply the red lock and tag to the AC plug.
9. Remove Workstation back cover.
10. In Workstation, verify zero volts AC at breaker between the brown and blue wires.
1-30
11. Power is now locked out.

In the event service will continue into another day, and/or the machine will cause a
hazard if reenergized after the authorized employee leaves the location, leave the A/C
NOTE cord cover installed with a “transition” lock and yellow tag attached.
If more than authorized employee is going to conduct service on the same system, at the
same time, multiple locking devices must be employed and each authorized employee
must adhere to the entire LOTO procedure.
Gravitational/mechanical energy
By removing the following components, unexpected gravitational energy can be released.
CAUTION Removing the X-Ray tube, image intensifier, or the C weldment can cause the rear of the
C-arm to tilt and hit the floor. Place a block of wood under the rear of the C-arm to
prevent tilting crush hazard.
Testing and Positioning During Service

In the event that lockout/tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the energy isolating devices,
for testing or positioning purposes, the following sequence shall be followed:
1. Clear the machine of tools and materials.
2. Ensure that all employees/individuals in area are safely positioned or removed.
3. Remove energy control measures.
4. Energize system and proceed with testing or positioning.
5. De-energize system and reapply energy control measure.
1-31
Restore Power After Service

1. Re-inspect work area for hazards.
2. Reinstall Workstation covers.
3. Turn on breaker on the Workstation.
4. Connect main interconnect cable to the C-arm.
5. Notify all affected personnel that power is being restored.
6. Remove red lock and tag.
7. Energize the system.
8. Verify proper system operation.
9. Inform customer that system is ready to be returned to service.
High voltage cables, electrolytic capacitors, can retain a dangerous static charge for long
periods after power has been removed. Some devices can acquire a charge spontaneously
WARNING without direct contact with other circuitry. Do not touch these components unless power has
been completely removed and they have been discharged. Equipment that contains high
power electrical components must be serviced only by personnel familiar with proper safety
procedures for working near these components. Disconnect AC power before discharging
static electricity in components such as electrolytic capacitors and high voltage cables. Failure
to heed this message will result in death or severe personal injury. Allow adequate time for
static charges to discharge through bleeder resistors. Use a high wattage resistor when
discharging circuits to avoid burns. Have someone watch while you work near high voltages.
This person must remain clear of all circuitry and be prepared to turn off the power to the
system and render aid in an emergency.
1-32
Chapter2. System Overview
2.1. System Descriptions

2.1.1. System overview
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product is intended to provide fluoroscopic and film imaging
of the patient in diagnostic and surgical applications. Clinical applications may include, but are not
limited to, orthopedic, Pain Management Procedures and General Surgery. Such users will use this
system on a daily basis.
WARNING Only properly trained persons can operate this equipment.
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product includes:

Mobile C-Arm
‒ high frequency X-Ray generator
‒ image intensifier
‒ GigE CCD camera and console
‒ Collimator
Mobile Workstation
‒ Dual LCD monitors
‒ Computer
‒ Power distribution unit
‒ External storage media (USB), etc
Options
‒ DVD R/W Rom (External storage media)
‒ Thermal Printer, DICOM Printer
‒ Laser aimer on the image intensifier
‒ Laser aimer on the tube
‒ 30cm skin spacer
‒ Film cassette holder
‒ Video Distributor for External DVI video output
‒ Removable Filter
‒ Removable Grid
‒ Dual 19” Mono LCD Monitor (only for Brivo OEC 785)
‒ Wireless Network Interface (WNI) (only for Brivo OEC 865)
‒ Two-pedal Footswitch
2-2
System Overview
‒ Software Options: OptionBasicDicom, OptionDicomQ&R, OptionDicomMpps, OptionAnnotation,

OptionMeasurement
The C-Arms derive their name from the rigid, C-shaped weldment that supports the Image Intensifier,
collimator, CCD Camera, and X-ray tube. These components together are commonly called the “C”,
and the entire assembly from the casters up is known as the “C-Arm”.
The X-Ray tube generates an X-ray beam that is shaped and oriented by the collimator. After
passing through patient anatomy, the beam is directed onto a film cassette to produce a
radiographic film image, or through the image intensifier and CCD camera, to convert the X-ray
image to a video signal that is transmitted to the Workstation for display, processing, and storage.
2-3
2.1.2. Component Locator
1. Image intensifier and CCD camera

2. Lateral rotation movement brake handle
3. Orbital movement brake handle
4. Skin spacer
5. X-ray tube head (X-ray tube and collimator)
6. Front wheel
7. Rear wheel
8. Wig-wag movement brake handle
9. Steering handle
10. Horizontal movement brake handle
11. C-arm control panel
12. Hand switch
13. Brake release pedal
14. Brake pedal
15. Driving handle
16. Emergency switch
17. Footswitch socket
18. Key switch
19. Interconnect cable socket
2-4
System Overview
1. Exposure indicator
2. Mouse
3. Cabinet for printer
4. USB connector
5. Power on/off
6. Universal wheel
7. LCD Monitors
8. Workstation membrane keyboard
9. DVD driver
10. Brake pedal
11. Central control wheel
12. Handles
13. Room Control Connector
14. Network interface
15. Wireless network interface switch
16. Interconnect cable
17. Digital Video Interface (DVI)
18. Power Cable, Incoming circuit breaker and Power on indicator
2-5
Brivo OEC 715/785/865/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product Service Manual
2.1.3. System block
System Schematics please refer to appendix.
2-6
System Overview
2.2. Subsystem
2.2.1. Power Distribution and Control
Interlock
In interlock loop, Interconnect Cable, Display Board, Collimator Control Board, Mainframe Control Board, Filament
Driver Board, KV Control Board and Power Distribution Unit Board compose a safety loop.
Once the interconnect cable between C-Arm and the Workstation is removed or any PCBs in C-Arm loose from
slot due to collision or other unexpected situation, the relay K4 (on Power Distribution Unit Board) will not be
energized so that the Mainframe can't be powered on. Workstation will boot up and just work in Review Station
status.
Power Distribution Unit Board

THEORY OF OPERATION
Power Supply Overview
The power of PDU board is driven by the main input power and the secondary side from main transformer
28VAC and 220VAC output.
2-7
Power Input
AC main power input:
This is a AC main input with bias ±15%. It supports multiple rated voltages configuration with
100V/110V/120V/200V/220V/230V/240VAC (RMS).
Secondary side of main transformer:
Another input comes from the secondary side output of main transformer. The rated voltage is 220V (RMS)
and 28V (RMS) for up-down board and mainframe.
Power On Board
+24V
When the main input power is ok with no gross over and under voltage condition, the relay K6 is activated
and the AC voltage of secondary side of start_up transformer (BT2) is applied at the D7 (2W06), then the
rectified DC voltage connected to the input pins of U4 (LM317T) and the output voltage is about +24VDC by
the configuration of R10 and R8. The +24V voltage is mainly to drive relays and get other necessary DC
power on board.
VCC_+12V
To make sure the WKS on/off control relay (K7) work properly in AC main power lost condition, the VCC_+12V
DC power use dual power method by the simple parallel of CMPTR_+12V and +12V. CMPTR_+12V is
connected the +12V power from computer and +12V is generated from the conversion of low dropout
regulator LM2940CT-12(D26).
+10V, +5V, +3.3V
To get more accurate voltage reference in voltage comparison circuit, the +10V power is achieved by the
+10V precision voltage reference REF01SC3 (D9).
+5V power is generated by the LM2940CS-5.0 (D8) and +3.3V power is generated by the LM1084-3.3.(U5)
2-8
System Overview
Power Output
The two channel AC voltages are generated from this board and then apply to the main transformer primary
side and mainframe accordingly.
Grounding Connection
In the PDU board there is an analog ground (AGND), digital ground (DGND) and a protective earth (PE).
Function Implement
The Power distribution Unit (PDU) board is mounted in the workstation and provides the controlled power for
main transformer and mainframe. It is responsible for several main functions as follows.
- Main transformer primary side Inrush Current Suppression
- Mainframe side Inrush Current Suppression
- Normal Mode Voltage Surge Suppression
- Common Mode Voltage Surge Suppression
- Gross over and under voltage lock-out
- Line RMS Voltage Conversion Circuit & Voltage Comparator
- State Detection and Signal Drive Circuit
- The Intelligent Power Control Unit
- UPS control logic
The power on board comes from the output of the start-up transformer and generates the necessary DC
power like +24V, +12V, +10V, +5V, +3.3V.
2-9
An Altera CPLD U1 is used as main controller on the board; it controls most of the relays on the board,
generates the signal by the user interface and communicates with SIB board
Power on scheduling
To achieve the inrush current suppression for the primary side of the main transformer, power resistors R
(15Ohm, 50W) shall be used in system configuration. Approximately 2 seconds after power with no gross
over/under voltage fault is applied by the relay K1, relay K2 closes, bypassing the resistors R, reducing IR
voltage drop, and allowing them to cool. To avoid the risk that the resistor R will be heated and burned when
the K2 is in failure, relay K1 shall be energized for only about 1s.
Similarly, to achieve the inrush current suppression for the mainframe side, power resistors R(15Ohm,50W)
shall be also used in the secondary side of main transformer. The 220V voltage winding is applied to the
mainframe by the K3 and K4. When the secondary voltage of main transformer with no load is OK, K3 will be
energized first, then the K4 closes to shorten the R to reduce the power loss, the K3 will be energized for
about 1s to avoid the risk that the resistor R will be heated and burned when the K4 is in failure.
The 28V voltage winding is directly applied by the relay K5.
UPS status for Power On/Off
Normal Power off system
1. Power on system and inspect UPS button led and LCD status.
2. Front three LEDs and LCD backlight are lighted up, then a beep happen, LCD shows UPS status.
3. At that time, system will boot up successfully, then power off system. And inspect UPS status.
4. After system software exits successfully, a beep happen again, LCD shows nothing, but front three LEDs
and LCD backlight are still lighted up.
5. After 1 minute to 5 minutes, front three LEDs and LCD backlight extinguish.
Abnormal Power off system
1. Power on system and inspect UPS button led and LCD status.
2. Front three LEDs and LCD backlight are lighted up, then a beep happen, LCD shows UPS status.
3. At that time, system will boot up successfully, then unplug system AC power (please make sure battery is
fully charged) and inspect UPS status.
4. UPS works on battery mode and gives four beeps every 30 seconds, and system software find AC lost and
power off system automatically.
5. After system software exits successfully, LCD shows nothing, but front three LEDs and LCD backlight are
still lighted up.
6. After 1 minute to 5 minutes, front three LEDs and LCD backlight extinguish.
2-10
System Overview
Timing Sequence Chart

1s
2s
1s 2s 1s
1s
220V_Power
Air_break 350ms
HW_SW
K1
2s
K2
Ups_ctrl
Air
CPTR_12V
Heartbeat
INTERELOCK = 1
k3
k5
k4
k7
Normal power on timing Normal power off timing
Interface
AC power input
AC power input is listed as follows.
Name Description Pin Attribution Scale Comment
L PJ1-1 POWER
L1 AC power input for PJ1-2 POWER 100/110/120/
N PDU PJ1-3 POWER 200/220/230/240VAC
N1 PJ1-4 POWER
2-11
Power Indicator interface

The voltages used to control the power indicator are listed as follows.
PWR_LED_L PJ1-5 Power
Power indicator 100/110/120VAC
PWR_LED_N PJ1-6 Power
Main transformer primary side interface
The voltages applied to the main transformer primary side are listed as follows.
PRI_TRANS_L1 PDU provide PJ7-1 Power 100/110/
PRI_TRANS_N1 voltages to the PJ7-2 120/200/220/230/240V
PRI_TRANS_L2 primary side of PJ7-3 Power AC
PRI_TRANS_N2 main transformer PJ7-4
Main transformer secondary side interface
The voltages applied to the main transformer secondary side are listed as follows.
SEC_TRANS_220V_L Output of PJ2-3 Power 100/110/
SEC_TRANS_220V_N secondary PJ2-6 120/200/
SEC_TRANS_28V_L side of main PJ2-1 Power 220/230/
SEC_TRANS_28V_N transformer PJ2-4 240VAC
Mainframe side interface
The voltages applied to the mainframe side are listed as follows.
MF_AC220V_L PJ6-4
AC Output of PDU power 220VAC
MF_AC220V_N PJ6-5
delivered to
MF_AC28V_L PJ6-1
mainframe power 28VAC
MF_AC28V_N PJ6-2
Start_up transformer interface
The voltages applied to primary side of the start_up transformer are listed as follows.
AUX_PWR_IN_L1 PJ13-1
Input winding power 100/110/
AUX_PWR_IN_N1 PJ13-4
120/200/220/230/240V
AUX_PWR_IN_L2 PJ13-3
Input winding power AC
AUX_PWR_IN_N2 PJ13-6

AUX_PWR_OUT_L1 Output PJ12-1
winding (24V power 24VAC
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1 PJ12-3
normaly)
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2 Output PJ12-2
winding (24V power 24VAC
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2 PJ12-4
normaly)
2-12
System Overview
Power on/off button interface

The voltages applied to the power on/off button are listed as follows.
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1 The button switch PJ5-1 Power 0/+12VDC
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2 on/off terminal PJ5-2 Power 0/+12VDC
BUTTON_LED_+12V The button PJ5-3 Power 0/+12VDC
BUTTON_LED_GND indicator PJ5-4 power 0
CMPTR_+12V interface
The +12VDC power from computer are listed as follows.
+12V_CMPTR +12VDC Power from computer PJ4-1 power 0/+12VDC
GND_CMPTR GND Reference point PJ4-2 power 0
Interlock interface
The interlock signals for cable &board are listed as follows.
INTERLOCK_CABLE Interlock cable signal PJ3-3 signal 0/+12VDC
INTERLOCK_COM GND Reference point PJ3-2 signal 0/+12VDC
INTERLOCK_BOARD Interlock board signal PJ3-1 signal 0/+12VDC
PC power on/off switch interface
The switch on/off signal for PC are listed as follows.
CMPTR_CTRL_1 PJ10-1 signal
PC ON/OFF Control
CMPTR_CTRL_2 PJ10-2 signal
JTAG interface
TCLK JTAG input pin PJ9-1 signal 0/+3.3V
GND GND PJ9-2,10 power 0/+3.3V
TDO JTAG input pin PJ9-3 signal 0/+3.3V
VCC_+3.3V +3.3VDC power PJ9-4 power 0/+3.3V
TMS JTAG input pin PJ9-5 signal 0/+3.3V
TDI JTAG input pin PJ9-9 signal 0/+3.3V
System Interface Board interface
The signals to SIB are listed as follows.
SYS_PWR_REQ system switch on/off signal PJ8-1 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
GND GND PJ8-2 GND 0V
MAINS_LOST_ERR status of Mainframe Power PJ8-3 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
transformer secondary over
SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR PJ8-4 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
voltage signal
transformer secondary
SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR PJ8-5 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
under voltage signal
+12V voltage from
12V_ERR PJ8-6 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
computer fault signal
WKS boot up ready fault
RDY_ERR PJ8-7 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
signal
2-13
mainframe power detection

MF_PWR PJ8-8 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
signal
connection status signal
PDU_CONNECT_2 PJ8-9 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
from PDU to SIB
connection status signal
PDU_CONNECT_1 PJ8-10 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
from PDU to SIB
RSRV_FROM_PDU_1 Reserved signal from PDU PJ8-11 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
RSRV_FROM_SIB_1 Reserved signal from SIB PJ8-15 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
BEEP_INVALID_KEY_C
Invalid key beep command PJ8-19 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
MD
interlock board connection
INTLC_BOARD PJ8-20 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
status signal
acknowledge signal
ACK_PDU2SIB PJ8-21 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
between PDU and SIB
system power off
SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD PJ8-22 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
command
system power off deny
SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY PJ8-23 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
command
mainframe power on
MF_PWR_ON_CMD PJ8-24 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
command
RDY WKS boot up ready PJ8-25 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
BEEP_ERR_CMD error beep command PJ8-26 digital 0/+12V (>6V=High)
UPS interface
UPS switch on/off control signal interface is shown as follows:
UPS_OUTPUT UPS output status signal PJ14-1 Analog 0/10-14VDC
GND GND PJ14-2 0 0
ON_BATT UPS battery/line status signal PJ14-3 Analog 0/10-14VDC
REMOTE UPS remote signal PJ14-4 Digital 3.3V/5V TTL
UPS switch off interface in emergency is shown as follows:
EMERGENCY_
PJ15-1 Digital 3.3V/5V TTL
BUTTON_1 UPS EMERGENCY SWICH
EMERGENCY_ OFF BUTTON
PJ15-2 Digital 3.3V/5V TTL
BUTTON_2
Test Point:
Name Description Description
TP1 +12V +12V power on board
TP4 +3.3V +3.3V power on board
2-14
System Overview
TP6 CPLD_INTLC_BRD_A Interlock board signal

TP7 CPLD_INTLC_CABLE_A Interlock cable signal
TP8 AC Output of main transformer secondary side voltage divider
TP9 DC output of line gain in RMS-DC conversion circuit
TP10 The reference point of under/over voltage protection circuit
TP11-TP15 Reserved test points for debug for CPLD
TP16 SIB_INTLC_BRD Interlock board signal for SIB board
DC output of main transformer secondary voltage RMS-DC
TP18
conversion
TP19 DC output of follower in RMS-DC conversion
TP20 Over voltage test point in start-up process
TP21 Over voltage test point in normal operation process
TP22 Under voltage test point in start-up process
TP23 Under voltage test point in normal operation process
TP24 GNDA Reference point for analog circuit
TP25 GNDA Reference point for analog circuit
LEDs:
Name Color Description
HL1 Green +3.3V power indicator
HL2 Green +5V power indicator
HL4 Red Secondary side over voltage fault indicator in start up process
HL5 Red Secondary side under voltage fault indicator in start up process
HL6 Red Secondary side voltage under voltage fault indicator in normal operation process
HL7 Red Secondary side voltage over voltage fault indicator in normal operation process
HL8 Green +12V power indicator
HL9 Green Reset status indicator
HL10 Green Interlock cable status indicator
HL11 Green Interlock board status indicator
HL14 Green UPS output state signal
HL16 Green Mainframe power status indicator
HL17 red +12V error status indicator
HL18 Green Interlock cable lock status indicator
HL19 Green PDU connect2 status indicator
HL20 red RDY error status indicator
HL22 Green PDU connect status indicator
HL3 Green For Debug only
HL12 Green For Debug only
2-15
2.2.2. Mother Board

The Mother Board is installed in the E-box of the Main Frame; it is responsible for below three functions:
- Realize power and fuse allocation,
- Offer connectors for cables to or from Collimator, Display Board, KV Control Board, Sealing Board, CCU, I.I.,
Hand Switch, Footswitch, Emergency Key Switch, Filament, DC Power Supply Boxes, Laser Aimer, and etc.
- Offer interfaces and installation base for three children boards: Collimator Control Board, Mainframe Control
Board and Filament Drive Board.
The structure of MB is shown as follows:
Mother Board
Extension interfaces
Power
Fuse
interface
CCB MCB FDB
interfa interfa interfac
ce ce e
2-16
System Overview
2.2.3. Mainframe Control Board

The MCB (Mainframe Control Board) is located in C-Arm mainframe and is the main control unit in mainframe. It is
responsible for five functions.
- X-ray control: KV, mA and exposure control interfacing with collimator board, filament board, and KV control
board
- Image chain control: control camera and image intensifier
- User interface: key input and LED display interfacing with display board
- System monitor: check various error and warning
- Communication with workstation
The structure of MCB interface is illustrated in the following diagram.
2-17
Functional Block
MCB consists of 10 function blocks, which are illuminated as follows:
MCB functional Block

MCU function
- Read the registers of peripheral controller to get the status of sub-systems, such as getting the alarm
status, etc.
- Write the registers of peripheral controller to control the status of sub-systems, such as PIO
(Programmable Input Output), light indicator, buzzer, etc.
- Sample watchdog bite signal from supervisor circuit to check peripheral is still working
- Check all switch signals to respond user’s input
- Communicate with Control Panel board to get the key input and control the LED output
- A/D convert all analog signal, such as shutter location, temperature of oil tank, mA feedback, KV
feedback, etc.
- Communicate with DAC to control mA and KV output
- Communication with Workstation
- Communication with peripheral controller to report the working status of MCU
Peripheral controller function
- Sample the status of input pins, and record them into status registers polled by MCU
- Set output pins according to the control registers accessed by MCU
- Generate interrupt signal of alarm to MCU in order to request the processing
- Generate exposure control signals
- Check switch stuck error
- Control mAS control signals
Operational amplifier circuit function
- Amplify or adjust input analog signals, such as kV feedback, mA feedback, temperature, shutter
location sample signal, and output those signals to the ADC unit (Analog Digital Converter)
- Amplify or adjust analog signals output from DAC (Digital Analog Converter), such as kV setting, mA
setting, mA preheat, and output those signals to other sub-systems
- mA PI control
2-18
System Overview
Transceiver
- Transceiver circuit is responsible for regulating voltage level and supplying driving current.
Optical coupling
- Optical coupling circuit is responsible for changing voltage level and isolating the ground of circuit at
each sides of optical coupler.
DAC
- DAC (Digital Analog Converter) circuit is responsible for output analog signal, such as KV setting, mA
setting and mA pre-heat.
VFC
- VFC (Voltage Frequency Converter) circuit is responsible for converting mA signal to frequency value
in order to implement mAs function.
Communication
- RS485 protocol is used for MCU to communicate with workstation or DAP.
- SPI protocol is used for MCU to communicate with Control Panel.
Indication
- Indication circuit includes LED and buzzer, which are controlled by MCU and peripheral controller.
Miscellaneous hardware
- Other circuits include power supply, supervisor circuit, watchdog circuit, clock generator, and security
control, etc.
Power Distribution
Power Supply Overview
The power of MCB is drove by power supply 1 & 2 via mother board, and +3.3V, +2.5V & +1.2V are generated
from +5V_PS1. Power supplies are listed as follows.
Name Description Source Scale Pin Comment
+5V_PS1 +5V power supply PS1 +5V J2-A5/B5/C5 -
GND_+5V Reference of +5V_PS1 PS1 0V J2-A4/B4/C4 -
-15V_PS1 -15V power supply PS1 -15V J2-A15/A16 -
+15V_PS1 +15V power supply PS1 +15V J2-C15/C16 -
AGND Reference of -15V_PS1 & +15V_PS1 PS1 0V J2-A9/B9/C9 -
+24V_PS1 +24V power supply PS1 +24V J1-B9 -
GND_+24V_PS1 Reference of +24V_PS2 PS1 0V J1-B10 -
+15V_PS1_D +15V power supply PS1 +15V J1-A29/B29/C29 -
GND_+15V_PS1_D Reference of +15V_PS1_D PS1 0V J1-A12/B12/C12 -
-15V_PS1_D -15V power supply PS1 -15V J1-C32 -
GND_-15V_PS1_D Reference of -15V_PS1_D PS1 0V J1-A32 -
+24V_PS2 +24V power supply PS2 +24V J1-A1/B1/C1 -
GND_+24V_PS2 Reference of +24V_PS2 PS2 0V J1-A6/B6/C6 -
+12V_PS2 +12V power supply PS2 +12V J1-B5 -
GND_+12V_PS2 Reference of +12V_PS2 PS2 0V J1-A5 -
+3.3V Internal power +5V_PS1 +3.3V - By LM1084
2-19
Grounding Connection
All the grounds of power are connected by mother board with one point strategy.
Collimator Control
Collimator control includes
- Collimator Shutter open/close control
- Collimator Shutter rotation control
- Collimator Iris open/close control
MCU gets user’s command from Control panel, and sends setting value of position information of Shutter
and Iris to Collimator by SPI bus. Meanwhile, MCU gets feedback value of position of Shutter and Iris from
Collimator by analog signal.
Analog signals (IRIS_POS_F/SHUT_ROT_POS_F/SHUT_WIDTH_POS_F), which are from collimator control
board to MCB, are sampled by ADC unit of MCU finally. MCB sends digital setting values to CCB via SPI bus.
The voltage level of all the digital signals from MCB to collimator control board is transformed from +3.3V to
+15V by optical coupling circuit.
Filament Control
The voltage level of all the digital signals between MCB and filament control board are transformed from
+3.3V to +15V by optical coupling circuit.
MCB sends digital setting values to DAC with SPI bus. Differential operational amplifier circuit amplifies
differential signals MA_CAT and KV_GND from tube, and outputs mA_sample to PI control circuit. PI amplifies
mA_sample and two signals out from DAC circuit, mA_setting and mA_preheat, and outputs signal MAC to
filament control board. The structure of PI control circuit is shown as follows.
The difference between signal mA_sample and mA_setting is output to proportional and integral circuit,
respectively. The outputs of those circuits are added by signal mA_preheat, then the result signal MAC is
output to filament control board.
The theory of PI control circuit is as follows. The tube current is controlled by signal MAC. Initially MAC equals
mA_preheat, which is a preset value corresponding to the user setting value mA_setting. Signal mA_sample
is the sample of tube current. If mA_sample is different with mA_setting, the error will be amplified,
integrated and added to signal mA_preheat by PI control circuit. Then the output signal MAC of PI control
circuit controls tube current in order to make the error be smaller. This process goes on, and finally
mA_sample value is equal to mA_setting value, and PI control is stable.
KV Control
After optical coupling circuit transforms the voltage level of 6 alarm signals, those signals will be sampled
and recorded by registers in Peripheral Controller. MCU will get these alarm status by local bus between
Peripheral Controller and MCU.
Digital signal EXPOSURE_COMMAND and SAFETY_EN are from MCB to KV control board, whose voltage level
is transformed from +3.3V to +15V by optical coupling circuit.
Analog signal KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT, which is from KV control board to MCB, is amplified (or adjusted) by
operational amplifier circuit and sampled by ADC unit of MCU finally.
Analog signal KV_SET_INPUT is from MCB to DAC through SPI bus, then to KV control board, and amplified (or
adjusted) by operational amplifier circuit.
2-20
System Overview
Camera Control
FRAME_SYNC and Last Image Hold (LIH) signals are critical for exposure control and are addressed in
exposure module. MCU sends GAIN information to camera to control the brightness of image.
Digital signals LIH is through optical coupling circuit from Peripheral controller of MCB to Camera. Digital
signal FRAME_SYNC is from Camera to MCB. It is the global synchronization signal of X-Ray control function,
so it acts as clock and interrupt signal to peripheral controller and MCU, respectively.
GAIN signal from MCB to camera is through RS485 bus.
Image Intensifier Control
II control here means II field switch only. F1/F2 signals are controlled by MCU directly.
Digital signals (F1/F2) are from MCB to II. The voltage level of those signals is transformed from +3.3V to +24V
by optical coupling circuit.
MCB outputs IDRG_HC signal to control the relay. When the relay is close, II_PWR is connected with +24V
and II_GND is connected with GND_+24V. Therefore, II is power-on. When the relay is open, II_PWR and
II_GND are both connected to GND_+24V, and then II is power-off.
Sealing Board
Analog signals KV_GND and MA_CAT are the anode and cathode of mA current signal, respectively. The
current transforms to voltage signal by flowing through a resistor. ADC unit of MCU in MCB samples this
signal after its scale is transformed to 0-2.5V by operational amplifier circuit.
There are two temperature measurement circuits in sealing board. One’s output is analog signal OIL_TEMP,
whose scale is 0-2V. ADC unit of MCU in MCB samples this signal after its scale is transformed to 0-2.5V by
operational amplifier circuit. MCU will compare this value with preset threshold to generate oil tank warm
warning and hot alarm.
The other’s output is connected/open status between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and THERMAL_SWITCH_B. If the
temperature of oil tank is higher than a preset threshold, the relationship between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and
THERMAL_SWITCH_B changes from connected to open. This relationship is transformed by optical coupling
circuit, which is shown as follows. The output of optical coupling circuit is connected to GPIO (General
Purpose Input Output) of MCU.
When THERMAL_SWITCH_A and THERMAL_SWITCH_B are connected, transistor is open. Then optical
coupling do not work, and signal OUTPUT is high logic at +3.3V. Otherwise, when THERMAL_SWITCH_A and
THERMAL_SWITCH_B are open, signal OUTPUT is low logic at 0V.
Workstation Communication
Communication interface between WK and MCB is full duplex RS485 bus.
Control Panel
SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) is used as communication layer protocol between MCB and Control panel.
Optical coupling circuit is used as physical layer. Because signals are transported on a long distance line,
they are prone to interfering by noise. So voltage promotion technical has been adopted because of its
width voltage threshold. The signal level is changed from +3.3V to +15V, and changed back to +3.3V by
optical coupling circuit.
Digital signal YELLOW_LED control the exposure LED on control panel, and the changes of signal level are
the same as SPI signals.
MCU in MCB connects MAX6954 and MAX7301 in Control panel with SPI bus. MCU is master of SPI bus, while
MAX6954 and MAX7301 are slaves. Master initiates every communication session, and only one slave, which
2-21
is selected by chip selection signal of bus, will respond the session. MCU reads or writes the registers in
slaves to get the status and control the output of slave.
MAX6954 is a key and LED controller. When a key press action is detected, an interrupt will route to MCU.
Then MCU will get the key matrix status to identify which key has been pressed by reading the status
registers in MAX6954. Meanwhile, MCU changes the 7-segent LED display by writing the control registers in
MAX6954.
MAX7301 is a LED controller. Similarly to MAX6954, MCU changes the LED display by writing the control
registers in MAX7301.
User Interface Control
Key Switch
As shown in Figure 17, the connected/open status between ON (or X-RAY OFF) and COMMON is transformed
to digital signal Exp_lift_column_enable (or Lift_column_enable) by optical coupling circuit. MCU get the
status of key switch by sampling this signal. The optical coupling circuit is shown as follows.
Signal ON corresponds to signal INPUT_A, and signal COMMON corresponds to signal INPUT_B. Then signal
ON corresponds to signal OUTPUT. When INPUT_A and INPUT_B are connected, transistor in optical coupler
is open and OUTPUT is 0V. Otherwise, OUTPUT is +3.3V.
Hand Switch
The circuit and theory are similar to key switch except checking the switch stuck error. The switch stuck error
occurs when one of HAND_SWITCH and HAND_SECURITY keeps inactive for more than 10 seconds after the
other has been active.
As shown in Figure xx, exposure command line and security line are independent by using different routes.
Foot Switch
The circuit and theory are similar to hand switch include checking the switch stuck error.
Emergency Switch
The circuit and theory are similar to voltage transmit circuit.
Removable Filter
The circuit and theory are similar to switch.
Indicator
Peripheral controller of MCB outputs digital signal INDICATOR_+24V corresponding to signal INPUT shown in
Figure 17, which is 0V/+3.3V voltage level. Then optical coupling circuit transforms it to digital signal
X_RAY_ON corresponding to signal OUTPUT, which is 12mA current. Signal X_RAY_ON connects to one
termination of indicator, and the other termination connects to GND_+24V, which is the reference of +24V.
When X_RAY_ON is active, the indicator will light.
Buzzer
6 different tones are generated.
- Normal exposure: continuous Du-Du-Du with du 100ms and cycle 1s
- HLF/RAD/DS exposure: continuous Du-Du-Du with du 100ms and cycle 500ms
- Uncompleted XRAY (switch release early): Di-Di-Di-Di with Di 100ms and cycle 250 ms
- Exposure exceeds 5 minutes: continuous Di
- System Fault: Di-Di-Di-Di with Di 100ms and cycle 250 ms and then 1s interval and over again
2-22
System Overview
The circuit of buzzer control uses audio operational amplifier.

Auto Brightness Control
MCU gets IBS (Image Brightness Signal) from WKS through RS485, and looks up the ABC (Auto Brightness
Control) table with IBS value, and get the setting value of kV and mA. Finally, the kV and mA control analog
signals are output to KV control board and filament control board through DAC and operational amplifier
circuit or PI circuit sequentially.
Manual kV Setting
Control panel samples the manual kV setting value, and transports it to MCU by SPI bus. MCU looks up the
responding data and sets DAC circuit. Operational amplifier circuit amplifies kV control signal from DAC, and
outputs signal KV_SET_INPUT to kV control board finally.
Manual mA Setting
Control panel samples the manual mA setting value, and transports it to MCU by SPI bus. MCU looks up the
responding data and sends out signals to DAC circuit. The mA control analog signals, KVC and MAC, are
output to filament control board through DAC and PI circuit sequentially.
mAs Control
The setting value of mA is 20mA (or 10mA) in mAS mode. mA sample signal is transformed to pulse by VFC
circuit. The pulse is used as clock signal of down counter in peripheral controller. When mAS mode is set, the
mAS time is set in down counter as the initial value. While exposure starts, down counter works at the same
time. When the value of down counter reduces to 0, exposure stops.
High Level Fluoro
Logically, there is a table that consists of 4 columns: input kV value, input mA value, output kV value and
output mA value. MCU looks up the table by input kV and mA value, and gets output kV and mA value as kV
and mA setting respectively, then outputs those setting.
Auto mA Calibration
Because valid exposure period in each frame is smaller than 40 ms, response time from MAC signal set out
to mA stable should be within a certain time. Meanwhile, the response time is related with the parameters of
tube. The key parameter is the current of tube before exposure. If it is very near the current in exposure
followed, the response time will be short enough to meet the requirement.
Therefore, the rational is that a preheat table is setup to provide the mA_preheat signal in section 6.3.4
Figure 5, which give out a proper current of tube before exposure, and PI control will control mA stable in
several ms’ in exposure.
Unfortunately, the variation exists among the parameters of tubes. Although the variation is small, unique
preheat table should be setup for each tube. In order to get this unique preheat table, auto mA calibration
process shall be as follows.
- The variation is so small that a draft preheat table is generated from mass experiment, which is usable
for calibration
- MCU sends out mA_preheat signal according to the draft preheat table instead of MAC signal to filament
board
- Sample mA feedback (mA_sample signal in section 6.3.4 Figure 5) with ADC unit of MCU
- Then the relationship between MAC and mA of the tube is gotten
- Interpolation to get a unique preheat table of the tube, in which mA value is normalized
2-23
Exposure Control
Peripheral controller controls the exposure command and camera LIH (last image hold) as well as other
peripheral control signals. Refer to PDL document.
Debug
JTAG of Peripheral controller and proprietary COM port of MCU has reserved for debug.
Interface
Overview
MCB is plugged in Mother Board, and is connected with other sub-systems through Mother Board. The
electrical interface of Mother Board, please refer to Motherboard section.
The external physical interfaces of MCB are defined in the table below:
Connector Name Type Gender Description
J1 MCB digital DN41612 C Pin All digital signals from/to other sub-system, such as
signal Type Male collimator board, filament board, sealing board, camera,
connector KV control board etc.
J2 MCB analog DN41612 Half Pin All analog signals from/to other sub-system, such as
signal C Type Male collimator board, filament board, sealing board, camera,
connector KV control board etc.
Collimator Control
Signals from MCB to collimator control board are listed as follows.
Name Description Attribution Scale Pin Comment
SPI_SCLK_CCB SPI clock signal Digital 0V/+15V J1-B22 -
SPI_DIN_CCB SPI data from MCB to CCB Digital 0V/+15V J1-C19 -
SPI_SYNC_CCB SPI chip select signal Digital 0V/+15V J1-A21 +15V=effective
RSV_CCB Reversed for future Digital 0V/+15V J1-B15 -
Signals from collimator control board to MCB are listed as follows.

IRIS_POS_F Feedback voltage from Iris Analog 0-5V J2-C12 -
position rheostat
SHUT_ROT_POS_F Feedback voltage from shutter Analog 0-5V J2-A12 -
rotation position rheostat
SHUT_WIDTH_POS_F Feedback voltage from shutter Analog 0-5V J2-B12 -
width position rheostat
Filament Control
Signals from MCB to filament control board are listed as follows.
FILDIS_FDB System general alarm to disable Digital 0/+15V J1-B14 +15V= effective
filament current, Trigger by anyone of
several alarms
FCSSW_FDB Large focus function selected Digital 0/+15V J1-A15 +15V= effective
MAC_FDB Fluoro mA control signal Analog 3.0-5.0V J2-C11 -
2-24
System Overview
Signals from filament control board to MCB are listed as follows.

OCALM_FDB Overcurrent alarm of +24V power Digital 0/+15V J1-C16 +15V= effective
supply in filament board
PWMC_FDB PWM control signal of filament current Analog 0/+15V J2-B11 -
KV Control
Signals from MCB to kV control board are listed as follows.
SAFETY_EN Safety line for EXPOSURE_COMMAND Digital 0/+15V J1-B19 +15V= effective
EXPOSURE_EN Exposure command Digital 0/+15V J1-A17 +15V= effective
KV_SET_INPUT KV set value to KV control board Analog 0-6V, Unit is 20KV/V J2-C10 -
Signals from kV control board to MCB are listed as follows.
KV_LOW_ALM_N KV too low alarm, lower Digital 0/+15V J1-B17 0V= effective
than 35KV
KV_HIGH_ALM_N KV too High alarm, higher Digital 0/+15V J1-A18 0V= effective
than 120KV
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N Inverter over current alarm Digital 0/+15V J1-A16 0V= effective
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N IGBT error alarm Digital 0/+15V J1-C17 0V= effective
DC_ERROR_ALM_N DC power bus error alarm Digital 0/+15V J1-B18 0V= effective
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N KV unbalance in two Digital 0/+15V J1-C18 0V= effective
bridges of inverter.
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT KV sample value from KV Analog 0-6V, Unit J2-A10 -
control board 20KV/V
Camera Control
Signals from MCB to Camera are listed as follows.
LIH Last image hold to camera Digital 0V/+15V J1-C4 0V=last image hold
+15V=living
GPIO_IN2 General Purpose Input signal 2 to Digital 0V/+15V J1-C30 Reversed for future
Camera
GPIO_IN3 General Purpose Input signal 3 to Digital 0V/+15V J1-A11 Reversed for future
Camera
RXD485+ One of two differential signals Differential +/-(1.5-5V) J2-B1 -
from MCB to Camera signal
RXD485- The other one of two differential J2-A1 -
signals from MCB to Camera
2-25
Signals from Camera to MCB are listed as follows.

TXD485+ One of two differential signals from Differential +/-(1.5-5V) J2-C3 -
Camera to MCB signal
TXD485- The other one of two differential J2-C2 -
signals from Camera to MCB
FRAME_SYNC Frame synchronization signal from Digital 0V/+15V J1-B24 -
Camera. Frequency is 25Hz
approximately
GPIO_OUT2 General Purpose Output signal 2 Digital 0V/+15V J1-B21 Reversed for future
from Camera
GPIO_OUT3 General Purpose Output signal 3 Digital 0V/+15V J1-B20 Reversed for future
from Camera
Image Intensifier Control

Signals from MCB to II (Image Intensifier) are listed as follows.
F1 The LSB of three fields code, which Digital 0V/+24V J1-A9 “F2F1”=”00” means that MAG
indicates the MAG size. size is set to 9’’
“F2F1”=”01” means that MAG
size is set to 4.5’’
F2 The MSB of three fields code Digital 0V/+24V J1-A10 “F2F1”=”10” means that MAG
size is set to 6’’
“F2F1”=”11” is invalidation
II_PWR Power supply of II Power 0V/+24V J1- -
A2/B2/C2
II_GND Reference of power Power 0V J1- -
A3/B3/C3
Sealing Board
Signals from sealing board to MCB are listed as follows.
OIL_TEMP Output voltage of Analog 0-5V J2-B13 -
temperature sensor
OIL_TEMP_GND Reference of OIL_TEMP Ground 0V J2-C13 -
THERMAL_SWITCH_A One termination of Passive - J1-B26 THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
temperature switch THERMAL_SWITCH_B
THERMAL_SWITCH_B The other termination of Passive - J1-B27 connected means that
temperature switch temperature is lower than
threshold.
THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
disconnected means that
temperature is higher than
threshold.
MA_CAT The cathode of mA sample Analog 0-20mA J2-A14 -
KV_GND The anode of mA sample Analog - J2-C14 -
2-26
System Overview
UP/DOWN Control Board

Signals from MCB to UP/DOWN control board are listed as follows.
UDB_ENABLE UP/DOWN function enable Digital 0-+15V J1-C14 +15V=effective
Signals from UP/DOWN control board to MCB are listed as follows.
UDB_OVERCUR_N Over current error Digital 0-+15v J1-C9 0V= effective
DOWN_PROTECT_TO_MCB_N Reach limit Digital 0-+15v J1-C10 0V= effective
UP_TO_MCB_N UP key Digital 0-+15v J1-C8 0V= effective
DOWN_TO_MCB_N DOWN key Digital 0-+15v J1-C20 0V= effective
DOWN_SECURITY_TO_MCB_N DOWN_SECURITY key Digital 0-+15v J1-C21 0V= effective
Workstation Communication
Signals from MCB to WK (Workstation) are listed as follows.
WK_Y One of two differential signals from MCB to WK Differential +/-(1.5- J2-B2 -
WK_Z The other one of two differential signals from signal 5V) J2-A2 -
MCB to WK
Signals from WK to MCB are listed as follows.
WK_A One of two differential signals from WK to MCB Differential +/-(1.5- J2-A3 -
WK_B The other one of two differential signals from WK signal 5V) J2-B3 -
to MCB
Display Board
Signals from MCB to Control Panel are listed as follows.
SPI_CLK Clock of SPI bus Digital 0/+15V J1-B23 -
SPI_MOSI Data from MCB to Control Panel Digital 0/+15V J1-C24 -
SPI_/CS1 Chip select 1 for MAX9654 Digital 0/+15V J1-A25 +15V= effective
SPI_/CS2 Chip select 2 for MAX7301 Digital 0/+15V J1-A28 +15V= effective
LED_ Yellow led lights signal Digital 0/+15V J1-C23 0V= effective
YELLOW_N
Signals from Control panel to MCB are listed as follows.
SPI_MISO Data from Control Panel to MCB Digital 0/+15V J1-A23 -
DB_INT Interrupt of Control panel Digital 0/+15V J1-B25 +15V= effective
User Interface Control
Key Switch
Signals from key switch to MCB are listed as follows.
KEYSW_ON The termination which Passive Open/Close J1-C26 KEYSW_ON & KEYSW_COM is
indicates lift column and x-ray connected means both lift column
are both enable and exposure enable function
have been selected.
KEYSW_OFF The termination which Passive Open/Close J1-B16 KEYSW_OFF & KEYSW_COM is
indicates lift column is enable connected means lift column
and x-ray is disable function have been selected.
KEYSW_COM Common termination Passive - J1-A24 -
2-27
Hand Switch
Signals from hand switch to MCB are listed as follows.
HAND_FLU Hand switch Passive Open/Close J1-B28 HAND_FLU & HAND_COM is
termination connected means HAND_FLU
button has pressed
HAND_HLF_SECURITY Hand security line Passive Open/Close J1-C27 -
termination
HAND_HLF High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-B7 HAND_HLF & HAND_COM is
hand switch connected means HAND_HLF
termination button has been pressed
HAND High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-A22 -
_HLU_SECURITY hand security line
termination
HAND_COM Common Passive - J1-C15 -
termination
Foot Switch
Signals from foot switch to MCB are listed as follows.
FOOT_FLU Foot switch Passive Open/Close J1-A27 FOOT_FLU & FOOT_COM is
termination connected means FOOT_FLU
button has been pressed
FOOT_FLU_SECURIT Foot security line Passive Open/Close J1-C28 -
Y termination
FOOT_ HLF High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-A14 FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM is
foot switch connected means FOOT_HLF
FOOT_ High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-C31 -
HLF_SECURITY foot security line
termination
FOOT_BUTTON1 Button 1 Passive Open/Close J1-A20 FOOT_BUTTON1 & FOOT_COM is
connected means FOOT BUTTON 1
has been pressed
has been pressed
FOOT_COM Common Passive - J1-B32 -
termination
2-28
System Overview
Emergency Switch
Signals from emergency switch to MCB are listed as follows.
EMERGENCY_SWT1 One termination of Passive Open/Close J1-C11 EMERGENCY_SWT1 &
Emergency REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1 is not
switch1 connected means
EMERGENCY_SWT has been
pressed
REF_ The other Passive - J1-B11 -
EMERGENCY_SWT1 termination of
Emergency
switch1
EMERGENCY_SWT2 One termination of Passive Open/Close J1-C25 EMERGENCY_SWT2 &
Emergency REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2 is not
switch2 connected means
EMERGENCY_SWT2 has been
pressed
REF_ The other Passive - J1-A26 -
Emergency
switch2
Removable Filter
Signals from removable filter to MCB are listed as follows.
PROTECT_A Removable filter A Digital 0V/+15V J1-B31 +15V= Filter removed
sensor signal
PROTECT_B Removable filter B Digital 0V/+15V J1-B30 +15V= Filter removed
sensor signal
Indicator
Signals from MCB to indicator are listed as follows.
XRAY_INDICATOR_A Anode of indicator Passive - J1-B8 The indicator will be lighted when a
XRAY_INDICATOR_B Cathode of indicator Passive - J1-A8 certain current about 12mA flows
from XRAY_INDICATOR_A through
indicator to XRAY_INDICATOR_B.
Program Port
Program port signals are listed as follows.
SERIAL_TXD Transmit signal of serial port Digital -7V-+7V J1-A31 -
SERIAL_RXD Receive signal of serial port Digital -7V-+7V J1-C22 -
2-29
Interlock Loop
Interlock loop signals are listed as follows.
INTERLOCK_LOOP_A One termination of Passive - J2-B16 INTERLOCK_LOOP_A &
interlock loop INTERLOCK_LOPP_B is connected in
INTERLOCK_LOOP_B The other termination Passive - J2-B15 MCB as part of the whole interlock
of interlock loop loop. If connecter J2 of MCB is
loose, the whole inter loop will be
broken, Mainframe will power off.
Test Points
Reference Name Description
TP1 GND Ground
TP4 KV-CLB KV control signal used to calibrate mA feedback
TP5 KVO KV control signal to KV control board
TP6 MA+ mA feedback signal without KV calibration
TP7 MA-SMP mA sample signal with KV calibration
TP8 MA-SET mA setting signal
TP9 PREHEAT mA preheat signal
TP10 MAC mA control signal to Filament board
TP11 PI Output of proportional & integral circuit
TP12 MA-A mA control signal without PREHEAT
TP13 PULSE mAS control signal
TP14 MAS mAS pulse signal
TP17 MA-OFF mA control signal offset setting
TP18 PWM Filament control signal from FDB
LED Indicators
D12 2V5 Light lights when +2.5V is available
RXD485+ & RXD485-. D20 on MCB lights normally, and flickers in
D20 CAMR communication
KEYSW_OFF & KEYSW_ON & KEYSW_COM. D22 lights when "KEYSW_ON" & turns
D22 KEYON off when "KEYSW_OFF"
D24 CC SPI_CC_CS. D24 on MCB lights normally, and turns off when CCB is drived
FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM. D26 turns off when FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM are
D26 HLFF connected
KEYSW_OFF & KEYSW_ON & KEYSW_COM. D27 lights when "KEYSW_ON" & turns
D27 KEYOFF off when "KEYSW_OFF"
D28 HINT D41 turns off when footswitch interupt signal is available to MCU
D29 SIMO SPI_SIMO. D29 flickers on MCB
THERMAL_SWTICH_A & THERMAL_SWITCH_B.D30 on MCB lights normally, and
D30 THM turns off in overheat error
D31 TEST Reversed for future use
2-30
System Overview
D32 INIT D32 turns off when FPGA configuration completes

HAND_HLF & HAND_COM. D33 turns off when HAND_HLF & HAND_COM are
D33 HLFH connected
D34 SAV FOOT_BUTTON1 & FOOT_COM. D34 turns off when press
D35 WKT WK_A & WK_B. D35 on MCB turns off normally, and flickers in communication
D36 MCU D36 flickers when MCU work well
D37 SOMI SPI_SOMI. D37 flickers on MCB
D38 FSYN FRAME_SYNCH. D38 is flickering on MCB when FRAME_SYNCH is available
D39 MOD FOOT_BUTTON2 & FOOT_COM. D39 turns off when press
D40 CONF D40 turns off when FPGA configuration completes
D41 FINT D41 turns off when footswitch interupt signal is available to MCU
D42 STAT D42 turns off when FPGA configuration completes
D43 EKEY EMERGENCY_SWT & REF_EMERGENCY_SWT. D43 turns off when press
D44 INT DB_INT. D44 lights on MCB when pressing button of control panel
D45 WKR WK_Y & WK_Z. D45 on MCB lights normally, and flickers in communication
D46 EXPR D46 lights when EXPOSURE command is sent out
HAND_FLU_SECURITY & HAND_COM & FOOT_FLU_SECURITY & FOOT_COM. D47
lights when either HAND_FLU_SECURITY & HAND_COM or FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
D47 SAFE & FOOT_COM connected
D48 RFB PROTECT_A. D48 lights when one of two removeable filters is removed
D52 HAND HAND_FLU & HAND_COM. D52 turns on when press
D53 RFA PROTECT_A. D53 lights when the other of two removeable filters is removed
D60 +15 Light lights when +15V from PS1 is available
D62 -15 Light lights when -15V from PS1 is available
D66 +24PS2 Light lights when +24V from PS2 is available
D67 +24PS1 Light lights when +24V from PS1 is available
D69 FOOT FOOT_FLU & FOOT_COM. D69 turns off when press
POT
POT2 MAS mAS signal gain
POT4 MA-OFF mA control signal offset
POT5 MA-GAIN mA control signal gain
POT6 KV KV control signal gain
POT7 MA-FB mA feedback gain
2-31
2.2.4. Display Board

Display board and membrane kit compose a whole control panel of C-Arm, installed in C-arm. Control panel kit
receives user input command and sends signal to Mainframe Control Board.
Power:
The power on display board include +5V, +15V and +3.3V, the +5V and+15V come from Mainframe Control Board,
+3.3V is generated by the +5V through power regulator on board.
Signals control:
Display Board connects with Mainframe Control Board through J2 (DB15), MCB controls the display board by SPI
BUS; SPI signals from MCB be isolated first, then control the 7-segment. LED displays and scans the 33 keys; also
the MCB controls the key indicator lights and forbidden lamp by SPI BUS, X-ray in use lamp controlled by MCB
directly.
6 interface:
Button indicator light Interface to user Requirements
The display board shall provide 17 button indicator lights interface to user.
X-Ray indicator Interface to user Requirements
The display board shall provide a yellow lamp interface to user. Shows X-Ray is in use.
Exposure Forbidden Interface to user Requirements
The display board shall provide a blue lamp Interface to user. Shows Exposure is forbidden.
Segment LED interface Requirements
The display board shall provide 11 7-segment LEDs interface to user.
Key Interface Requirements
The display board shall provide 33 keys Interface to connect with control panel.
MCB Interface Requirements
The display board shall provide MCB interface.
The MCB interface shall include following signals:
SPI_CLK: 38KHz;
SPI_CS2;
SPI_MOSI;
DB_INT;
INTERLOCK_B;
SPI_MISO;
SPI_CS1;
INTERLOCK_A
2-32
System Overview
Signals connected to motherboard

+5V_DB +5V from MCB DB15-1 Power +5V -
GND_PS1 GND from MCB DB15-2 Ground GND -
SPI_CLK Provide MAX6954 &MAX7301 work clock DB15-3 Digital 38KHz -
SPI_CS2 MAX7301 select signal DB15-4 Digital 0/15V 0V=effective
SPI_MOSI Communicate with MCB DB15-5 Digital 0/15V -
DB_INT MAX6954 interrupt signal DB15-6 Digital 0/15V 0V=effective
INTERLOCK_B Interconnect with INTERLOCK_A DB15-8 Passive - -
SPI_MISO Communicate with MCB DB15-12 Digital 0/15V
SPI_CS1 MAX6954 select signal DB15-13 Digital 0/15V 0V=effective
INTERLOCK_A Interconnect with INTERLOCK_B DB15-14 Passive - -
LED _YELLOW_N fluoro indicator DB15-15 Digital 0/15V 0V=effective
2-33
Signals connected to key scan interface

Name Pin Attribution Scale Comment
Save DX3_1 Digital open/close close =effective
swap DX3_2 Digital open/close close =effective
mode DX3_3 Digital open/close close =effective
Image_ rotate_ CCW DX3_4 Digital open/close close =effective
Image_ rotate_ CW DX3_5 Digital open/close close =effective
Horizontal_ mirror DX3_6 Digital open/close close =effective
Vertical_ Mirror DX3_7 Digital open/close close =effective
Mag_ mode_ selection DX3_8 Digital open/close close =effective
NULL DX3_9
Collimator_ shutter_ CCW DX3_10 Digital open/close close =effective
Collimator_ shutter_ CW DX3_11 Digital open/close close =effective
Collimator_ shutter_ open DX3_12 Digital open/close close =effective
Collimator_ shutter_ close DX3_13 Digital open/close close =effective
Collimator_ iris_ open DX3_14 Digital open/close close =effective
Collimator_ iris_ close DX3_15 Digital open/close close =effective
Alarm_ reset DX3_16 Digital open/close close =effective
Pulse_ rate_ selection DX3_17 Digital open/close close =effective
Pulse_ Enable DX4_1 Digital open/close close =effective
Film_ enable DX4_2 Digital open/close close =effective
Low_ Dose_ Enable DX4_3 Digital open/close close =effective
KVp_ up DX4_4 Digital open/close close =effective
KVp_ down DX4_5 Digital open/close close =effective
mA_ up DX4_6 Digital open/close close =effective
mA_ down DX4_7 Digital open/close close =effective
ABS_ Enable DX4_8 Digital open/close close =effective
Noise_ Reduction_ up DX4_9 Digital open/close close =effective
Noise_ Reduction_ down DX4_10 Digital open/close close =effective
NULL DX4_11
Brightness_ Contrast_ up DX4_12 Digital open/close close =effective
Brightness_ Contrast_ down DX4_13 Digital open/close close =effective
Brightness_ Contrast_ auto DX4_14 Digital open/close close =effective
Smart_ Metal_ Up DX4_15 Digital open/close close =effective
Smart_ Metal_ down DX4_16 Digital open/close close =effective
Smart_ Metal_ Auto DX4_17 Digital open/close close =effective
High Level Fluoro DX4_18 Digital open/close close =effective
2-34
System Overview
2.2.5. Keyboard Control Board

The Keyboard Control Board is installed in the Workstation and acted as the translator between workstation
membrane keyboard and workstation computer.
It translates key press and release into make/break code that computer can identify. The interface and
communication between KCB and computer conforms to standard USB 1.1 protocol.
The structure of KCB is shown as follows:
Keyboard Control Board
Power TVS
and protection Keyboard
Keyboard
communi scan line
decoder
cation interface
interface LED
indicator
Power and USB signal

The keyboard control board connects
with the host computer of WKS by a
USB cable; the power and signal
conform to the standard USB 1.1
protocol.
Key matrix interfaces

The keyboard control board
connects with key membrane by
flexible flat cable; every scan wire in
flexible cable is protected by TVS
diode, which is realized by adding
TVS diode array chips, SP723AG in
the keyboard control board.
2-35
Key allocation and make/break code

The main control IC of the board is HT82K629A, a
keyboard encoder. It can function both in USB and
PS2 interface environment. What we apply in this
design is the USB interface, and it supports the
USB standard request as well as HID class request
version 1.1.
The pin assignment of HT82K629A is shown in
Picture 4, and the pin description is shown in
Table3
Key matrix forms at the crosses between R0~R7 and C0~C19. Membrane keyboard is adopted as the external
interface of the control board.
Pin description of HT82K629A:
2-36
System Overview
2.2.6. Updown Board

Up/down Board is located in C-Arm mainframe and is the control and drive unit of the lift column motor.
MF_AC2 J1 MF_AC2 J4
8V_L 8V_L
1 MOTO1 1
Up/down
M
MF_AC2 MF_AC2 relays MOTO 2
Emergency Switch 8V_N 4
8V_N
3
AC-DC
MOS_DRIVE_N
CURRENT_
DETECT
Up/down Control Relays J2
Motor Current UP_N UP_N

1
Detector
PMOSFET Driver DOWN_N 5 DOWN_N
DRV
UDB_OVERCUR_N
DOWN_SECURITY_N 6 DOWN SECURITY_N

V_DETECT
3 GND_PS1
DOWN_COMMAND
UP_COMMAND
J5
Voltage Detector
UDB_OVERCUR_N UDB_OVERCUR_N
2
J3 UP_TO_MCB_N UP_TO_MCB_N
KEY_N Up/down Key Control & 3
KEY_N M
1 Key Delay
KEYSWITCH KEYSWOPEN O
Switch Interlock protector
GND_PS1 T
2 Sensor
DOWN_TO_MCB_N DOWN_TO_MCB_N H
5 E
DOWN_SECURITY_TO _M R
DOWN_SECURITY_TO_MCB_N CB_N
6
B
J6 DISABLE Motion UDB_ENABLE UDB_ENABLE O
DOWN_PROTECT 7
DOWN_PROTECT DIS/ENA A
1
Proximity DOWN_PROTECT_CON R
GND_PS1 Proximity DOWN_PROTECT_TO _MCB_
switch(E2E- D
5 Switch
DOWN_PROTECT_TO_MCB_N N
X5ME2 NPN) +24V_UDB 1
Protector
4 +24V_UDB +24V_UDB
8
Power Regulator 9 GND_PS1
2-37
THEORY OF OPERATION
Power Regulator
This circuit is to translate the DC24V input to the DC+15V and DC+2.5V which would be used in the updown
board. Devices 7815 and LM431 are used to realize this function.
AC-DC
Translate the AC28V input to the DC output.
Up/down relays
This function is to realize the up and down motion. Different polar voltage would be added to the lift column
motor by these relays.
Relay K9 is closed-normal. When the motor is forbidden motioning, K9 shall turn on and this closed-normal
contact shall open.
When the up motion is enabled, relays K1-K4 shall turn on and relays K5-K8 shall turn off. And the positive
DC voltage shall apply to the lift column motor. The voltage of the signal MOTO1 shall higher than MOTO2
and the motor begins up motion.
When the down motion is enabled, relays K5-K8 shall turn on and relays K1-K4 shall turn off. And the
negative DC voltage shall apply to the lift column motor. The voltage of the signal MOTO2 shall higher than
MOTO1 and the motor begins down motion.
Up/down control relays
This circuit is to control the relays in Up/down relays circuit according to the commands from Up/down Key
Control & Delay circuit.
Up/down Key Control & Delay
This circuit is to translate the up, down, down_security signals to the UP_COMMAND and DOWN_COMMAND
signals to control the relays and the motor motion. It includes two basic functions: delay control function and
motion control function.
- Motion control function
When only the up key is pressed the UP_COMMAND signal shall be high level.
When the motor is not at the proximity protect position and only the down key is pressed, the DOWN_COMMAND
signal shall be high level.
When the motor is at the proximity protect position and both the down key and down_security key are pressed,
the DOWN_COMMAND signal shall be high level.
When both of the up key and the down key are pressed the motor shall stop. The signal UP_COMMAND and the
signal DOWN_COMMAND shall be low level.
- delay control function
The Updown board shall receive the lift column up or down command and then drive the motor motion with
a few milliseconds delay. The RC delay circuit is used to realize this function.
Voltage Detector
This function is to detect the DC voltage through the resistor divider. The output of this circuit is the input of
the PMOSFET Driver circuit.
2-38
System Overview
PMOSFET Driver
This circuit is to control the PMOSFET so that the DC voltage would not higher than 37V+/-5%. When the DC
voltage is higher than 37V+/-5% the PMOSFET would turn off. When the DC voltage is lower than 29V+/-5%
the PMOSFET would turn on.
Motor Current Detector
This circuit is to detect the motor current. There are two current limit values. One is for the up motion. The
other is for the down motion. When the motor current is larger than the limit value, the overcurrent signal
would send out to stop the motion.
Key Switch Sensor
This circuit is to detect the key switch signal to control the motor motion. When the key switch is at the OFF
state the output of this circuit would be high level and the motor motion would be disabled.
Motion DIS/ENA
This circuit is to detect the UDB_ENABLE signal from MCB to control the motor motion. When the
UDB_ENABLE signal is low level the output of this circuit would be high level and the motor motion would be
disabled.
Proximity Switch Protector
This circuit is to detect the state of the proximity switch to control the motor motion. When the motor is
down to the proximity protect position the output of this circuit would be high level and the motor would be
stopped.
Interlock Protector
There are many factures to affect the motor motion including up key, down key, down_security key, motor
current, key switch, proximity switch and motion DIS/ENA. This circuit is to combine these features to control
Relay K9 and then to realize the control of the motor.
- When any signal from motor current, key switch, proximity switch and motion DIS/ENA is to disable the
motor motion, relay K9 would turn on and HL5 would be bright. The DC voltage of the motor would down
to zero. And then the motor stops.
- The interlock function of motor current and keys are realized in this circuit. When the motor current is
overloaded the motor would be disabled to motion and HL4 and HL5 would be bright. Only when all the
keys are released the HL4 and HL5 can be dark. And then the motor motion is enabled.
- The interlock function of keys and proximity switch are realized in this circuit. When the motor down to
the proximity protect position HL5 shall be bright and the motor shall stop. Only when all the keys are
released the HL5 can be dark. And then press both the down key and the down_security key at the same
time. The motor begins down motion.
2-39
Interface:
AC power input
The AC power input is listed as follows.
MF_AC28V_L AC power input for motor J1-1 POWER 28V AC ----
MF_AC28V_N AC power input for motor J1-3 POWER 28V AC ----
Up/down orders interface
Signals used to control the motion direction of the lift column motor are listed as follows.
UP_N Up order from the up key J2-1 Digital 0V/24V LOW =the up key is pressed
GND_PS1 ---- J2-3 Ground 0V ----
Down order from the
DOWN_N J2-5 Digital 0V/24V LOW =the down key is pressed
down key
DOWN_SECURITY Down security order from LOW=the down security key is
J2-6 Digital 0V/24V
_N the down security key pressed
Key switch interface
The key switch signals to enable or disable the motion of the lift column motor are listed as follows.
KEY_N Disable motion signal from J3-1 Passive Short/open short=Enable motion
the key switch.
GND_PS1 0V. J3-2 Ground 0V ----
Lift column motor interface
The DC power supplies for the motion of the lift column motor are listed as follows.
DC power to the lift column motor.
MOTO1 Up motion when the voltage is J4-1 Power 0--+40VDC The DC voltage between
higher than MOTO2’s. MOTO1 and MOTO2 shall be
DC power to the lift column motor. within the range: -40VDC--
MOTO2 Down motion when the voltage is J4-4 Power 0--+40VDC +40VDC
higher than MOTO1’s.
Mainframe Control Board interface
The signals to MCB are listed as follows.
DOWN_PROTECT_T Proximity protecting signal
J5-1 Digital 0V/+15V LOW=Proximity protect
O_MCB_N to MCB.
UDB_OVERCUR_N Overcurrent signal to MCB. J5-2 Digital 0V/+15V LOW =Error, overcurrent
LOW =The motor is at
UP_TO_MCB_N Up signal to MCB. J5-3 Digital 0V/+15V
up motion
LOW =The motor is at
DOWN_TO_MCB_N Down signal to MCB. J5-5 Digital 0V/+15V
down motion
DOWN_SECURITY_ Down security key signal to LOW =Down security
J5-6 Digital 0V/+15V
TO_MCB_N MCB. key is pressed
Preserved signal from MCB
UDB_ENABLE J5-7 Digital 0V/+15V LOW =Disable motion
to disable the motor motion.
+24V_UDB DC 24V power input to UDB. J5-8 Power +24V ----
GND_PS1 ---- J5-9 Ground 0V ----
2-40
System Overview
Proximity switch interface

The signals from the proximity switch are listed as follows.
Proximity protecting signal
DOWN_PROTECT J6-1 Digital 0V/+24V HIGH=Proximity protect
from the proximity switch.
Power to the proximity
+24V_UDB J6-4 Power +24V ----
switch
GND_PS1 0V to proximity switch J6-5 Ground 0V ----
Test points list:
Name Net name Description
TP1 --- Proximity protect signal from proximity switch
TP2 VREF_+2.5V +2.5V reference voltage
TP3 DOWN_PROTECT_CON Proximity protect signal to control relay K9
TP4 GND_PS1 GND
TP5 GND_PS1 GND
TP6 GND_PS1 GND
TP7 ---- DC Voltage after rectification and regulation
TP8 ---- Motor current
TP9 +24V_UDB +24V voltage
TP10 VCC_+15V +15V voltage
TP11 MOTO2 DC voltage for motor
TP12 MOTO1 DC voltage for motor
LEDs list:
Name Color Description
HL1 Green Light=AC input has been transformed to DC voltage
HL2 Green Light=up motion is enabled
HL3 Green Light=down motion is enabled
HL4 Red Light=motor current is overloaded
HL5 Green Light=Relay K9 is turn on and DC voltage is not applied to motor
HL6 Green Light=Proximity switch is in proximity protect state
HL7 Green Dark=signal from MCB has disabled the motor motion
2-41
2.2.7. System Interface Board

The system interface board is mounted in the workstation and will provide the interface between user and
system. It is responsible for 8 functions.
- Detect OR door open/close status and send it to WKS
- Provide power switch of the Xray on indicator on OR room
- Provide power switch of the Room In Use indicator on OR room
- Provide power switch of the injector
- Detect wireless switch short/open status and send it to WKS computer
- Communicate with WKS computer through RS232 port
- Extend Ethernet port from WKS computer to user interface.
- Command translator between computer and PDU
The power of SIB board come from computer +5V and +12V. Fuse for +5V/3.15A F1 and +12V/1A F2 are used
to protect computer ATX power
Internal power to drive chips are divided from +5V, three voltages +3.3V, +2.5V and +1.2V are generated.
The signals come from and send to user interface are isolated with DC or AC relays K2~K5, the board can also
detect status of wireless switch J8 and control power of wireless router by MOSFET. All signals connect to FPGA
are drove with transceiver to improve the capability of current.
An Ethernet isolation is provided to user interface by SIB board, the connector J1 and J2 on SIB board can
provide 1500Vrms isolation each, with an internal Ethernet port inside computer, totally a 4000Vrms isolation on
Ethernet path.
An Altera CycloneIII FPGA U10 is used as main controller on this board, it communicates with computer and
control peripheral equipment according to command from computer and user.
TVS array U1~U5 are used to absorb surge from PDU.
The structure of SIB is shown as follows.
2-42
System Overview
Interface:
Power Interface
The pin definition of power connector
+5Vin_Cmptr +5V power 1 Power 0/5.5V
GND_Cmptr GND 2 Ground GND
Computer Interface
Signals communicate with computer in WKS are listed as follows:
SIB_TxD SIB RS232 data send 2 Digital +5V/-5V
SIB_RxD SIB RS232 date receive 3 Digital +5V/-5V
User Interface
Signals connected to user interface are listed as follows.
Injector_Cmd_A The power switch of injector 4 Digital Open/Short Output
Injector_Cmd_B 5 Digital
Xray_On_Cmd_A The power switch of X-ray on indicator 9 Digital Open/Short Output
Xray_On_Cmd_B 10 Digital
Room_In_Use_Cmd_A The power switch of room in use indicator 14 Digital Open/Short Output
Room_In_Use_Cmd_B 15 Digital
2-43
Door_Open_Active_A Input to show the status of door status 1 Analog 0VAC/24VAC Input
Door_Open_Active_B 11 Analog
PDU Interface
Signals connected to PDU are listed as follows.
Sys_Pwr_Req Power off requeset 1 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
Mains_Lost_Err Status of Mainframe Power 3 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
Sec_Ovr_Vltge_Err Transformer secondary over voltage 4 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
Sec_Udr_Vltge_Err Transformer secondary under voltage 5 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
12V_Err Computer +12V error 6 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
Rdy_Err Computer ready error 7 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
MF_Pwr Information to indicate MF power status 8 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
PDU_Connect_2 Information to indicate cable between SIB and 9 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
PDU plug or not. Input
PDU_Connect_1 Information to indicate cable between SIB and 10 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
PDU plug or not. Input
Beep_Invalid_Key_Cm Invalid key beep command 19 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
d Output
Intlc_Board Interlock status of EE boards loop 20 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
ACK_PDU2SIB ACK of commands send from SIB 21 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
Rsrv_From_PDU_1 Reserved IOs 11 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Input
Input
Input
GND GND 14 GND 0V GND
Sys_Pwr_Off_Cmd Power off command from computer 22 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Output
Sys_Pwr_Off_Deny Power off deny from computer 23 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Output
MF_Pwr_On_Cmd MF power on command from computer 24 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Output
Rdy Computer ready 25 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Output
Beep_Err_Cmd Error beep command 26 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Output
Rsrv_From_SIB_1 Reserved IOs 15 Digital 0V/12V High=effective
Output
Output
Output
2-44
System Overview
Ethernet Interface
Signals connected to Rom Interface are listed as follows.
Name Description Attribution From To Comment
CX1+ Ethernet CX1+ Differential S10 pin 11 S9 pin 11
CX1- Ethernet CX1- Differential S10 pin 10 S9 pin 10
Test Points
The SIB provides test points for following signals:
Name Description
TP1 +5V power
TP2 +3.3V power
TP3 +2.5V power
TP4 +1.2V power
TP5 +12V_Cmptr power
TP6 +5V_Cmptr power
TP7 MF_Pwr_On_Cmd
TP8 Rdy
TP9 Sys_Pwr_Off_Cmd
TP10 Sys_Pwr_Off_Deny
TP11 ACK_PDU2SIB_FPGA
TP12 CLK_FPGA
TP13 DEV_OEn
TP14 DEV_CLRn
TP15 GND
TP16 GND
TP17 GND
TP18 GND
TP19 GND
LED Indicators
SIB provides LED indicator for following signals:
Name Description Comments
LED1 +5V power High=effective
LED2 +3.3V power High=effective
LED5 +12V_Cmptr power High=effective
LED6 +5V_Cmptr power High=effective
LED7 MF_Pwr_On_Cmd Low=effective
LED8 Rdy Low=effective
LED9 Sys_Pwr_Off_Cmd Low=effective
LED10 Sys_Pwr_Off_Deny Low=effective
LED11 NRESET Low=effective
2-45
LED12 T_LED1 N/A

LED13 T_LED2 N/A
LED14 T_LED3 N/A
LED15 T_LED4 N/A
LED16 XRAY_ON_CMD_FB High=effective
LED17 ROOM_IN_USE_CMD_FB High=effective
LED18 WIRELESS_PWR_CMD_FB High=effective
LED19 DOOR_OPEN_ACTIVE N/A
LED20 ACK_PDU2SIB_FPGA Low=effective
2-46
System Overview
2.2.8. Collimator Control Board
Mother board
+15V -15V +5V
ERROR
POWER SUPPLY
INDICATORS
MOT_IRIS+
IRIS
MOT_IRIS - MOT
IRIS IRIS
DIN IRIS MOT
Analog
PID Driver
SCLK
SYNC
MCB MOT_ROT+
DAC with IRIS ROT
ROT ROT
SPI MOT MOT
Analog MOT_ROT-
control Driver
PID
Collimator
MOT_WIDTH+WIDT
WIDTH IRIS
WIDTH
Analog MOT MOT_WIDTH- H
Driver MOT
PID
IRIS_POSN
ROT_POSN
WIDTH_POSN
COL_REF+
5V
Collimator Control Board
COL_REF-
Power
There are +5V, +15V and -15V inputs.
- +15V is used to drive OC input and all the OPA.-15V is used to drive all the OPA.
- +5V is used to drive OC output, DAC and output-drive circuit. Locally,
- -5V shall be generated from -15V by MC7905, and it’s used to drive output-drive circuit.
- Locally, +5V±1% reference shall be generated from +15V by LM4040-5.0, and it’s used as DAC reference.
- Another LM4040-5 shall be used to output +5V±1% reference to collimator potentiometer.
2-47
Communication with MCB and Collimator

DAC7554 is used to output 3 analog channels and its control accuracy is 12-bit. It shall be controlled by MCB
through SPI, in order to generate collimator-motor- target-position control signal. There are 3 motors in
collimator, which are IRIS motor, shutter width motor and shutter rotation motor. Therefore, DAC in CCB shall
support 3 independent channels. Meanwhile, CCB transmits 3 motors’ position feedback (analog signal) to MCB
directly. Through the PID adjustment, the motor driver can control the motor properly.
Interface
Signal Name Description Scale Direction Connector. Pin
SPI_DIN_CCB One termination of Emergency 0/+15V Digital input J1.a11
switch1/input
SPI_SCLK_CCB The other termination of 0/+15V Digital input J1.a12
Emergency switch1/input
SPI_SYNC_CCB One termination of Emergency 0/+15V Digital input J1.a10
switch2/input
RSV_CCB Connected to MCB for 0/+15V Digital input J1.b12
reserve/input
INTERLOCK_COM System inter lock 0/+15V Digital input J1.a13
INTERLOCK_COM System inter lock 0/+15V Digital output J1.b14
IRIS_POS_F Transmit IRIS motor position 0~5V analog output J1.b13
analog feedback to MCB/output
SHUT_ROT_POS_F Transmit shutter rotation motor 0~5V analog output J1.b10
position analog feedback to
MCB/output
SHUT_WIDTH_POS_F Transmit shutter width motor 0~5V analog output J1.b11
position analog feedback to
MCB/output
GND_15V +15V Ground n/a n/a J1.c9,
GND_15NV -15V Ground n/a n/a J1.a9, J1.b9
GND_5V +5V Ground n/a n/a J1.a4, J1.b4
J1.c4
+15V +15V power supply/input n/a Input J1.c15, J1.c16
-15V +15V power supply/input n/a input J1.a15, J1.a16
+5V +5 V power supply/input n/a input J1.a5, J1.b5, J1.c5
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+ Shutter width motor +/output output J1.c2
SHUT_WIDTH_MOT- Shutter width motor -/output output J1.c3
SHUT_ROT_MOT+ Shutter rotation motor +/output output J1.b2
SHUT_ROT_MOT- Shutter rotation motor -/output output J1.b3
IRIS_MOT+ IRIS motor +/output output J1.a2
IRIS_MOT- IRIS motor -/output output J1.a3
SHUT_WIDTH_POS Shutter width position 0~5V analog input J1.c12
feedback/input
SHUT_ROT_POS Shutter rotation position 0~5V analog input J1.c11
feedback/input
IRIS_POS IRIS position feedback/input 0~5V analog input J1.c10
COL_POTS_REF+ CollimAtor potentiometer +5V±1%/5mA power J1.b1
reference + output
COL_POTS_REF- CollimAtor potentiometer Analog ground n/a J1.a1
reference -
2-48
System Overview
Test Point
TP refer Signal
TP1 +5V
TP2 +5V analog
TP3 -15V
TP6 Shutter rotation motor control after PI adjustment
TP7 Shutter width control after PI adjustment
TP8 IRIS control after PI adjustment
TP9 IRIS position after filter
TP10 Shutter width position after filter
TP11 Shutter rotation position after filter
TP12 Shutter rotation motor control+
TP13 Shutter rotation control after DAC
TP15 Shutter width motor control+
TP16 Shutter width control after DAC
TP18 IRIS motor control+
TP19 IRIS control after DAC
TP27 -5V
TP28 Shutter rotation motor control-
TP30 Shutter width motor control-
TP31 +15V digital
TP32 IRIS motor control-
TP33 +15V
TP101 Analog GND
TP102 Analog GND
TP103 Digital GND
TP104 Digital GND
TP105 GND +15V digital
TP106 GND +15V digital
LED
LED refer Signal
DS1 -5V
DS2 +15V
DS3 -15V
DS4 +5V
2-49
2.2.9. kV control and IGBT assembly

KV Control Board
The kV control board is mounted inside the C-Arm Mainframe. It is one part of X-ray generator. The kV control
board will provide the following functional and performance.
- Send out 4 channel PWM(Pulse Width Modulation) signal for IGBT inverter board
- Provide insulated driver signal for IGBT
- KV feedback control circuit
- KV feedback value output
- Exposure control
- KV value set
- Protect circuit and error signal output
KV control board mainly consists of 5 function blocks, refer to kV control board block diagram:
4 Input AC 20V
KV set
40KHz IGBT driver
PI adjustor IGBT inverter
KV feedback PWM generator HCPL316 board
Current
Feedback
1. KV min <25kV ERROR output

2. KV max >120kV
DC bus
3. KV unbalance
LED
4. Over current
Outpu
5. Short circuit t
PWM GENERATOR
KV control board provides PWM signal output. SG3525A pulse width modulator control circuits offer.
Improved performance and lower external parts count when implemented for controlling all types of
switching power supplies.
- 8.0 V to 35 V Operation
- 5.1 V ± 1.0% Trimmed Reference
- 100 Hz to 400 kHz Oscillator Range
- Separate Oscillator Sync Pin
- Adjustable Dead time Control
- Input Under voltage Lockout
- Latching PWM to Prevent Multiple Pulses
- Pulse–by–Pulse Shutdown
2-50
System Overview
- Dual Source/Sink Outputs: ±400 mA Peak

The switch frequency is 40KHz for X-ray generator. So the SG3525 should provide 40KHz PWM signal.
Frequency is determined by adjusting the resistor connected with pin6 and capacitor connected with pin5.
At this pin5 80KHz swath wave should be observed in oscillograph.
The pin2 inputs variable voltage signal. Then this voltage signal enters the comparator through internal
amplifier and generators PWM signal.
PI ADJUSTOR
X-ray generator provides stable kV when exposure. It needs to use feedback control to stabilized the output
kV. PI adjustor is usually using at feedback control. There are 2 PI adjustors in kV control board, voltage PI
adjustor and current PI adjustor.
Voltage PI adjustor consists of amplifier U6-2 and resistor R28, R35, R50, R32, capacitor C27, C31,. Before
entering the PI adjustor the set kV value subtracts the feedback kV value to send out error signal. This signal
is sent to voltage PI adjustor.
Current PI adjustor consists of amplifier U6-1 and resistor R44, R46, R47, capacitor C29, C30. The output
signal from voltage PI adjustor subtracts the feedback current of inverter output to send out error signal.
This signal is sent to current PI adjustor. Then the PI adjustor carries out the voltage signal and enters PWM
generator SG3525.
IGBT DRIVER
KV control board consists of IGBT driver circuit. Usually the IGBT driver circuit must be insulated with control
circuit and it still needs several independent power for IGBT gate driver. Agilent IC HCPL-316J is a highly
Integrated power control device that incorporates all the necessary components for a complete, isolated
IGBT gate drive circuit with fault protection and feedback into one SO-16 package. TTL input logic levels
allow direct interface with a microcontroller, and an optically isolated power output stage drives IGBTs with
power ratings of up to 150 A and 1200 V. A high speed internal optical link minimizes the propagation delays
between the micro-controller and the IGBT while allowing the two systems to operate at very large common
mode voltage differences that are common in industrial motor drives and other power switching
applications. The feather is as follows.
- Drive IGBTs up to IC = 150 A, VCE = 1200 V
- Optically Isolated, FAULT Status Feedback
- SO-16 Package
- CMOS/TTL Compatible
- 500 ns Max. Switching Speeds
For the independent driver power supply kV control board consists of 4 channel independent power. Each
channel can provide DC+18V and DC–4.7V power for HCPL-316J. Those DC power is rectified from AC power.
The power interface connector is KJ7. It connected with driver power transformer.
PROTECT CIRCUIT
KV control board designed 6 protect circuits to protect the X-ray generator. KV lower protect circuit, kV
higher protect circuit, Over current protect circuit, IGBT error protect circuit. DC bus error protect circuit, kV
unbalance protect circuit.
According to generator design requirement the kV output value range is 40kV-110kV. This kV board set
protect circuit point is 25kV. That is if the kV value is lower than 25kV when X-ray generator is running the
exposure can be disable. The kV control board drawing shows the protect circuit. When kV feedback signal
KVT is higher than reference value in U10-1 the STOP signal is activated. At the same time led DS4 lightens.
This protect circuit is enable after a time of 6ms which made by resistor R74 and capacitor C47 after giving
the exposure command.
2-51
For the higher protect circuit point the value is set 120kV. When kV feedback signal KV- or kV+ is higher than
reference value in U10-2 and U11-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the same time led DS5 lightens. Jumper
W1 can disable this protect circuit. If jumper W1 is short circuit the higher protect circuit is disable.
For the over current protect circuit point the value is set 100A. when inverter output current measured by
current transformer is higher than the reference value in U17-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the same
time led DS56 lightens. Just like kV lower protect circuit this protect circuit is enable after a time of 6ms after
giving the exposure command.
For the DC bus error protect circuit point the value is set 250V and 360V. When DC bus voltage is lower than
250V or higher than 360V the exposure is disable. To the circuit, when DC bus voltage signal UDC is higher
than reference value in U19-1 and U19-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the same time led DS8 lightens.
Jumper W1 can disable this protect circuit. If jumper W1 is short circuit the higher protect circuit is disable.
For the kV unbalance protect circuit point the value is set 10kV. When difference between +kV absolute
value and –kV absolute value in the monoblock is higher than 10kV the exposure is disable. To the circuit
when difference signal KVN is higher than the reference value in U18-2 the STOP signal is activated. At the
same time led DS57 lightens.
For the IGBT error protect, the driver IC U23, U24, U26, U27 can provide this functional circuit. When IGBT is
short circuit those 4 IC will send out fault signal to disable exposure.
All the protect threshold is as follows.
kV lower protect circuit kV value<25kV
kV higher protect circuit kV value>120kV
Over current protect circuit inverter current >100A
IGBT error protect circuit IGBT short circuit
DC bus error protect circuit DC voltage<250V, or DC voltage>360V
kV unbalance protect circuit kV>10kV
LED OUTPUT
KV control board provides LED output warning when protect circuit is activated. All warning state can be
clear through pushing switch S1 or energizing the kV control board again.
The IGBT board in the generator includes fuse F, IGBT Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4, snubber circuit (composed by R,C,D
components) and common inductor L. The drive signal for IGBT is given by the kV control board. The IGBT
board actually is a DC-AC inverter and the DC input of this board is the output of a AC-DC converter
consisted by the main transformer, rectifier bridge and the DC bus capacitor. For the serial resonant
frequency of resonant circuit is nearly 40kHz, the IGBT board provides 40KHz variable AC power to
Monoblock.
The Block diagram of the IGBT board is shown as follows:
2-52
System Overview
Signals from MCB to KV control board are listed as follows.

Name Description Attribution Scale Comment
SAFETY_EN Safety line for EXPOSURE_COMMAND Digital 0/+15V +15V=enable
0V=disable
EXPOSURE_COMMAND Exposure command Digital 0/+15V +15V=enable
0V=disable
KV_SET_INPUT KV set value to KV control board Analog 0-6V Unit is 20KV/V
Signals from KV control board to MCB are listed as follows.
KV_LOW_ALM KV too low alarm, lower than 35KV Digital 0/+15V 0V=alarm
KV_HIGH_ALM KV too High alarm, higher than 120KV Digital 0/+15V 0V=alarm
OVERCURRENT_ALM Inverter over current alarm Digital 0/+15V 0V=alarm
IGBT_ERROR_ALM IGBT error alarm Digital 0/+15V 0V=alarm
DC_ERROR_ALM DC Power Bus Error alarm Digital 0/+15V 0V=alarm
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM KV unbalance in two bridges of inverter. Digital 0/+15V 0V=alarm
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT KV sample value from KV control board Analog 0-6V Unit 20KV/V
Test Point
Pin Description
TP1 +15V
TP2 Output A of SG3525
TP3 Output B of SG3525
TP4 The frequence of SG3525
TP5 GND
TP6 GND
TP7 +5V
TP8 -15V
TP9 GND
TP10 The current feedback of inverter output
TP11 The control voltage of KV PI
TP12 The control voltage of KV PI with inverter current
TP13 KV PI output
TP14 Midpoint of KV
TP15 KV feedback output
2-53
TP16 The sample voltage of DC bus over-voltage protection

TP17 The sample voltage of DC bus low-voltage protection
TP18 Divided DC bus
TP19 Optocoupler output of DC bus
TP20 GD4
TP21 GD1
TP22 TOP1
TP23 GD2
TP24 BOT1
TP25 GD3
TP26 TOP2
TP27 GD4
TP28 BOT2
TP29 18V1+
TP30 5V1-
TP31 -15V
TP32 KV-
TP33 KV+
TP34 KV set
TP35 +10V
TP36 KV low-voltage alarm
TP37 DC bus alarm
LED Indicators
Name Signal
DS1 Exposure command
DS2 IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
DS3 +15V
DS4 KV low alarm
DS5 KV high alarm
DS6 Overcurrent alarm
DS7 KV unbalance alarm
DS8 DC bus error alarm
DS9 24V of Optocoupler driver
DS10 -15V
2-54
System Overview
2.2.10. Filament Driver Board

The filament transformer current sense circuitry uses hall current sensor to provide analog output proportional to
the actual filament transformer current, the ratio between the filament current and transformer current is
1:3.5556.
The FDB is mounted in the Mainframe E-box. It is responsible for several functions as follows:
- Provide PWM output for driving Filament Transformers in High Voltage Tank
- Switch large or small filament focus
- Stop PWM generation for a while delay when switching large or small filament
- Over current protection
- Provide the over current alarm signal to MCB
- Respond to alarm signal from MCB and stop PWM generation
- Filament transformer current closed loop control
The structure of FDB is shown as follows.
+24V Invertor Filament

Select
Over current Circuit
PS1
protect TANK
24V_GND SM
40-110kV
Hall current
PWM sensor Filament
Driver Transformer
Current
FCSSW_FDB
Delay
SG3525
MCB Circuit
OCALM_FDB
FILDISA_FDB Filament
MAC_FDB RMS Current
current
regulator
The FDB consists of 9 function blocks: Inverter, Overcurrent protect, PWM control, Filament select circuit, Hall
current detect, Filament transformer current control, L/S focus switch, 10V reference, and Interlock.
Inverter
The filament drive pulses PWMA and PWMB are applied to two triodes Q3 and Q5 to drive power MOSFET Q4
and Q6 in a switching stage. When either input is high, one of the two MOSFET’s gates is positive and the
other negative. Power to the switching stage is constant +24V, needed 1.4A power input, which is provided
from external switching power PS1.
Overcurrent protection
The filament current is monitored across a 0.255Ω, comprising R4 and R5 in parallel, in the DC bus. The
sample voltage inputs to Q1 base. The filament current for the large focus is less than 1.4A in normal
condition, which yields less than 357mV across the resistor pair. When the filament current exceeds 2.75A,
the voltage will exceeds 0.7V, Q1 will drive the base of Q2 on, then Q2 collector will be grounded,
OCALM_FDB will go high, OC_ALM_S will go low to drive U3(1/4) on to pull SMAC to -15V, SG3525 output will
shut down until S1 is pressed or the system restarts. Inductor L1 limits the peak switching current through
transitions and reduces high frequency radiated energy from the output stage.
2-55
PWM control
Pulses PWMA and PWMB at a frequency of 600Hz are produced by SG3525, pulse width modulator control
integrated circuits. The deadtime is programmed by C2 and R16. The duty ratio is controlled by regulating
circuit of MAC_FDB from MCB that is current setting by the preheat table lookup and feedback filament
current value that is provided by hall current sensor. The FILDIS_FDB from MCB can shut down SG3525
outputs directly.
Filament select circuit
The filament selection is made by applying logic high to FCSSW_FDB. This turns on Q7 and operates relay K1.
Under these conditions, the large filament is selected and LED HL3 lights. The filament drive outputs FILLA1
and FILLA2 are connected to the large filament primary side. The FILSM1 and FILSM2 are connected to the
small filament primary side. The FCSSW_FDB line will be pulled low by a resistor R28 if the connection is
broken.
Hall current detect
The FILCOM are connected to the central tap of the two primary sides of filament transformer in high
voltage tank. The return filament current passes through FILCOM to 24V_GND. If the filament current via the
hall current sensor CSNE151 is 5A, the current through Pin.13 of CSNE151 will be 25mA, which is a RMS value,
the voltage on TP1 will be 2.5V. The analog signal goes through RC filter composed of R10 and C4 to filament
current regulator.
Filament current control
The FCSSW_FDB determines the scale factors of regulating circuit towards MAC_FDB when the filament is
selected. Subtracting return filament current value LEMF from MAC_FDB through different scale operation
circuit, the result is sent to SG3525 to control duty ratio.
Normally, MAC_FDB is less than 5V, more than 3V. IF MAC_FDB is much more than 5V, filament current will
be maximized and SMAC will exceed 3.3V of input threshold of PWM comparator of SG3525, Duty cycle will
be maximized, FWMC_FDB will be send out to MCB until disposed.
Both of the delay circuit and the signal FILDIS_FDB from MCB are able to drive U3(2/4) on to pull SMAC to -
15V, and OC_ALM_S is able to drive U3(1/4) on to pull SMAC to -15V, SG3525 outputs will shut down.
L/S focus switch
When filament focus switches, PWM pulses will shut down for a while delay of 56mS, because operate time
of relay is about 7mS and RC circuit of coil of relay costs about 6mS. The delay time should be more than
13mS. The delay signal is produced by CD4538 and logic gates. The delay time is determined by R42, C29
and R41, C28.
10V reference
The U7 REF102 chip provides standard +10V for regulating circuit.
Interlock
The J1A-13 and J1C-13 pin of connector are connected as interlock. The interlock goes through the FDB to
verify that the FDB is in place.
2-56
System Overview
Interface
GND GND J1A-12, J1A-32, J1B-12, J1C-12, Ground GND GND
15V +15V J1A-29, J1B-29, J1C-29 Power 15V 15V
15NV -15V J1C-32 Power -15V -15V
24V +24V J1A-1, J1B-1, J1C-1 Power +24V +24V
24V_GND GND of 24V J1A-6, J1B-6, J1C-6 Ground GND GND of 24V
MAC_FDB Set current value J1B-9 Analog 0V~15V
PWMC_FDB Control voltage J1B-13 Analog -15V~15V
output
FILDIS_FDB Filament disable J1C-10 Digital 0V/15V 15V=effective
FCSSW_FDB Large or small J1A-10 Digital 0V/15V 0V= small
filament switch 15V=large
OCALM_FDB Over current alarm J1B-10 Digital 0V/15V 15V=effective
signal output
FILLA2 Large filament J1A-18, J1B-18, J1C-18 Analog 0V~24V
FILLA1 Large filament J1A-20, J1B-20, J1C-20 Analog 0V~24V
FILSM1 Small filament J1A-22, J1B-22, J1C-22 Analog 0V~24V
FILSM2 Small filament J1A-24, J1B-24, J1C-24 Analog 0V~24V
FILCOM Filament common J1A-26, J1B-26, J1C-26 Analog 0V~24V
port
Interlock_B Interlock_B J1A-13 Digital 0V/24V
Interlock_C Interlock_C J1C-13 Digital 0V/24V
Test point
Name Pin Description
FC TP1 Return current
PWMB TP2 PWM drive signal
OC TP3 Overcurrent
FC_RC TP4 Filtered return current
+15V TP5 Power
GND TP6 GND
SMAC TP7 PWM control voltage
SMAC_V TP8 PWM control voltage
-15V TP9 Power
+24V TP10 Power
MAC TP11 PWM control voltage
10V TP12 Power
OSC TP13 crystal oscillator output
PWMA TP14 PWM drive signal
GND TP15 GND
GND TP16 GND
24V_GND TP17 GND of 24V
LED
Name Color Pin Description
+15V Green HL1 Power
-15V Green HL2 Power
FIL_SEL Green HL3 ON=large focus; Off=small focus
+24V Green HL4 Power
OC Red HL5 ON=overcurrent
FIL_D Red HL6 ON=filament disable
2-57
2.2.11. Monoblock
Monoblock can generate X-ray. It mainly consists of high voltage generator and tube insert. All high voltage
components are put into oil box, which can enhance the insulation performance.
Monoblock generates 110kV inside the oil tank. The input voltage changes from 0V to 240V peak value. High
voltage is got from high frequency and high voltage transformer T1. The primary coil is 10T and the secondary
coil is 2500T. So the maximum voltage of secondary side is 60kV peak value at 40kHz.
Monoblock Schematic Diagram:
T1
D1 C1 R1
+kV
D2 C2 R2
{
kV -mA
Inverter Tube
R3
D3 C3
-kV
R4
D4 C4
T2
{
filament
Inverter T3
High voltage circuit comprises rectifier circuit and voltage doubler. High voltage circuit composes of high voltage
diode D1-D4, high voltage capacitor C1-C4. If output voltage from T1 is 60kV peak value the high voltage circuit
output 120kV to the tube.
The controller needs to get kV value and mA value from monoblock. KV sense circuit comprises high voltage
resistor R1, R4 and sense resistor R2, R3. The high voltage resistor value is 400M ohm, sense resistor is 20k ohm If
the voltage on the tube is 120kV the +kV output 3V and –kV output –3V. mA value is measured by serial resistor
between –mA and ground. So the mA voltage value is negative.
The tube is used to generate X-ray. This tube is a kind of double focus with fixed copper anode tube. It is suitable
for oil insulation generator.
Analog signals KV_GND and MA_CAT of sealing board are the anode and cathode of mA current signal
respectively.
There are two temperature measurement circuits in sealing board. One’s output is analog signal OIL_TEMP.
The other’s output is connected/open status between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and THERMAL_SWITCH_B. If the
temperature of oil tank is higher than a preset threshold, the relationship between THERMAL_SWITCH_A and
THERMAL_SWITCH_B changes from connected to open.
2-58
System Overview
Signals from sealing board to MCB:

OIL_TEMP Output voltage of Analog 0-5V -
temperature sensor
OIL_TEMP_GND Reference of OIL_TEMP Ground 0V -
THERMAL_SWITCH_A One termination of Passive - THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
temperature switch THERMAL_SWITCH_B
connected means that
temperature is lower than
threshold.
THERMAL_SWITCH_A &
THERMAL_SWITCH_B
disconnected means that
temperature is higher than
threshold.
THERMAL_SWITCH_B The other termination of Passive -
temperature switch
MA_CAT The cathode of mA sample Analog - -
KV_GND The anode of mA sample Analog - -
Technical Specifications:
Nominal high voltage 110 kV
Nominal input power 2.2 kW
Maximum anode heat content 53 kJ
Target material Tungsten
Target angle 10°
Small focal spot 0.6×1.4 mm
Large focal spot 1.4 mm
Filtration equiv. 0.55 mm Al
Anode Stationary
Typical filament specification 4.2 V, 3.5A
Maximum filament current 4.6A
Weight 0.65 kg
Nominal heat capacity 76kHU
2-59
2.2.12. X-Ray/key Switch and Emergency Switch

Key switch is used to control the unauthorized usage of X-ray exposure and vertical lift motor.
Signals from Key switch to Mainframe Control Board:

XRAYOFF The termination which Passive Open/Close XRAYOFF & COMMON is connected means
indicates lift column enable XRAYOFF switch has pressed, which represents lift
and x-ray disable column function has been selected and exposure
enable has not been selected.
ON The termination which Passive Open/Close ON & COMMON is connected means ON switch
indicates lift column and x- has pressed, which represent both lift column and
ray are both enable exposure enable function have been selected.
COMMON Common termination Passive - -
X-rays can be enabled via the footswitch or the Handswitch. Signals from footswitch and Handswitch to MCB are
listed in the following charts. Detailed interconnect information, please refer to chapter 2.2.3
Signals from Hand Switch to MCB:
HAND_FLU Hand switch Passive Open/Close J1-B28 HAND_FLU & HAND_COM is
termination connected means HAND_FLU
button has pressed
HAND_HLF_SECURITY Hand security line Passive Open/Close J1-C27 -
termination
HAND_HLF High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-B7 HAND_HLF & HAND_COM is
hand switch connected means HAND_HLF
HAND High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-A22 -
_HLU_SECURITY hand security line
termination
HAND_COM Common Passive - J1-C15 -
termination
Signals from Footswitch to MCB:

FOOT_FLU Foot switch Passive Open/Close J1-A27 FOOT_FLU & FOOT_COM is
termination connected means FOOT_FLU
button has been pressed
FOOT_FLU_SECURIT Foot security line Passive Open/Close J1-C28 -
Y termination
FOOT_ HLF High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-A14 FOOT_HLF & FOOT_COM is
foot switch connected means FOOT_HLF
FOOT_ High Level Fluoro Passive Open/Close J1-C31 -
HLF_SECURITY foot security line
termination
has been pressed
2-60
System Overview

has been pressed
FOOT_COM Common Passive - J1-B32 -
termination
Emergency switch, located on the control panel of C-arm mainframe, stops all motorized motion immediately,
interrupts any X-rays in progress, and prevents further X-rays until you reset the system. At any time, if the
emergency switch is pushed down, the X-ray exposure shall be stopped immediately. System shall trigger the
related error message.
EMERGENCY_SWT One termination of Passive Open/Clos EMERGENCY_SWT & REF_EMERGENCY_SWT is
Emergency e connected means EMERGENCY_SWT has pressed
switch1
REF_ The other Passive - -
EMERGENCY_SWT termination of
Emergency
switch1
EMERGENCY_SWT2 One termination of Passive Open/Clos EMERGENCY_SWT2 & REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2 is
Emergency e connected means EMERGENCY_SWT2 has pressed
switch2
REF_ The other Passive - -
Emergency
switch2
MF_AC28V_L - - - -
MF_AC28V_N - - - -
2-61
2.2.13. Image Chain

Overview
The following diagram is the image chain pipeline of Brivo715/785/865.
Collimator collimates the X-ray beam to the appropriate field size and user’s setting. The x-ray beam passes
through Grid to reduce scattered X-ray photons. Image Intensifier converts this X-ray into lights for each field size
selection, and sends the light to CCD Camera head. CCD Camera head captures the light image and sends the
digital video data by Gigabit LAN to Network card. Network card input digital video to CPU, and the CPU performs
real-time post-processing (Brightness, Contrast, Edge Enhance, Zoom, and Negate) to be sent to image display.
CPU also analyzes the digital video signal, and outputs a video level indicator (VLI) to MCB; higher VLI when the X-
ray dose is higher than desired, and lower VLI when the X-ray dose is lower than desired. With AutoTechnique
enabled, VLI will be processed by MCB S/W, and commands will be sent to X-ray Generator and GigE Camera to
change kVp/mA/gain depending on the VLI value. Finally the optimized image and exposure technique are
produced.
Collimator Control
Collimator:
The collimator is an electromechanical assembly designed to allow the operator to restrict the size and
shape of the X-ray beam. The unit has a lead iris and shutters and is mounted directly over the X-ray tube
beam aperture. There are 3 motions in collimator: iris open/close; shutter open/close; shutter rotation.
- The diameter of the iris aperture
- The gap spacing between the semi-transparent copper leaves
- The rotational position/orientation of the copper leaves
Collimator specification:
- Length×Width×Height: 180 mm×130 mm×95 mm
- Weight: 1.65kg
- 8 leaves motorized iris collimator
- 2 blades motorized shutter
- Shutter rotate angle: 360 degree
Collimator Control:
Overview
Collimator control subsystem is responsible for collimator motion control and status feedback. It consists of
Mother Board/MCB/CCB/collimator/cables between them and firmware in MCB.
2-62
System Overview
There is an independent control loop working for each motion. The negative feedback control loop is used.
E.g. for iris control, the following steps will be operated:
a) Firmware in MCB sends a command to CCB by SPI bus to tell the required position of iris.
b) CCB receives the command and compares it with the feedback position signal coming from the
Collimator. A PI operation is performed and works out the control signal. The signal is converted to drive
voltage by a power amplifier and sends to collimator.
c) The drive voltage drives iris motor moving and the position feedback will be closer to command. So the
difference between command and feedback will reduce. The drive voltage returns almost zero while the
feedback is very close to the command. The control loop is finished.
Collimator control subsystem works in following situations.
a) Move the iris and shutter to default position for each Mag mode. The default position is sent to
Collimator Control Board in one command.
b) Move the iris and shutter to default position for film mode and return to last position while recovering
from the film mode. The default or last positions is sent to CCB in one command.
c) Follow the operation of collimator from control panel. And the initial collimator position in each Mag is
the calculated result in collimator calibration recorded by system.
Image Intensifier
Key parameters of Image Intensifier for Brivo715/785:
Operating Mode
Parameters Unit
Normal(9”) Magn.1(6”) Magn.2(4.5”)
Useful entrance field size 215 160 120 mm
Output image diameter 20.2 mm
Center Limiting resolution 44 50 54 lp/cm
DQE at 59.5 keV- absolute (IEC) 58 %
2-63
Key parameters of Image Intensifier for Brivo OEC 865.:

Operating Mode
Parameters Unit
Normal(9”) Magn.1(6”) Magn.2(4.5”)
Useful entrance field size 215 160 120 mm
Output image diameter 25.2 mm
Center Limiting resolution 52 58 68 lp/cm
DQE at 59.5 keV- absolute (IEC) 65 65 65 %
GIGE Camera
There are two kinds of GigE Camera for Brivo OEC 715/785/865.
PN Name Comments
5075006 GigE Camera AM1565 For 715/785
5085003 GigE Camera AM1565B For 865
The two kinds of camera share common electrical part and they are different on optics lens and relative
mechanical parts.
GigE Camera is above Image Intensifier. It takes the image from the output of Image Intensifier. The following are
the main functions of camera:
 Take the image and pack them per GigE protocol
 Output Image per LIH control
 Output Frame Synchronization Signal
 Receive gain control signal and adjust gain
GigE Camera use CCD sensor to acquire image on the output window of image intensifier. Following table shows
the key specification of CCD sensor.
2-64
System Overview
Key Specification of CCD sensor

Specification Description
Image size Diagonal 11 mm (Type 2/3)
Active pixels number 1360 (H) × 1024 (V) approx. 1.40M pixels
Pixel size 6.45 μm (H) × 6.45 μm (V)
Structure Progressive Scan
As previously being mentioned, two kinds of camera share common electrical part. Following picture shows
the structure of electrical function.
Camera System Control
In this structure, FPGA is central control unit of GigE Camera.

FPGA controls CCD driver electrical circuit to drive CCD sensor, then CCD sensor transfers the optical signal
into analog signal. VGA and 12-bit ADC convert analog signal to digital signal. FPGA buffers digital signal into
image buffer, then output per GigE Vision protocol.
FPGA can adjust the gain of image per receiving external gain control command from RS422 serial port.
FPGA provides two GPIO signal. One is FrameSync output, the others is LIH input.
FPGA makes FrameSync signal low for 5ms then high at every frame according 25FPS.
FPGA uses LIH signal to control transmitting of image as following: after 2 ms on the every falling edge of
FrameSync, FPGA starts to check LIH. If LIH is continuous high for 10 ms, FPGA start to transmit image.
Otherwise, FPGA stops transmitting.
GigE Camera receives +12V DC as power input then converts different DC voltage to supply different circuits.
Interface
There are two connectors in GigE camera. One is industrial standard RJ-45 connector for GigE Vision
Protocol on Gigabit Ethernet, IP: 192.168.42.239. The other is HDB15 female connector which provides power,
RS422 and GPIO as following Table:
Pin Name Description
1 RSV Reserved
2 LIH Input, 12V logic Last image hold
3 TXD485+ Output, RS422 positive terminal of differential TXD signal
4 RXD485- Input, RS22 negative terminal of differential RXD signal
5 GND GND
6 RSV Reserved
7 GND GND
2-65
8 TXD485- Output, RS422 negative terminal of differential TXD signal

9 RXD485+ Input, RS422 positive terminal of differential RXD signal
10 VCC +12V supply voltage
11 GND GND
12 RSV Reserved
13 RSV Reserved
14 FrameSync Output, 12V logic Frame synchronization
15 GND GND
Lens
GigE Camera AM1565 uses Computar M1614-MP lens. This lens has 16mm focal lens, manual iris F1.4-F16
and manual focus.
Computar M1614 Lens

GigE Camera AM1565 uses an interface flange for mounting itself into image intensifier. This interface flange
is independent part from lens. This interface flange provide three holes and these holes accommodate
errors of at least 2 mm for positioning the image center.
GigE Camera AM1565 use 3D 500025 lens. This lens has 16mm focal lens, manual iris F1.4-F16 and manual
focus.
2-66
System Overview
3D 500025 Lens
GigE Camera AM1565B uses an interface flange for mounting itself into image intensifier. This interface
flange is integrated into lens. This interface flange provides three holes for mounting camera with image
intensifier, at the same time it provides 6 screws around flange to position the image center for
accommodating errors of at least 2 mm.
2-67
Anti-Scatter Grid
Key parameters of Anti-Scatter Grid for Brivo OEC 715/785/865:
Specification OEC 715/785 OEC 865
Line Rate 40L/cm 60L/cm
Ratio 8:1 10:1
Cover Material Al Carbon
Interspace Material Al Carbon
Absorption Material Pb Pb
Quality Factor (Q =K/B) ≥0.64 0.72
Contrast Impr. Factor (K) ≥2.3 3.8
Exposure Factor (B) ≤4.0 5.3
Selectivity (E) ≥4.5 7.4
Selectivity means a relative improvement of the proportion Primary radiation with respect to scattered radiation
expressed by the ratio between the Transmission of Primary radiation and the Transmission of Scattered
radiation.
Exposure Factor means the ratio between the Indicated value of the total radiation without an Anti-scatter Grid
in a specific beam of radiation and that with the Anti-scatter Grid placed in the beam.
Setup points: No setup points available.
Monitor
There are 4 kinds of monitor for Brivo OEC 715/785/865.
PN Name Comments
5075503 19 Inch Color LCD Monitor For 715/785
5085503 19 Inch Mono LCD Monitor For 865 left monitor
5085505 19 Inch Mono LCD Touchscreen Monitor For 865 right monitor
5330055 Component, LCD monitor, EVR (Bluestone Option Monitor) For 785 Option
All kinds of monitors almost share common aspect and OSD function.
Following is 5075503’s specification:
Item Specification
LCD Size 19.0”
Aspect Ration 5:4
Resolution 1280 x 1024 dots (SXGA)
Color Depth 16.7M RGB 6 bit-data + HiFRC data
Brightness 360 Cd/m2 (min)
Contrast 600:1(min)
Viewing Angle H 150 degree
V 40 degree
Video Input Signal DVI-D, VGA
OSD Control key Menu, up, down, exit
Backlight, Black level, Contrast, Brightness level, Position, Size,
Function
Phase, Gamma, DICOM etc.
Preset Brightness 350±20 Cd/m2, 300±20 Cd/m2, 250 ±20 Cd/m2
Preset Display Curve DICOM, CIE, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.0, Gamma 2.2(default).
Input Voltage AC100-240V, 50 / 60Hz; <0.9A
Power Supply
Power Switch Yes
2-68
System Overview

Item Specification
LCD Size 19.0”
Aspect Ration 5:4
Maximum Brightness 800 Cd/m2 (min)
Contrast 600:1(min)
V 170 degree
Function
Power Supply
Power Switch No
Item Specification
LCD Size 19.0”
Aspect Ration 5:4
Contrast 600:1(min)
V 170 degree
Function
Power Supply Input Voltage AC100-240V, 50 / 60Hz; <0.9A
Power Switch No
Technology IR
Touchscreen Resolution 32767x32767
Interface USB
Item Specification
LCD Size 19.0”
Aspect Ration 5:4
Contrast 600:1(min)
V 170 degree
2-69

Function
Power Supply
Power Switch No
2-70
System Overview
2.2.14. Computer and Peripheral

Computer
The computer mounted inside the workstation takes over most process of the system. It communicates with
external devices, receives image from GigE camera, process, display and save image. Following is the
configuration of computer.
PN Name Configuration Comments
CPU: CORE 3.06G 4M 1156P 2CORE I3-540(G) N/A
5075506 Mainboard Assembly
Ethernet ports: Two on board Ethernet ports
5085507 Display Card 1024MB DDR3 PCIE N/A
5085508 Memory Bank 2G DDR3-1333 240PIN 256X8 HYX(G) N/A
5085509 Hard Disk 500G 3.5" SATA 7KRPM 16M(G) N/A
5085511 DVD RW Drive SATA DVD Option
ATX Power Supply: N/A
5075512 Power Supply Input AC : 100~240 50Hz /60Hz
Output: +5V, +/-12V, 3.3V
5085514 Mouse PS2 Mouse N/A
5085900 WiFi Connector Wireless Internet Adaptor 802.11N Option
The computer contains one 2G DDR3 memory bank and one 3.5” 500G SATA hard disk. The partitioned SATA hard
drive contains Linux operation system, application software and user data.
The computer contains DVI-D and HDMI output for monitor. The DVI-D is for left monitor and the HDMI is for right
monitor.
The computer contains two Ethernet ports. One is for GigE Camera AM1565 or GigE Camera AM1565B, the other
Ethernet port is used to connect DICOM printer. A WiFi collector is optional and used to connect DICOM printer
wirelessly.
The system operator can use wire or wireless to connect a DICOM server. Once the Workstation is connected to
the network, the operator can query the local server to determine if the desired images are available for
download, and then download selected images to the Workstation. The Workstation can also upload images over
the same network connection. Detailed instructions on DICOM operation are available in the Operator Manual.
Power Supply combined with Battery Pack provides UPS function. If Workstation lost AC power accidentally, UPS
function can provide at least 2 minutes to shutdown computer safely and automatically.
The computer contains three serial ports to communicate with other parts. COM1 is RS232 serial port and is not
used, COM2 is RS232 serial port and talks with SIB board, COM3 is RS422 serial port and talks with MCB board. In
addition, computer will provide +12V and +5V power to SIB board.
2-71
DVD and USB

A CD/DVD RW Drive is optional and mounted in the front of workstation. It connected to computer rear plane with
a SATA interface and power cable.
The CD/DVD RW drive can archive images inside hard disk, it supports the following writing media:
 DVD+R
 DVD-R
 DVD-RW
 CD-R
 CD-RW
The computer provides 6 USB 2.0 ports. One is for workstation’s membrane keyboard, one is from user interface
extended to the front of workstation, one is for touchscreen of 865, one is for UPS communication, the remains
are reserved, if you have option al printer, you can connect it into the remaining USB ports.
Keyboard and Mouse

The keyboard contains a simple switch matrix for alphanumeric data. The keyboard connects to computer
though USB interface. The following illustration shows the workstation keyboard.
The mouse is an ambidextrous three-button optical wheel mouse that plugs into a PS2 port.
2-72
System Overview
2.2.15. UPS
There are one external UPS in system to protect computer and right monitor in case of AC lost accidently, left monitor is not
protected by UPS, so when AC lost accidently, user still can see the content of right monitor while left monitor is blackout.
UPS output capacity is 550VA/330W, and can provide at least 2 minutes for computer and right monitor so that system can
shutdown computer safely.
UPS is booted up or shut down by PDU board, and communication with computer by USB interface.
UPS Overview
Front Panel:
1 Mute
2 Power On/Off
3 Display/Menu
4 Display interface
UPS Connection:
1 Communication and Control
2 Reserve
3 Reserve
4 Power Input Cable
5 Middle of 5 (in red circle) used as output
6 Reserve
7 Reserve
8 Circuit breaker
2-73
Operation of UPS
Display interface
1 On Line—The UPS is supplying utility power to connected equipment
2 Power-Saving—Master and controlled outlets are enabled, saving
power when the master device goes into sleep or standby mode
3 Load Capacity—The load is indicated by the number of sections
illuminated, one to five. If the load exceeds the rated capacity, the
Overload symbol will flash off and on.
4 Battery Charge—The battery charge level is indicated by the number of
sections illuminated. When all five blocks are illuminated, the Back-UPS
is at full charge. When one block is filled, the Back-UPS is near the end
of its battery capacity, the indicator will flash and the unit will beep
continuously.
5 Overload—The power demand from the load has exceeded the
capacity of the Back-UPS.
6 Event—An event has occurred and the unit needs attention.
7 Automatic Voltage Regulation—The unit is compensating for extremely
low input voltage, but is not using battery power.
8 In—Input voltage.
Out—Output voltage.
9 System Faults—The system has a fault. The fault number will illuminate
on the display interface. See “System Faults” on page 4.
10 Mute—The audible alarm has been turned off.
11 Replace Battery—The battery is not connected or is nearing the end of
its useful life. Replace the battery.
12 On Battery—The unit is supplying battery backup power to the
connected equipment, it will beep four times every 30 seconds.
Modes of operation
Press DISPLAY to scroll through the display screens.

On Line Mode On Battery Mode
Input Voltage Estimated runtime in minutes
Counter Power Event Counter
Estimated run time Output Voltage
Load in Watts Input Voltage
Load in % Load in Watts
Output Voltage Load in %
Output Frequency Output Frequency
2-74
System Overview
Other status indicators
AVR: The Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) feature will compensate for excessively low input
voltages, without using battery power.When the AVR symbol is illuminated on the LCD, the unit is in
Boost mode, using the AVR feature.
UPS configuration
Unit sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity of the UPS to control when it will switch to battery power; the higher the sensitivity, the more often the
unit will switch to battery power.
1. Ensure the unit is connected to utility power, but is OFF.
2. Press and hold the POWER button for six seconds. The LOAD CAPACITY bar will flash on and off, indicating that the unit is in
programming mode.
3. Press POWER again to rotate through the menu options. Stop at selected sensitivity. The unit will beep to confirm the
selection.
NOTE The Medium sensitivity is the model used in Brivo OEC 715/785/865
2-75
Warnings and System Faults
Warnings:
Press DISPLAY to scroll through the display screens.
System Faults:
2-76
System Overview
Function Button Quick-Reference

Function Button Timing UPS Status Description
(seconds)
Power
Power On 0.2 Off Press POWER to start receiving input utility
power. If A/C input power is not available, the
unit will run on battery power.
Power Off 2 On The unit is not receiving input utility power, but
is providing surge protection.
Display
Status Inquiry 0.2 On Verify the status or condition of the unit. The
LCD will illuminate for 60 seconds.
Full-Time/Power- 2 On The LCD will illuminate and the unit will beep to
Saving mode confirm the Full-Time mode. The LCD will
darken and the unit will beep to confirm the
Power-Saving mode. While in Power-Saving
Mode, the LCD will illuminate if a button is
pressed, then darkens after 60 seconds of no
activity.
Mute
Event Specific 0.2 On Disable any audible alarms caused by an

event.
General Status 2 On Enable or disable the audible alarms. The Mute
Enable/Disable icon will illuminate and the unit will beep one
time. The Mute function will not activate unless
the UPS is operating on battery power.
Sensitivity 6 Off The Load Capacity icon will blink, indicating
that the unit is in programming mode. Use the
POWER button to scroll through Low, Medium,
and High, stop at selected sensitivity. The unit
will beep to confirm selection. See
Configuration for details.
Master/Controlled 2 On The leaf icon will darken indicating that the
outlet Enable/Disable Master Outlet feature is disabled or illuminate
to indicate the Master Outlet feature is
enabled. The unit will beep once.
Master/Enable 6 On While calibrating the threshold setting, the
Threshold device connected to the Master Outlet should
Calibration be turned off or placed in Standby or Sleep
mode. Upon completion, Power-Saving icon
will flash 3 and beep 3 times.
Self-Test (manual) 6 On The UPS will perform a test of the internal
battery. Note: This will happen automatically
when the unit is turned ON.
Event Reset 0.2 On When the Event screen is visible, press and
hold DISPLAY, then press POWER, to clear the
utility failure event counter.
Fault Reset 2 Fault After a fault has been identified, press POWER
to remove the visual indication and return to
standby status.
2-77
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
Back-UPS will not switch The unit is not connected to utility power. Ensure that the unit is securely connected
on. to an AC outlet
The circuit breaker has been tripped. Disconnect non-essential equipment from
the unit. Reset the circuit breaker. Re-
connect equipment one item at a time. If
the circuit breaker is tripped again,
disconnect the device that caused the trip
The internal battery is not connected. Connect the battery
The utility input voltage is out of range. Adjust the transfer voltage and sensitivity
range.
The unit does not provide Ensure that essential equipment is not plugged Disconnect equipment from the SURGE
power during a utility into a SURGE ONLY outlet. ONLY outlet and re-connect to a BATTERY
power outage. BACKUP outlet.
The unit is operating on The plug has partially pulled out of the wall Ensure that the plug is fully inserted into
battery power, while outlet, the wall outlet is no longer receiving the wall outlet. Ensure that the wall outlet
connected to utility power. utility power, or the circuit breaker has been is receiving utility power by checking it
tripped. with another device.
The unit is performing an automatic self test. No action is necessary.
The utility input voltage is out of range, the Adjust the transfer voltage and sensitivity
frequency is out of range, or the waveform is range.
distorted.
The unit does not provide Battery Backup outlets may be fully or Disconnect non-essential equipment from
the expected amount of improperly loaded. the BATTERY BACKUP outlets and connect
backup time. the equipment to SURGE ONLY outlets.
The battery was recently discharged due to a Charge the battery cartridge for 16 hours.
power outage and has not fully recharged.
The battery has reached the end of its useful Replace the battery.
life.
The REPLACE BATTERY The battery has reached the end of its useful Replace the battery.
indicator is illuminated. life.
The OVERLOAD indicator is The equipment connected to the unit is drawing Disconnect non-essential equipment from
illuminated. more power than the unit can provide. the BATTERY BACKUP outlets and connect
the equipment to SURGE ONLY outlets.
The SYSTEM FAULT indicator There is an internal fault. Determine which internal fault message is
is illuminated, all the front displayed by matching the number
panel indicators are displayed on the LCD with the
flashing. corresponding Fault Message (see System
Faults) and contact APC Technical
Support.
Power is not supplied to Power to the Controlled Outlets has Confirm that the correct peripherals are
some outlets. intentionally been turned off. connected to Controlled Outlets. If this
feature is not desired, disable the Power-
Saving Master and Controlled Outlets.
The Controlled Outlets are The Master Outlet threshold may be incorrectly Adjust the threshold when the Master
not supplying power, even set. outlet signals the Controlled Outlets to
though the Master device is shut down.
not in sleep mode.
2-78
Chapter3. Installation
3.1. Overview
This chapter describes the installation procedure of Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product.
3.2. Pre-Installation
3.2.1. Dimensions and Weights of System
Dimensions:
C-Arm: Hmax/Hmin W L=215/170.5cm 78cm 179cm (84.6’’/67.1” 30.7’’ 70.3’’)
Workstation: H W L=167cm ×64cm×90cm (65.7’’ ×25’’×35.4’’)
Weights:
C-Arm: 260±10kg
Workstation: 17010kg
3.2.2. Site Requirement

Scan room (H× W ×L) ≥2.8 m× 5.5 m ×5.0 m
Entrance (H×W) ≥2.0 m ×1.2 m
Aisle (W) ≥2m
Enough room should be provided for the movement, installation and operation of the
WARNING system.
The floor should be hard enough to support the system. It should also be smooth and
WARNING
horizontal.
3-2
Installation
3.2.3. Power Supply Requirement

Voltage: AC 100V/110V/120V|200V|220V/230V/240V± 10%
Frequency: 50Hz/60Hz± 3Hz
Rated Momentary Line Current (shorter than 5s):
 30A (100V/110V/120V)
 28A (200V)
 25A (220V/230V/240V)
Rated Continuous Line Current:
 20A (100V/110V/120V)
 12A (200V)
 10A (220V/230V/240V)
Maximum line impedance: 0.3Ω|0.6Ω|0.6Ω
NOTE 16A power supply is required in China. And 20 A is required in Japan.

Suitable sockets are required both in Scan room and Operating room for maintenance.
Power supply should comply with requirement of the system power supply requirements.
The sockets should be 3 cores with protective earth, which complies with the requirement
of the applicable electrical codes. Other equipment electrically connected with this
apparatus shares the same grounding connection.
You should check the local power supply first. If it is not 200 V/220 V/230 V/240 V (50 Hz),
WARNING you need change the power supply cables and change the connections of the system.
Refer to the Power Supply Adaptation section3.5.1 for details.
3.2.4. Environments
Operating Conditions:
Temperature: +10°C~+40°C （+50F~+104F）
Humidity: 20%~80% Relative, non-condensing
Atmospheric Pressure: 700hPa~1060hPa
Transportation and Storage:
Temperature: -20°C~+55°C (-4F~+131F)
3-3
3.2.5. Tools and Test Equipment

Standard Tools and Test Equipment are required to install the system. In addition to standard service
tools and test equipment, the following special tools and standard test equipment are required to
complete this procedure.
Tool and Equipment List
Item Standard Tool and Equipment Comments
1 Screw Drivers Recommend use auto screw
driver with Philips 2 head.
2 Wrench Monkey wrench or wrench for
M8 and M12 hexagon screw
3 Allen Keys
4 Dosimeter
5 10’’×12’’ Film
6 Blank CD/DVD disk
7 Spatial Resolution Tool
8 Lead Apron, thicker than 3mm
9 Pinchers
10 Scissors
11 Stopwatch
12 Network cable
13 Printer paper or film
14 Ruler longer than 12 inches (30cm)
15 Digital volt-ohm meter or equivalent
Item Special Tool GE part number
1 9 inch Film cassette holder (if required) 5085005
2 3 copper sheets, each 1mm thick 00-877682-01
3 9" BEAM ALIGHMENT TOOL ASSEMBLY 00-878105-02
4 Service Tool External DVD Surgery (If customer 5075511
order the Wireless DICOM Kit)
3-4
Installation
3.3. Unpacking
There are 2 packages for Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product. One is for C-
NOTE Arm (L W  H=2000mm 900mm 1995mm. And the other is Workstation (L  W 
H=1015mm 900mm 2150mm).
Before unpacking, inspect the shipping enclosure /boxes for damage and report to the
NOTE shipper if available.
The unpacking of the system should be done before moving it into the operation room, in order to check
if there’s damage or non-apparent damage occurred during transportation.
The packages should be examined minutely during installation to avoid missing parts with small
dimensions or envelopes containing screws, washers, etc. Once damage is observed, notify service of the
transportation and insurance company immediately.
If non-apparent damage due to transportation was found during unpacking or installation, take the
same action in 15 days after delivery. The transportation corporation will not pay for non-apparent
damage generally unless making an application for inspection in 15 days after delivery.
If damage is discovered, contact the related company immediately, with specifying the type of apparatus,
the serial number and the order number if possible, and describing the nature of the damage.
Please follow the steps below to unpack the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product.
3.3.1. Shipping Container Inspection

Inspect the shipping container for damage.
Describe the state of the shipping container in below:
3-5
3.3.2. Unpack C-Arm

1. Place the C-Arm and workstation packages on the flat and leave enough space around.
2. Cut off the binding tie and remove the cardboard coping and box of the C-Arm. Then remove the
seal wrapper of the C-Arm.
3. Remove the limitation frame of Image intensifier and Monoblock.
4. Lock the cross-arm, Wigwag, lateral rotation and orbital movement brakes. Get the accessory
packages, wood crowbar and ramp from the C-Arm package. Put the wood ramp behind of the
C-Arm.
The ramp and crowbar will also be used to workstation unpacking.
NOTE
5. Remove four metal bracket fixed screws as below.
3-6
Installation
6. Fasten the jackscrew to lift the back of mainframe to remove the wood support, as above picture.
After removing the wood support, release central screw to land steering wheels on pallet, and
then remove the metal bracket.
Lock the steering brake before release the central screw.

NOTE
Don’t prize the side the side metal cover of Mainframe

NOTE
3-7
7. Remove the secure screws of the metal bracket and wood support, as below picture.
8. Use wood crowbar prize the front base of C-Arm to remove the wood support as below picture.
The wood crowbar shall prize below area (white box in below picture) as pivot and
NOTE
pay attention to Mainframe base cover.
3-8
Installation
9. Hold the handles and move the C-Arm backward to draw out backwards the image intensifier
and Monoblock.
Take care to protect the Image intensifier and grid when moving the C-Arm.
NOTE
Remove the localizer frame of Image intensifier and Monoblock, before moving the C-Arm
backward.
10. Release steering brake and turn the right steering handle in a vertical position to keep the rear
wheels in a straight direction. Then carefully move the C-Arm backward along the ramp to the
site you desire. And then remove the middle limitation block bracket.
Middle limitation block bracket
11. Loosen the bolt with a screwdriver and remove the horizontal
cross-arm lock device. Loosen the horizontal movement brake
handle and push the C-Arm forward. Lock the brake handle. The
lock device is easy to be removed after powering on system and
lifting the lift column.
12. Install cable pushers shipped with system.

13. Check parts according to packing list (refer to the packing list
with the system for details).
Before moving the system, please make sure the 4 brake
handles: the C-Arm orbital rotation brake, the lateral
rotation brake, the Wigwag brake, and the horizontal
cross-arm brake are locked. Otherwise, equipment
damage or personal injury may result.
3-9
3.3.3. Unpack Workstation

1. Cut off the binding tie and remove the packing of the workstation. Take out the ramp on standby.
And remove the wrapper on the workstation.
2. Remove all the screws on the wood support on both sides.
3. Remove the screws on both sides as below.
4. Lock the wheels to ensure the wheels to land on the wood support. For Brivo OEC 718/785: lock
all wheels of workstation. For Brivo OEC 865: lock the central control wheels.
5. Via fastening the jackscrew on both sides to lift up the workstation enough to remove the wood
support from pallet on both sides.
For Brivo 865 let central control wheels first land on pallet.
NOTE
6. Remove the metal support bracket for Workstation, by removing the fixed screws.
3-10
Installation
7. Put the ramp in position. Release all bracket and move the workstation along the ramp off the
pallet.
3-11
3.4. System Inspection

3.4.1. Label Inspection
After the system installation, check and verify that all labels in section 1.2.10 should be in position.
NOTE Labels below should be in local language according to the regulation requirement.
3-12
Installation
3-13
3.4.2. External Inspection

1. Cabling and Connector inspection
Check the interconnect cable for damage or other problems. Verify that connector on cable mates well
with the connector on C-Arm and that there are no bent or missing pins. Make sure the strain relief
attaches securely to both the interconnect cable and connector.
Check the system’s antistatic drag wires. There is one suspended below the Workstation
Anti-Static Drag Wires and the other one underneath the C-Arm. Both wires must be securely attached to the
system and not be encumbered by debris.
Check Workstation’s Interconnect Cable for damage or other problems. Verify that Lemo
Interconnect Cable and
Connector on cable mates well with the connector on C-Arm, and that there are no bent
Connector
or missing pins.
AC Power Cord and Verify that the AC power cord and plug supplied with the system is the correct one for
Plug customer facility.
2. C-Arm Inspection
Inspect each C-Arm component listed under the heading C-Arm Inspection. Select one check box for
each item in the list. The choices are:
 No problem Found
 Loose or missing parts
 Broken or damaged parts
 Chipped or scratched paint
The items to inspect are grouped according to the larger visible, easily accessible assemblies and/or
modular parts of the system. Each inspection of an assembly item should include its visible component
parts and sub-assemblies.
C-Arm Inspection List:
No problem Loose or Missing Broken or Chipped or
Physical Location
found parts Damaged Parts Scratched paint
Image Intensifier
C-Arm
X-ray Monoblock
Control Panel
Handles
Cabinet
Wheels
3-14
Installation
3. Workstation Inspection
Inspect each workstation component listed under the heading workstation inspection. Select one check
box for each item in the list.
WorkStation Inspection list:
Physical Location No problem Loose or missing Broken or Chipped or
found parts damaged parts scratched paint
Monitor and Arm
Keyboard
Mouse
Covers
Frame
Handles
Wheels
3.4.3. Internal Inspection

Observe electrostatic discharge safety procedures.
NOTE
Removing any covers exposes dangerous electrical voltages on several components.

WARNING When possible, disconnect system from AC line before removing any covers. When it is
necessary to leave the power applied, use extreme care to avoid death or injury from
electrical shock.
1. Remove workstation cover. Inspect the internal labels (refer to chapter 1.2.11) and parts. Check if
there are loose parts.
2. Remove the C-Arm’s covers. Check all cables and PCBs inside C-Arm. Look for loose PCBs and
connectors and reset.
3-15
3.5. System Setup

3.5.1. Power Supply Adaption
If your power supply is 100V/110V/115V/120V/127V/200V/220V/230V/240V, please follow steps below to
change power supply. Otherwise, go to section3.5.2.
1. Make sure that workstation rear cover was removed.
2. Check the breaker, power cable and plug are proper and relative to the power supply voltage.
3. Input voltage option plug. The short terminator is used for setting input voltage. Upper option plug is
for 110V (100V/110V/115V/120V/127V/), under the 110V plug is the 220V plug (200V/220V
/230V/240V):
110V Jumper
220V Jumper
4. Change the bridge connectors of the transformer if need.
AC 100/110/115/120/127V
AC 200/220/230/240V
3-16
Installation
The system can adapt power supply of AC100V, AC110V, AC115V, AC120V, AC127V,
NOTE AC200V, AC220V, AC230V and AC240V by different connections of the transformer.
Before install the system, please check the power supply voltage range and the
transformer connection according to the diagram below.
Wire Transformer taps

Voltage 240 V 230 V 220 V 200V 120V/127V 110V/115V 100V
Wire N (Brown) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wire L1 (Blue) 5 4 4 3 5 4 3
Wire N1 (Black) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Wire L (Red) 8 8 7 6 8 7 6
Jumper 10-11 10-11 10-11 10-11 9-10 9-10 9-10
11-12 11-12 11-12
3.5.2. UPS Setup

UPS is assembled in back of workstation. Considering safety of shipping, battery is not connected with
power supply.
Follow these steps to setup the UPS.
1. Open the Power Distribution package.
2. Release screws to fixe UPS. Then take out UPS.
3-17
3. Lay UPS on side as below picture and remove the battery cover (battery cover is under UPS).
4. Pull out the battery of UPS and plug the power supply cable into the power pin of UPS box.
5. Push back battery and install the UPS cover.

6. Reassemble UPS.
The UPS receives AC power whenever the system power switch is on. The battery
NOTE recharges if necessary. If the AC main power fails, the UPS supplies power to computer
using its internal battery. The PDU will sounds “bi-bi-bi-bi”.
Do not connect any other devices to the UPS receptacles. UPS battery should be
WARNING disconnected before transportation. Battery can be left in the UPS.
3-18
Installation
3.5.3. System Power On

When you place a recently unpacked system into use, allow it to stand in its new
CAUTION environment long enough for any condensed moisture to evaporate. A decrease in
temperature or a humidity increase can cause water vapor in the air to condense,
sometimes on electric circuits. You may damage the equipment if you apply power
before this condensation dries.
1. Take out footswitch from the accessory package. Connect the footswitch to C-Arm.
2. Connect the interconnect cable to C-Arm.
3. Plug the power cord into appropriate AC receptacle. Turn on the circuit breaker on the back of
Workstation, and then press the power on/off key in front of Workstation.
Before power on the system, please check and make sure that the voltage of the system
WARNING is compatible with the power supply. Or you must change the power supply settings of
the system.
Refer to Section 3.5.1 for details.
4. Verify that the workstation and C-Arm complete software boot and initialization with no errors
reported on their displays.
The auto fluoroscopy mode is selected and the power on indicator lights. The field size is in
Normal mode.
The left monitor of workstation will display GE logo screen. The right monitor will enter into the
User login Screen automatically.
5. Press vertical lift button and verify that vertical lift column is operational.
3-19
3.5.4. System Configuration in Admin Interface

Setup in Admin Interface by Service Authority
1. Hold down “Ctrl +Shift+Alt” and”→” keys at same time to invoke Admin Interface. Select Service
as User, and then input password to Login Service Tool Interface.
2. Input the system ID of the system. Refer to section 5.2.1.
3. Activate Product Mode configuration and software option feature by inputting eLicense key, refer
to section 5.2.2.
Before activate Product Mode configuration by inputting eLicense key, an error message
NOTE will be prompted as below:
4. Check Fluoro Alarm Control through exposure management screen. Refer to section 5.2.4.
5. Check the exposure option and dose group by country through Exposure Management screen.
Refer to section 5.2.4.
The configuration must be complete in case the local regulation is not complied.
CAUTION
6. Click “Shutdown” button to shut down the system.
3-20
Installation
Setup in User Setup interface
1. Press the “Setup” key on the

Workstation membrane keyboard or
select the “Setup” button on the
system panel in software interface to
access setup features.
2. Select “Date Time & Region” button to

setup:
 Date
 Time
 Time Zone
 Language
 Date Format
 Time Format
 Number Format
 Weight Unit
 High Unit
3-21
3. Select “C-Arm System” button to

setup:
 Hospital Name
 Retain Last Exam Change or Boot
up
 Screen Saver
 Auto Save at End of Exposure
 Auto swap
 Room interface
 Exposure Sound
 Dose Warning Threshold.
3-22
Installation
3.5.5. DICOM Setup and Check

You can choose the verification items from DICOM Worklist server, storage server and
NOTE printer server, according to the customer’s network situation and equipment.
Feature for DICOM, available DICOM features are displayed in Product config/Software
NOTE Option List, in this section just setup and check the option purchased by customer:
OptionBasicDicom (Contains: DicomWorklist/DicomStorage&Commitment/DicomPrint)
OptionDicomQ&R, OptionDicomMpps.
1. Plug the network cable into the

network connector socket on the
back of Workstation.
2. Press Setup key in

application interface to invoke
the setup interface.
3. Network & DICOM setup:

Click “Network & DICOM” Tab to:
 Input Local AE Title:
The default AE Title is “Brivo
OEC”. You can change it
according to the DICOM service’s
requirement.
 Input Station Name
 Configure system IP:
Click “Config…”button and fill in
the network information.
 Refer to 3.7.10 to perform
Wireless network setup and
verify.
 Verify Network Connection:
Input “Target IP” then click “Ping”
can verify if the Network
configuration is successful or
not.
Configure screen of Local Network
3-23
4. DICOM Printers setup and check

DICOM Printers setup:
 Click “DICOM printers” Tab on
setup screen.
 Click “Add…” button into Add
interface. Fill in the information
of the DICOM printers.
 Click “Edit…” button into Edit
interface, edit the information of
the existing DICOM printers.
 In Add and Edit interface, click
“Verify” button. The message
“The DICOM server has verified
successfully.” will display if the
server has been connected.
Click “OK” button and then
select the “Exit” button to close
DICOM printer interface.
 Use “Delete” button to delete
existing DICOM printer.
Add and edit interface of DICOM printers
3-24
Installation
DICOM printers function Check:
 Press Image Directory

key on the workstation
keyboard.
 Select DICOM printer server
from the Print screen. Click the
preview image and then click
the queue box. Click “Print”
button. Verify that the images
can be printed successfully after
the process complete.
5. Worklist Server setup and check

Worklist setup:
 Select “Worklist” Tab in setup
interface.
 Click “Add…” button and fill in
the information of the DICOM
Worklist server.
 Click “Edit…” button, edit the
information of the existing
DICOM Worklist server.
 In “Add…” and “Edit…” interface,
click “Verify” button to verify the
connection of Worklist server.
The message “The DICOM server
has verified successfully.” will
display if the server has
connected. Click “OK” button,
and then select the Exit button
to close the DICOM Worklist
screen.
existing Worklist server.
Add and edit screen of Worklist
3-25
Worklist Check:
 Click Press key to enter

Exam Management screen.
 Click “Schedule…” button to
enter Schedule Exam screen.
 In Schedule Exam screen, check
the radio button of Worklist
Server and select target Server,
click “Quick Query” button then
patient list in Worklist server will
be displayed if all configurations
and parameters are correct.
6. Storage & Commitment Servers

Setup and Check
Storage & Commitment Servers
setup:
 Click “Storage & Commitment
Servers” in setup screen.
 Click “Add…” button into add
screen. Fill in the information of
the DICOM storage and
commitment server.
 Click “Edit…” button into edit
screen. Edit the information of
the existing DICOM storage and
commitment server.
 In add and edit screen, click
server has connected. Click “OK”
button and then select the “Exit”
button to close the DICOM
Storage server list screen.
existing DICOM Storage and
commitment server.
3-26
Installation
Add and edit screen of Storage & Commitment Servers

Storage & Commitment Servers
Function Check:
 Press Image Directory

button.
 Select DCIOM Storage Tab.
 Click “Export” Tab.
 In Store to pull down menu,
select available Select the
DICOM storage device.
 Select one or more preview
images you want to archive.
 Press and hold CTRL key on the
keyboard to select multiple
images from the previews in the
directory. Click “send” button.
 Verify that the images are
copied to the storage server
successfully after the copy
progress complete.
 All images successfully sent to
DICOM storage server will be
marked as “S”, if the “Enable
storage commitment” check
3-27
box is checked.
7. Query & Retrieve Setup and
Check
Query & Retrieve setup:
 Click “Query & Retrieve” Tab on
setup screen
 In local settings, setup local
transport parameters:
 Local Listening Port
 Time Out
 Days to Cache Retrieved
Images
of the server of Query &
Retrieve.
the server of Query & Retrieve.
button to close Add or Edit
Add and Edit Interface of Query & Retrieve
interface.
3-28
Installation
Query & Retrieve function check:
 Press key to enter Query

& Retrieve screen.
 Select target Server and input
filter option for Query, then click
Query button. The target patient
data will be displayed in Query
Results.
 Select target patient data in
Query Results, then click
Retrieve button. The target
patient data will be displayed in
Retrieved Results.
8. MPPS Servers setup and check:

MPPS Servers setup:
 Click “MPPS Servers” Tab on
setup screen:
of the server of MPPS Servers.
the server of MPPS Servers.
button to close Add or Edit
interface.
existing MPPS Servers.
Add and Edit Interface of MPPS Servers
3-29
MPPS function check:

New an exam, take exposure
and save several images.
In Image Directory :
Exam Status: In progressing
MPPS Status: Unreport
Click Report MPPS button:
Exam Status: In progressing

MPPS Status: Report
Click Complete button:

Exam Status: Complete
MPPS Status: Unreport
Click Report MPPS button:
Exam Status: Complete

MPPS Status: Report
Then in MPPS server can get the

exam complete information.
3-30
Installation
3.5.6. DICOM Worksheet

Record Network & DICOM information below:
Station Name:
Enter information into “Network & DICOM” screen.
AE Title:
Enter information into “Network & DICOM” screen.
Local Network: Wireless Network:

Does this site use DHCP? Does this site use DHCP?
Yes No Yes No
IP Address: IP Address:
Enter information into “Network & DICOM” screen. Enter information into “Network & DICOM” screen.
Gateway: Gateway:
Subnet Mask: Subnet Mask:
Will the site use DICOM Printer Server? Yes No
If yes, record their configuration here.

Server Alias:
AE Title:
IP Address: Time out:
Port Number： Maximum Density:
Minimum Density:
Config Info.:
Border Density: BLACK WHITE Orientation: PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE
Empty Density: BLACK WHITE Film Size: 8IN×10IN 10IN×12IN
10IN×14IN 11IN×14IN
Copies: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Print Priority: HIGH MEDIUM LOW
Destination: MAGAZINE PROCESSOR
Medium Type: PAPER CLEAR FILM BLUE FILM
Layout 1: 1×1 1×2 2×1 2×2 2×3 3×3 3×4 4×4 4×5 5×4
Layout 2: 1×1 1×2 2×1 2×2 2×3 3×3 3×4 4×4 4×5 5×4
3-31
Layout 3: 1×1 1×2 2×1 2×2 2×3 3×3 3×4 4×4 4×5 5×4
Layout 4: 1×1 1×2 2×1 2×2 2×3 3×3 3×4 4×4 4×5 5×4
Will the site use DICOM Worklist Server? Yes No

Worklist Server
Server Alias:
AE Title:
IP Address: Time Out
Port Number:
Worklist Filter:
Exam Date Today Next 2 Day Next 3 Day Next 7 Day Date Range
From To
Modality All RF XA CR SC
Enter information above in the “Schedule Filter” screen. The users will enter additional information on this screen.
Will the site use Storage & Commitment Servers Server? Yes No

Storage Server & Commitment Servers Server
Server Alias:
AE Title: IP Address:
Time Out Port Number:
Send RDSR on complete or Discontinue

Image: RF XA CR SC
Dose Summary: RDSR SC
Overlay: Never Send Always Send If Available
Enable storage Commitment

Use Storage Server Settings
AE Title IP Address
Time Out Port Number
3-32
Installation
Will the site use Query & Retrieve? Yes No

Query & Retrieve Server
Server Alias:
AE Title:
Port Number:
Information Model Study Root Patient Root

Local Settings:
Local Listening Port:
Time Out:
Days to Cache Retrieved
images:
Will the site use MPPS Feature? Yes No

MPPS Feature Server
Server Alias:
AE Title:
Port Number:
3-33
3.6. Functional Checks

3.6.1. Workstation Checks
Mechanical Movement Check:
1. Push the workstation and verify that the wheels roll smoothly without vibration and that they are
securely attached to the wheels.
2. Verify the operation of the brakes of workstation:
For Brivo OEC 865:
The Workstation brake pedal has three positions that
control wheel movement. The pedal is located on the left
side of the Workstation. Check the pedal positions
function:
Position 1: The wheels close to the pedal roll in a straight
line, and the wheels opposite pivot freely. Place the brake
pedal this position to move the Workstation long
distances.
Position 2: Allows all the wheels to pivot freely. Place the
brake pedal in this position to easily maneuver the
Workstation during final positioning. Push the workstation
and verify that the wheels roll smoothly without vibration
and that they are securely attached to the wheels.
Position 3: Prevents Workstation from moving.
3. Check movement of the monitor arm for ease of movement without excessive play. Make sure
that the monitors do not move after being positioned.
Workstation Operation Check:
1. Verify Patient Information function activates the Patient Information screen. Enter patient
information ( ), display scheduled exams, display resume exams screen.
2. Verify Image Directory function ( ) allows you to enter Image Directory screen.
3. Verify the ANNOTATION function ( ) allows you to enter Image Annotation screen, if
customer purchase the option.
4. Verify the MEASUREMENT function ( ) allows you to enter Image measurement screen, if
customer purchase the option.
3-34
Installation
5. Verify the DICOM Q/R function ( ) allows you to enter Q/R screen, if customer purchase
the option.
6. Verify the SETUP function ( ) allows access to the Setup screen. Press “Security” button
and select “Require Users to Login” in the screen.
7. Verify the Logout function ( ), Pressing the “Alt” key and “Logout” key at the same time
allows the user to lock up the system.
8. Verify the CONTRAST function ( ) displays an indicator bar and that the amount of contrast
can be increased and decreased.
9. Verify the BRIGHTNESS function ( ) displays an indicator bar and that amount of brightness
can be increased and decreased.
10. Verify that Auto Brightness/Contrast ( ) automatically selects the optimum values of
contrast and brightness.
11. Verify EDGE ENHANCE function ( ) displays an indicator bar and that amount of
enhancement level increased and decreased.
12. Verify Recursive Factor ( ) key can provides image noise reduction. Higher levels of recursive
filtering produce smoother (or less noisy) image, but cause more lag when imaging moving
objects or anatomy.
13. Verify NEGATE ( ) function reverses the light and dark values on the image displayed on the
left monitor.
14. Verify Image Rotation function ( ) , press the key rotate the image counter-
clockwise or press the right portion of the key to rotate the image clockwise.
3-35
15. Verify ZOOM function ( ) displays a square region of interest (ROI) box and that you can
magnify the ROI.
16. Verify SAVE function ( ), press the SAVE key. And then press key. Verify that the left
monitor image is previewed in the Image Directory screen.
17. Verify SWAP ( ) function, press SWAP key and verify this function exchanges images
between the left monitor and the right monitor.
18. Verify BLANK ( ) function, press the “Blank” key to blank the screen quickly if the screens
are displaying information which will not be seen by someone else. Press any key on the
membrane keyboard to re-display the screens’ images
19. Press key on keyboard. Enter “Security” screen. Select “Require Users to Login” to enable
the logout function. Click “Change Password…” if you need to change password. Then Click “OK”
button.
20. Press Logout key ( ) at the same time. Verify that it can log the user out of the workstation
applications.
The logout function can only be available when you select “Require Users to Login” in
NOTE the “Security” screen of setup interface.
3-36
Installation
CD/DVD check:
CD/DVD is an option. This procedure is just performed on the system with this option.
NOTE
1. Place a blank CD or DVD in the in the CD/DVD drive and wait for the green LED on the front of the
drive to turn off.
2. Press the Image Directory key ( ) on the keyboard to open the Image Directory. Make sure
the Image Directory has some saved images. Otherwise, then save some images by taking test
shots.
3. Select the “Export” button on the “Image Directory” screen. The “Export screen lists the available
print and storage devices. Select CD/DVD and click the “OK” button to confirm your selection.
4. Click “Option…” button. Select “Include Viewer” in copy option and click “OK” button.
5. Select one or more images from the Image Directory.
6. Click “Export” button on the Image Directory screen to copy the queued image.
7. Insert the CD/DVD to other computer. The media viewer will run automatically. Use the viewer to
confirm that the image was written to the CD/DVD successfully.
3.6.2. C-Arm Checks

Mechanical Movement Check:
Perform the following mechanical inspections and checks.
Wigwag Movement Check:
1. Release the Wigwag brake.
2. Move the mechanics through the entire operational range. Verify Wigwag for ease of movement
without excessive play.
3. Verify that locking the Wigwag brake prevents Wigwag motion.
Horizontal Movement Check:
1. Unlock Horizontal brake and fully extend and retract the Horizontal Cross-Arm.
2. Verify that the Cross-Arm moves smoothly and quietly through the bearing block without
excessive play.
3. Place the Cross-arm brake in the lock position.
4. Verify that the cross-arm does not move.
CAUTION Make sure cross arm is fully retracted and brake is set before moving C-Arm. Equipment
damage or personal injury may otherwise result.
3-37
C-Arm Orbital Rotation Check:
CAUTION When you release the orbital movement brake, place your other hand on the C-Arm so
that you have control of the C-Arm’s movement.
1. Release the orbital brake.

2. Verify that C-Arm orbits smoothly in its cradle without excessive play.
3. Verify that the entire orbital scale is readable and in good condition.
4. Set the brake handle to lock position and verify that C-Arm locks firmly in position.
Lateral Rotation Check:
1. Release lateral rotation brake.
2. Verify C-Arm rotates smoothly in both directions.
3. Lock the brake and verify the brake locks C-Arm firmly in position.
Before transporting the system, please make sure the 4 brake handles: the C-Arm
WARNING orbital rotation brake, the lateral rotation brake, the Wigwag brake, and the horizontal
cross-arm brake are locked. Otherwise, equipment damage or personal injury may
result.
Vertical Column Check:
1. Power on the system. Set the keyswitch in ON position ( ). Press and hold the up vertical
column key. The maximum distance is about 40cm. Verify that vertical column stops when it
reaches the limit and that operation is smooth and quiet.
2. Press and hold down vertical column switch. When the movement stops, press two keys
at the same time and C-Arm will be lowered to the lowest position.
Wheels
1. Push C-Arm slowly and verify that the wheels contact the floor and that they roll freely.
2. Make sure there are no worn or damaged areas on the wheel tread.
3. Verify that there is no wobble or binding associated with wheels.
Brakes Check:
1. Step on the rear wheel pedal brake. Verify that the rear wheels lock.
2. Step on wheel pedal release brake. Verify that brakes release and that both rear wheels roll and
steer freely.
Steering Check:
1. Verify that both rear casters respond appropriately to movement of the steering handle.
2. Verify that you can steer the rear casters 90 degrees to the left and 90 degrees to the right.
3. Verify that the casters track together when you steer them.
3-38
Installation
4. Place the mobile C-Arm’s rear wheel brake in release position. Push the C-Arm slowly and verify
that C-Arm can turn smoothly.
C-Arm Controls Check:
The following procedure produces X-rays. Use the appropriate personal protective
WARNING equipment to protect yourself from X-ray exposure.
Image Orientation
Using the line pair tool as a phantom, take exposure in normal Fluoro mode and verify the following
functions:
 Image Rotation key rotates the image clockwise and counter-clockwise.
 Image Reverse key inverts and reinverts the image.
Field size
Place something on the Image Intensifier. Press field size key repeatedly, verifying ability to
select any of the three available sizes: NORM, MAG1 and MAG2.
Collimator
Press each of the following collimator switches while taking exposure and verify each of the
following collimator actions.
 Shutter Collimator rotate.
 Iris Collimator opens and closes.
 Shutter Collimator open and close.
3-39
kVp , mA/mAs
Press the kVp and mA/mAs keys and verify that the technique can be adjusted manually. And
LED will illuminate indicating Auto.
Pulse Fluoroscopy
Select Pulsed normal Fluoro mode via the C-Arm control panel. The X-Ray Exposure indicator keeps
lighting when taking an exposure.
If the pulse mode is enabled, the amount of accumulated time will be the actual exposure
NOTE time, which depends on the time of pressing X-ray switch, length of pulses and the
number of pulses per second.
1pulse count to
1pps : 50 milliseconds / 1 pulse approximately
Fluoro time, kVp, mA/mAs Display
Clearly Display Fluoro time, kVp and mA/mAs values.

Alarm Reset
Press and hold Alarm Reset key for approximately 2 seconds. Verify Fluoro time displayed on
the C-Arm control panel resets to zero.
X-ray Emission Indicator
In the working mode, when the footswitch/handswitch is activated to take an exposure, the
indictor will light.
X-Ray off Indicator
Key switch is placed in X-ray off position ( ) or standby position ( ), X-ray is disabled and
this indictor will light.
3-40
Installation
Radiographic Mode
Select Radiography mode key and verify that the indicator lights.
Low Dose
Select the Low Dose key and verify that the indicator lights.
Manual HLF
Select manual HLF mode. Take exposure and verify that a HLF exposure is taken. Verify that audible
tone beeps at normal rate.
Auto HLF and Digital Spot
This key is only effective in some countries. In the other countries, invalid key sound will be given
when pressing this key. High Level Fluoro and Digital Spot can be switched in Mode Setup
which is in system panel of software interface. High Level Fluoro Mode, Digital Spot Mode could be
enabled by pressing the right footswitch or handswitch.
The LED lights can reflect whether the Auto HLF or Digital Spot feature is available. Press this key
again to disable the High Level Fluoro Mode& Digital Spot Mode. Make sure the LED lights before
pressing the right footswitch or handswitch to make exposure.
Recursive Factor
Press recursive factor key to select 2, 4, 8, 16 respectively to take an exposure. Verify the
amount of filtering can be increased and decreased. The noise in the image should be decreased as
the Recursive Factor is increased.
Auto/Manual Brightness/Contrast
Press the “Auto/Manual Brightness/Contrast” key to adjust the brightness and contrast level display.
The current contrast or brightness level is shown in a numeric value displayed on the bottom right
corner of the image.
3-41
Auto/Manual Smart Metal
Press the Auto/Manual Smart Metal key to reduce the appearance of metal in the image. It
could provide optimum image quality even when metal is introduced to the field. Save. Press
the “Save” key to save the left monitor image on the system disk.
Swap
Press the “Swap” key to exchange images between the left and right monitors.
Mode Switch
The “Mode Switch” button is not available for this system. Invalid key sound will be given when
pressing this key.
C-Arm key/X-ray switch test

Perform the following test to verify that the system’s X-ray and key switches are operating satisfactorily.
The following procedure produces X-rays. Use the appropriate personal protective
WARNING equipment to protect yourself from X-ray exposure.
Footswitch socket
Key switch
Interconnect cable socket
1. Place the X-ray Keyswitch in STANDBY position ( ). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays
are generated. Press Vertical lift button and verify that vertical lift column is not operational.
3-42
Installation
2. Place X-ray Keyswitch in XRAYOFF position ( ). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays
are generated. Press vertical lift button and verify the vertical lift column is operational.
3. Place X-ray Keyswitch in ON position ( ). Press Handswitch, footswitch and vertical lift button
to verify X-ray and vertical lift column are enable.
Emergency Switch
Perform the following test to verify the emergency switch.
1. Press the emergency switch during raising C-Arm.
Emergency Switch
2. Verify that vertical column operation and exposure are disabled.

3. Release the emergency switch. Verify that the vertical column operation and exposure are
available.
3.6.3. Auto Technique Tracking
Select Auto Fluoroscopy mode ( ), and the NORM field size to take an exposure. Put the copper
filter on the Monoblock head. Verify that the kVp changes accurately as copper filters are inserted into
the field in the following ranges:
Copper mm Model 1mm 2mm 3mm
Brivo OEC 715/785 64±4kVp 74±4kVp 82±4kVp
kVp range
Brivo OEC 865 62±4kVp 72±4kVp 80±4kVp
If the kVp is not in the range, refer to 4.6.7 for calibration.
3-43
3.6.4. Image Resolution

Place spatial resolution tool in the front of the image intensifier. The angle between the horizontal axis of
the image and the resolution tool must be 45°. Select appropriate kV value. Take an exposure and stop
once image is stable. The image is frozen on the left monitor. Verify the resolution in Lp/mm is equal to,
or greater than, the values listed below. Repeat and select any of three field sizes (NORM, MAG1 and
MAG2) to verify the resolution.
Field Size Model MAG NORM MAG1 MAG2
Brivo OEC 715/785 ≥ 2.0 ≥ 2.6 ≥ 3.1

Resolution (Lp/mm)
Brivo OEC 865 ≥ 2.2 ≥ 3.0 ≥ 3.5
If the resolution check fails, refer to section 4.6.8 for Camera Focus calibration.
3.6.5. Dose Limitation Check

Normal Fluoro Dose rate check
1. Operate C-Arm to make the generator being top and the image intensifier being bottom.
2. Position the detector of dosimeter at the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid of image
intensifier. Cover the image intensifier with lead plate thicker than 3mm.
3. Set KVp as 110kVp, increase mA to maximum in manual mode. Measure the dose rate while
making exposure. Limits vary by the dose group, which was configured in software configuration
section by country.
4. Refer to below table verify the corresponding Dose group according to country’s Dose group
requirement (refer to 5.2.4).
Continuous Fluoro: ≤ 47.5 mGy/min (Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 50)
≤ 47.5 mGy/min (Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 100)
HLF Dose rate check:

1. Position the dosimeter in the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid. Cover the image
intensifier with lead thicker than 3mm for protection of the image intensifier.
2. Set kVp as 110kVp, increase mA to maximum in manual mode. Measure the dose rate while
making exposure. Limits vary by the dose group, which was selected in software configuration
section by country.
Continuous Fluoro: ≤ 47.5 mGy/min (Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 50)
≤ 95 mGy/min (Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 100)
3-44
Installation
Low dose Fluoro Dose rate check:

1. Position the detector of dosimeter at the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid of image
intensifier. Cover the image intensifier with lead plate thicker than 3mm.
section by country.
Continuous Fluoro ≤ 47.5 mGy/min (Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 50)
Low dose HLF Dose rate check:
1. Position the dosimeter in the center of the X-ray beam 30cm above the grid. Cover the image
intensifier with lead thicker than 3mm for protection of the image intensifier.
section by country.
Continuous Fluoro ≤ 47.5 mGy/min (Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 50)
3.6.6. Beam Alignment Check

Refer to chapter 4.6 performance Beam Alignment Check.
German regulatory required that the collimator has to be visible on
NOTE two sides of the image, which are not opposite. For the system
installed in German, adjust collimator iris until the collimator meet
the requirement as below.
Australia regulatory required that the beam limiting device must
automatically limit the primary beam to X-ray image receptor area
(within 1% SID), which it must set to the selected field of the I.I. or image receptor in the
fluoroscopic mode. For the system installed in Australia, adjust collimator iris until the
collimator 8 leaves can be seen in the image.
3.6.7. DAP Accuracy Check

Refer to chapter 4.7 to do DAP accuracy check.
3.6.8. System Status Backup

Refer chapter 5, export system setup and administration configuration, if needed.
3-45
3.6.9. Fill in the product locator card

After the installation, please fill in the product locator card for PLC parts below and mail
NOTE the cards to local service operation office.
Item Part Number Part Description Comments

1 5085004 GENERATOR, MONOBLOCK
2 5417680 ASM, COLLIMATOR
3 5075001 FRU, 9’’ Image Intensifier for 715,785
4 5075008 FRU, 9" Image Intensifier for 865
5 5000715 Asm, Brivo OEC 715 For Brivo OEC 715
3.7. Options Installation

3.7.1. CD/DVD Burner Installation
1. Power off system. SATA & SIB power
2. Remove Worstation back, low side and front interface board
covers.
3. Open the computer cover and install the SATA
& SIB power interface board.
4. Connect the DVD SATA cable to anyone of SATA
data solts 2/3/4 of computer motherboard.
5. Remove 4 screws, secure the CD/DVD slot.
6. Insert CD/DVD into CD/DVD slot and connect the CD/DVD data cable and power cable to CD/DVD.
7. Secure CD/DVD by 4 screws which are fixed CD/DVD slot sheld before.
3-46
Installation
8. Fasten 2 secure screws of SATA data cabel on SATA & SIB power interface board.
9. According CD/DVD check procedure check CD/DVD function (Refer to CD/DVD check of 3.6.1
Workstation Check) and reinstall workstation covers.
10. Reinstall the computer cover and Workstation covers.
3-47
3.7.2. Laser Aimer

Laser Aimer on Monoblock
1. Past multi language label and laser warning
label.
2. Laser Aimer, which attaches to Monoblock, is incorporated with the collimator cover. Remove the
standard collimator top cover. Position the collimator cover with laser aimer and plug the power
cable with laser label on connector in Bundle cable. Tighten the secure screws of the collimator
cover. Remove the laser aimer cover. Power on the system.
Power Button
3. Install the BAFT to Image Intensifier and adjust BAFT center to image center.
4. Press the laser aimer’s green ON switch to generate the laser beam.
5. Loose the set screw a little inside so that you Set Screw
can adjust the beam by the adjuster.
Circle adjuster
3-48
Installation
6. Adjust the adjusters of the laser until the intersection of the laser beam is in the center circle of
the beam alignment tool. (Use the circle to adjust the line to be vertical with the other and the
screws to adjust the position of the line.)
7. Fasten the set screw a little. And the beam position
will change a little. Then adjust the beam again
according to step5. Fasten the set screw to fix the
beam position and direction. Then install the laser
aimer cover.
8. Functional check: Turn on the laser aimer power

switch and verify that the intersection of the laser
beam is in the center circle of the beam alignment
tool and the two laser lines are vertical.
Laser Aimer on Image Intensifier

Perform the following procedure to install and operate the laser aimer on the Image Intensifier. The C-
Arm can be placed in any orientation that is convenient for attaching the laser aimer. There are no
alignment marks or notches on the laser aimer that need to match any points on the image intensifier.
When the laser aimer is attached to the C-Arm, releasing the orbital or rotational brake
CAUTION could cause the C-Arm to move. Make sure to hold the C-Arm to control its movement
whenever a brake is released.
1. Place the laser aimer’s attachment handle in the open position.
2. Move the laser aimer flush with the Image Intensifier, but slightly off center.
3. Center the laser aimer with the relation to the Image Intensifier. As you center the laser aimer, the
attachment hooks catch on the edge of the image intensifier.
3-49
4. Turn the attachment handle inward until the handle is completely

closed and the laser aimer is securely attached to the image
intensifier. Insert the metal bolt to the hole of the handle to lock.
CAUTION Do not grasp the Laser Aimer's handle to position the C-Arm or to move the system.
Pulling the handle may cause the Laser Aimer to release from the image intensifier and
fall.
5. Use the image intensifier handle to position the C-Arm or to move the system to the desired location.
6. After attaching the laser aimer, place the C-Arm in the position it will be used during the procedure.
7. Turn the laser aimer ON and adjust the beam alignment
knobs until the laser beam is centered on the intersection of
the cross-hair on the Monoblock cover.
If the laser is ON, do not look directly into the laser aimer’s aperture.
CAUTION
8. Functional check: Using fluoroscopy, verify that the cross-hair in the fluoro image, at the center of the
area of interest.
The location where the laser beam marks the patient corresponds to the center of the
NOTE
area of interest, indicated by the cross-hair in the fluoro image.
Perform procedure below to remove the laser cover from the laser aimer:
1. Switch OFF the power to the laser aimer.
2. Grasp the two knobs on the laser cover.
3. Press down and rotate the cover (approximately 10 degrees counterclockwise) until the knobs align
with the notches on the housing.
4. Lift off the cover and resume laser aimer operation.
3-50
Installation
3.7.3. Video distributor

Perform the following procedures to install the video distributor.
1. Power off the system. Remove the rear and low side covers of the workstation.
2. Pull out the cabinet of workstation and remove the cosmetic cover for distributor.
3. Connect video cable (PN: 5085777) to video distributor output 4. Connect power cable (PN: 5085717)
and route power cable to the bottom of Workstation.
4. Connect video cable (PN: 5085777) to left monitor video cable.
5. Put the video distributor on the backboard and fixed video distributor in workstation cabinet.
Connect video cable firstly, then fasten the 4 secure screws to fix video distributor.
Video cable (PN:
5085777)
6. Connect the wires to the terminal blocks at the bottom of the workstation (connect the L line to
connector 23 or 24, N line to 25, or 26 and the ground line to earth). Put the power supply cable
along the wiring harness to get a good layout.
3-51
7. Plug the video cable of video distributor to the computer’s video connector DVI, which was
connected with the left monitor’s cable before.
8. Functional check: Power on the system. Check that the
left monitor will display GE logo screen. Disconnect and
pull out the left monitor video cable then connect to
OUTPUT1 and OUTPUT2 respectively. Verify that the left
monitor will display GE logo screen in each case.
9. Reconnect the video cable of left monitor and install the cabinet and other covers of
workstation.
10. Only 2 DVI output connectors are available for customer to use.
11. Customer can connect the external monitor to OUTPUT1 or OUTPUT2 of video distributor.
12. When not use the external monitor, install the cover DVI port protector shipped with distributor.
3-52
Installation
3.7.4. Printers
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 offers below printers as option.
 UP-990AD Thermal Printer
 UP-D897 Thermal Printer
Please follow below steps to install the printers.
1. Power off the system. Open the rear cover of the
workstation.
2. Plug one end of the USB cable to the video port of the
printer. Plug the power supply cable into the socket on
the printer. Put the cables through the hole of the
workstation. Put the printer in the cabinet.
3. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on computer.

4. Cut off the other end of the power supply cable. Strip off 3 wire ends.
5. Connect the wires to the terminal blocks at the bottom of the workstation (connect the L line (brown)
to connector 17 or 18 or 19, N line (blue) to 20 or 21 or 22 and the ground line (yellow and green) to
earth port. Put the power supply cable along the wiring harness to get a good layout.
3-53
6. Functional check: Power on the system. Set the switch at back of printer to digital mode. Turn on the
printer. Verify that an image can be printed to the printer and the printer works with both paper and
film.
The Video Printer is not fixed in the cabinet. Please pay attention when moving the
CAUTION
WorkStation.
The power and video signal of the View Printer is provided by EVR system. Please do not
WARNING connect the power supply and video to other printer. Please do not connect other
external power supply and video signal to this printer. Otherwise, it may cause electrical
shock to user.
3.7.5. Film cassette holder

Please follow the steps below to install and remove the cassette holder:
1. Place the cassette holder over the face of the image intensifier with the handle opened out.
2. Rotate the cassette holder handle to securely attach the cassette holder to the image intensifier.
Verify that the cassette holder is securely attached to the image intensifier.
WARNING Unsecured cassette holders may fall, injuring patients or personnel.
3. Insert a film cassette into the cassette holder and center it.
The cassette holder uses friction to hold the cassette.
NOTE
Verify that cassette is held securely within the cassette holder. Unsecured film cassettes
WARNING may fall, injuring patients or personnel.
4. Remove the film cassette by pushing the cassette out of the cassette holder.
5. To remove the cassette holder, open the cassette holder handle and press firmly against the side of
the cassette holder.
3-54
Installation
The cassette holder is designed to snuggle attach to the image intensifier lip when the
NOTE handle is engaged. It may be necessary to strike the cassette holder with the palm of
your hand to dislodge the cassette holder from the image intensifier.
3.7.6. Tube Skin Spacer

Past the multi language label on Skin Spacer.
Install the skin spacer as the following steps:
Skin Spacer Lock of the skin spacer
Small Monoblock Cover

1. Turn skin spacer 180°.
2. Insert skin spacer into collimator
top cover as right pictrue.
3. Then clockwise turn the skin
spacer to lock it onto collimator
top cover.
3-55
3.7.7. Dual pedal footswitch with save button

Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product provides a two-pedal footswitch as an option.
Plug the cable of two-pedal footswitch to the socket on the right side of the C-Arm interface panel. Verify
that the connector locks in place.
Functional check: Power on the system. Press the left switch to start Fluoroscopy in the mode selected.
Press right switch to start High Level Fluoroscopy. Press image save Button can save an image displayed
on the left monitor.
3.7.8. Removal Filter and Sensor Installation

Install the sensor
1. Remove the collimator cover.
2. Assemble each sersor into collimator cover by two secure screws and route the cable.
Pay attention to the direction of sensor, wrong sensor direction will lead to sensor can’t
NOTE detecte filter.
3. Connect the connetctor of sensor to J10/J11 which are from bundle cable .
4. Install the collimator cover.
Removal Filter
Sensor
3-56
Installation
5. Past the multi language label on the filter.
6. Install the filter. Have the filter locked by the bolt of

collimator top cover, by turn the filter clockwise.
7. In Product Config. interface (in software service tool) , check the check box of filter. Detailed refer to
5.2.2.
8. Reboot system and Login software service tool interface calibraiton Tab, the DAP calibration with
filter button will be activated and perform DAP calibraiton with filter refer to 4.7.2.
If the DAP calibration with filter button is not activated. Rechck the connection of all cable
NOTE and connector.
3.7.9. Removable Grid

Structure of Remove Grid
Past the multi language label on Removable
Grid Support.
3-57
Removable Grid Support Carbon Protection Board
45°
60°
Grid for Brivo OEC 715, Brivo OEC 785

Grid for Brivo OEC865
White dot is the direction mark for Grid.
White dot is the direction mark for Grid.
The connected line of direction mark is
The connected line of direction mark is 60
in45°with C-Arm, in Brivo OEC715/785.
degree with C-Arm, in Brivo OEC 865.
Assembly and install removal grid

1. Remove the Grid by releasing the 6 screws from image
intensifier.
2. Install the Carbon Protection Board into image intensifier.
3. Install Removal Grid Holder on image intensifier.
Ensure the localizer bolt of Removal Grid
NOTE Holder in the slot of image intensifier.
4. Install Grid on removal grid hold and ensure the direction of grid as below picture.
For Brivo OEC 715/785 For Brivo OEC865
3-58
Installation
60°
45°
5. The Removal Grid is ready for use.
3.7.10. Wireless DICOM

Wireless DICOM option kit includes 9 main parts:
1. WiFi adapter
2. Ethernet card
3. Power supply cable for WiFi adapter
4. WiFi adapter Power switch
5. Power switch cable
6. Ethernet cable
7. Treadle bars
8. Secure screws
9. Ethernet card pusher
Follow the steps below to install and configure Wi-Fi Internet Adapter kit.
1. Remove Workstation top/back/side/front covers.
2. Install WiFi adapter by 2 treadle bars in up/right picture with 4 screws and connect Ethernet cable as shown in
the below picture.
3. Open Workstation computer cover and install the Ethernet card, and card pusher.
Treadle bars
3-59
Card pusher Ethernet card
4. Release the 4 secure screws of Workstation cabinet, release the cables connect System Interface Board and
pull out the cabinet.
5. Route and connect WiFi power supply cable to WiFi adapter and J5 (on System Interface Board in Workstation
cabinet)
6. Route and connect power switch cable to power switch and J8 (on System Interface Board in Workstation
cabinet).
System Interface Board
J5
J8
Power switch
for WiFi adapter
7. Remove the WiFi power switch baffle and install the WiFi adapter power switch in Workstation cabinet back
plate. Connect the power switch cable to power switch in any Brown/Blue sequence.
Wireless power switch baffle
8. Reconnect cables of system interface board. Pull back Workstation cabinet and fasten the secure screws.
3-60
Installation
9. Get an extra laptop/computer and disconnect all wireless/wire connections in extra laptop/computer.
10. Connect Ethernet cable between WiFi adapter and extra laptop/computer.
11. Set extra laptop/computer’s Ethernet port to Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP mode).
12. Power on the system, and then power on the WiFi adapter.
13. Open Internet browser in extra laptop/computer and input http://www.mywifiext.net/welcome.htm.
14. On the setup page in the current browser select the preferred language and country/region for the system.
Follow below screen shots as reference.
3-61
15. Power off system.

16. Unplug Ethernet cable from laptop/computer.
17. Route Ethernet cable in Workstation and plug Ethernet cable into Ethernet card.
18. Re-install all covers removed in step 1.
19. Affix the WiFi label and FCC label on the Workstation cabinet as shown below:
WiFi Label
FCC Label

20. Reinstall Workstation application SOFTWARE.
21. Power on system, log in and click “ ” button.
3-62
Installation
22. In “Network & DICOM” Tab, click “Configure…” The Smart Wizard will detect available wireless networks, and
display the wireless list .
23. Select the corresponding router, click “Continue” button and input password. Click “Continue” button to
complete the Wireless setting. IP will be assigned automatically.
3-63
The Wireless adapter will take several minutes to boot up. The wireless setting can only be
NOTE
configured after the adapter is booted up completely.
Power indicator in orange means adapter is booting up.
Power indicator in green means adapter has booted up completely, and can be configured.
Booting Booted up
FCC ID is recorded on the label located on the underside of the Wi-Fi internet adapter.
3-64
Installation
3.7.11. Mono LCD monitor installation

Refer to Chapter 7 to install the Mono monitor.
3.7.12. Software Option Installation

Refer to Chapter 5 to install software option function. It can be implemented in 3.5.4 System
Configuration together with product model configuration.
3.7.13. Room Interface (RIF)

Room Interface (RIF) is an interface interactive with operation room or some peripheral equipment. The
lamps in operation rooms such as Room In Use indicator or X-Ray On indicator can be connected to
system to warn user, injector can be controlled by room interface if necessary, also the exposure can be
restrained of door status in case of excessive radiation to user, all functions in RIF are not mandatory
when operating.
System provides a HDB15 connector as room interface output/Input to connect each indicators, on the
back of workstation. And door switch work mechanism software setup interface in workstation software.
3-65
For Room Interface (RIF) connection, the rules listed below shall be complied with:
1. All equipment and power connect to RIF shall be UL/IEC60601 certified.
2. For “Room in Use Indicator”, the

power shall be less than DC 36V, and
current shall be limited within 2A. The
connection diagram is recommended
as below.
3. For “X-Ray on Indicator”, the power

shall be less than DC 36V, and
as below.
4. For “Injector in Use Indicator”, the

power shall be less than DC 36V, and
as below.
5. For “Door Open Detector”, an AC 24V

with minimum power 24W is needed
to drive an AC relay in internal circuit,
the door switch status will be
detected by system. The connection
diagram is recommended as below.
3.7.14. Fill in the product locator card for Option

After the installation of option parts, please fill in the product locator card for PLC parts
NOTE
below and mail the cards to local service operation office.
Item Part Number Part Description

1 5075816 ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITH LASER AIMER KIT
2 5085005 Asm, 9 Inch Cassette Holder, EVR
3-66
Installation
3.8. Installation Check List
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Installation Checklist

Administrative Information
Medical Facility Information Field Service Engineer Information
Hospital or Clinic Name: FSE name:
Address: City: Employee SSO:
State: Country: Service Report Number:
Postal Code/Zip: Contact Person: Date Installation Start/Complete:
Contact Phone: Department: GE assigned system ID# (Where applicable)
System Configuration
Workstation Software Version: MCB Software Version:
Serial Number: System ID:
Host ID:
System Inspection
External Inspection
Cabling and Connector inspection Anti-Static Drag Wires Interconnect Cable and Connector AC Power Cord and Plug
Workstation Inspection Mainframe Inspection
Physical Location No Problem and resolution No Problem and resolution
Physical Location
Problem noted in comments section Problem noted in comments section
Monitor and Arm Image Intensifier
Keyboard C-Arm
Mouse X-ray Monoblock
Covers Control Panel
WKS Frame Handles
Handles Cabinet
Wheels Wheels
Label Inspection Internal Inspection
System Setup
Power Supply Adaption UPS Setup System Power On
System Configuration in Admin Interface DICOM Setup and Check
Functional Check
Workstation Checks C-Arm Checks

Mechanical Movement : Pass Fail Mechanical Movement: Pass Fail
Workstation Operation: Pass Fail Key Switch: Pass Fail
C-Arm Controls: Pass Fail
Emergency Switch: Yes No
3-67
Auto Technique Tracking Image Resolution

Copper Specification(kVp) Measured Adjustment Mag Mode Specification (LP/mm)
Measured Adjustment
Filters (mm) 715/785 865 (kVp) done? (Field Size)
718/785 865 (LP/mm) done?
1 64±4 62±4 Yes No NORM (9”) ≥ 2.0 ≥2.2 Yes No
2 74±4 72±4 Yes No MAG1 (6”) ≥2.6 ≥3.0 Yes No
3 82±4 80±4 Yes No MAG2 (4.5”) ≥3.1 ≥3.5 Yes No
Dose Limitation Check and Pass
Dose Group Normal Fluoro/Low Dose Fluoro HLF/Low Dose HLF
Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 50 Max / ≤ 47.5 mGy/min Max / ≤ 47.5mGy/min
Dose group: Normal 50 and HLF 100 Max / ≤ 47.5 mGy/min Max / ≤ 95 mGy/min
Dose group: Normal 88 and HLF 100 Max / ≤ 83.6 mGy/min Max / ≤ 95 mGy/min
Beam Alignment Check and Pass DAP Accuracy Check and Pass
Camera centering Collimator Centering Dose error <10% DAP error <10% in calibration Verification
Brivo OEC 715/785 <6 scales ≤4 scales Dose error <30% DAP error <30% in application Verification
Brivo OEC 865 ≤1 scale System Status Backup (If needed)
Function Check for Option
Option Description Verified Not Installed Option Description Verified Not Installed
CD/DVD Burner Video Distributor
I.I. Side Laser Aimer Tube side Laser Aimer
Printer UP-D897 Printer UP-990-AD
Tube Skin Spacer Film Cassette Holder
Wireless DICOM Software Options
Pediatric Application: Pedal foot switch:
Remove Filter and Sensor Dual pedal footswitch with save button
Remove Grid Dual pedal footswitch
Fill PLC Card
Yes No
Reporting
Reporting complete Yes No Unique from # (where applicable)
Calibrated Tools List
Tool Name Tool Number Calibration Due Date
Installation Comments
3-68
Chapter4. Calibration
4.1. Overview
The Calibration described herein should be performed each time you replace a major system component.
Perform these tests in sequence that appears in this section if necessary.
The following tools and test equipment are required to complete the calibration.
Standard Tool and Equipment
Item Tool and Equipment
1 Oscilloscope Tektronix 2236 or equivalent
2 Multimeter or equivalent
4 Lead Apron
5 kV meter
6 Dosimeter
7 Ampere meter or equivalent
9 Erasable marker (whiteboard marker)
10 mAs meter
11 Precision flat head screwdriver (3mm or less) to adjust camera iris, focus
12 Transparent adhesive tape, with cutter (or need scissor or knife to cut the tape)
13 10’’×12’’ Film
Special Tool
Item Tool GE part number
1 Three copper sheets, each 1mm thick 00-877682-01
2 9-inch BAFT Tool 00-878105-02
3 PWA, extend board 5085609
The system will produce X-Rays when implementing the following procedures. Take
WARNING
appropriate measures and precautions to protect yourself and others from X-Ray
exposure.
Must obey the following steps to guarantee the safe operation of the C-Arm. Improper
CAUTION adjustment may cause premature failure of major system components.
If the generator has not been powered for more than 3 months, perform the generator
warm procedure in section 4.5.
Provide appropriate X-ray protection on surface of Image Intensifier in Iamge Intensifier
NOTE non-ralated calibration and verification to potect Iamge Intensifie.
4-2
Calibration
4.2. kV Measurement and Adjustment

4.2.1. kV Measurement and Accuracy Check
The X-ray generator is composed of high voltage transformer, high voltage rectifier and X-ray tube in one
pressurized oil tank. kV value can be measured by kV meter. Position the kV meter in the center of the X-
ray beam 30 cm above the focal spot.
Take exposure at kV values below in manual normal Fluoro mode. The error should be within ±7%
ranges. Otherwise, perform the kV adjustment procedure in section 4.2.2 until all the kV values meet the
requirement above.
Exposure kVp Minimum Maximum
mA or mAs Set Value
mode value (kVp) (kVp)
Low Dose 99 kVp 2mA 92.07 105.93
Normal 66kVp 4mA 61.38 70.6
Fuoro
110 kVp 1mA 102.3 117.7
High Level 55 KVp 4mA 51.15 58.85
Fluoro
110 kVp 4mA 102.3 117.7
Digital Spot 55 KVp 4mA 51.15 57.75
80 kVp 4mA 74.4 85.6
110 kVp 4mA 102.3 117.7
Radiography 55 kVp 40mAs (For 100/110V/120V input) 51.15 58.85
80mAs (For 200V/220V/230V/240V input)
80KVp 40mAs 74.4 85.6
110 kVp 20mAs 102.3 117.7
4-3
4.2.2. kV Adjustment
Provide appropriate X-ray protection on surface of Image Intensifier in calibration and
NOTE verification to potect Iamge Intensifie.
1. Remove the C-arm console cover. Check the connection of IGBT board cables.
2. Remove the cover of E-Box. Extend MCB board with extend board. Remove the J46 jumper on
extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and TP210 (-) on extend board.
3. Power on the system. Check that DS9, DS10 and DS3 indicators on kV control board light.
4. Hold down keys “Ctrl +Shift + Alt + →” to invoke the service tool. Login service tool with password.
Click Calibration Tab, then click “mA Calibration” button, “CA11” will display on control panel.
5. Rotate R40 and R27 on kV control board clockwise to the end.

6. Test the frequency of TP4 on kV Control Board with Oscilloscope. Adjust R13 on kV Control Board
to make the frequency of TP4 is 80kHz±1kHz (TP6 and TP9 are GND.)
4-4
Calibration
7. Test the voltage of TP16 on kV control board with multimeter. The voltage should be 3.15±0.05V.
Otherwise, adjust R109. Clockwise rotation will decrease the voltage value and anticlockwise will
increase the value.
8. Test the voltage of TP17 on kV control board with multimeter. The voltage should be 3.15±0.05V.
Otherwise, adjust R110. Clockwise rotation will decrease the voltage value and anticlockwise will
increase the value.
9. Take exposure. Adjust R37 on Filament Driver Board to make sure the mA is 2.1±0.05mA.
10. Take one shot X-ray exposure by pressing footswitch. Then adjust POT6 on MCB board until TP5
(KVO) on MCB is 4.0V±0.05V.
11. Take exposure and hold on. Measure TP15 on kV control board with multimeter. Adjust R50 on kV
control board to make the voltage is 4.0V±0.05V. Check that DS1 should be light when exposure.
12. Restart system. Check the kV value as the table in 4.2.1. If they are not in specification, adjust R50
on kV control board or go back to step11.
After the calibration, connect the jumper to J46 on extend board.
NOTE
4-5
Refer to below picture for the test points, indicators and adjustors:
Mainframe Control Board
POT6
4-6
Calibration
kV Control Board:
DS9
R40
R50
TP15
R27
R13 TP16
TP4
R109
R110
TP17
DS1, DS3, DS10
4-7
4.3. mA Measurement and Adjustment

4.3.1. mA Measurement and Accuracy Check
1. Remove the cover of the C-arm console and the cover of E-Box. Extend MCB board with extend
board.
2. Remove the J46 jumper on extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and
TP210 (-) on extend board.
3. Power on and take exposure. The mA value can be measured in Fluoro mode:
The measured value will include mA real value and mA leakage from tube insert. So that:
Exposure mA_real =mA_measure –kV/800
The error of Exposure mA_real value should be within ±10% ranges.
Take exposure at mA values below in manual normal fluoro mode. The Exposure mA_measure value
should be between the minimum and maximum value in the form below. Otherwise, mA calibration
procedure should be performed until all the mA_measure values meet the requirement in the list.
4-8
Calibration
Exposure mode Exposure mA_real mA_measure Min (mA) mA_measure Max (mA)
Low Dose Fluoro 2mA@80KVp 1.90 2.30
Normal Fluoro 0.1mA@80KVp 0.19 0.21
4mA@110KVp 3.78 4.54
HLF 6mA@110KVp 5.52 6.75
4.5mA@110KVp (In Dose Group
HLF 50) 4.17 5.10
4. mA accuracy of Digital Spot:

Measure the voltage of TP7 (MA-SMP) on MCB board with oscilloscope:
Formula A: Exposure mA_real =Sample Voltage (TP7) (unitV)*1000/400ohm (For power is less than
1320w)
Formula B: Exposure mA_real =Sample Voltage (TP7) (unitV)*1000/200ohm (For power is more than
1320w)
The error of Exposure mA_real value should be within ±10% ranges.
The voltage of TP7 should be in the range of the form below. Otherwise, mA calibration procedure
should be performed until all the voltage values meet the requirement in the list.
Exposure Exposure Voltage (TP7) Voltage (TP7)
Comments
mode mA_real minimum (V) maximum (V)
Digital 6.4mA@80kVp 2.30 2.82 For 100/110V/120V and
Spot 200V/220V/230V/240V input
Set 3.2mA@80KVp in mainframe control
panel
Use formula A
16mA@110kVp 2.88 3.52 For 200V/220V/230V/240V input
Set 4mA@110KVp in mainframe control
panel
Use formula B
10mA@110KVp 3.60 4.40 For 100/110V/120V input
Set 4mA@110KVp in mainframe control
panel
Use formula A
5. mA accuracy in radiography model:
Measure the voltage of TP7 (MA-SMP) on MCB board with oscilloscope:
mA measured=Sample Voltage (TP7) (unitV)*1000/200ohm
mA real=mA accuracy measure
mA accuracy=[(mA set – mA actual )/mA set]*100%
For power input: 100V, 110V/120V (Setting in Exposure Management)
Exposure mode KV and mAs value setting mA value Voltage (TP7) Voltage (TP7)
minimum (V) maximum (V)
Radiography 40KVp@40mAs 10mA 1.80 2.20
110KVp@40mAs 10mA 1.80 2.20
4-9
For power input: 200V/220V/230V/240V (Setting in Exposure Management)

Exposure mode KV and mAs value setting mA value Voltage (TP7) Voltage (TP7)
minimum (V) maximum (V)
Radiography 40KVp@80mAs 20mA 3.60 4.40
110KVp@40mAs 20mA 3.60 4.40
TP7
4-10
Calibration
4.3.2. mA calibration
Refer to the drawings at the end of this section for the location of the points. Remove J46 jumper on
extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and TP210 (-) on extend board in order
to make the ampere meter in serial.
1. Power on the system. Adjust POT4 on MCB board to make the voltage of TP17 (MA-OFF) is 0V.
2. Short J5 on MCB board. Press keys “Ctrl +Shift+Alt+ →” on keyboard to invoke the service tool.
Login service tool with password. Click Calibration Tab, then click “mA Calibration” button, “CA11”
will display on Mainframe control panel.
3. Take exposure and adjust R37 on Filament Driver Board to

make sure the measured mA value is 2.1±0.05mA. Clockwise R37
rotation will increase the current. And anticlockwise rotation
will decrease the current.
4. Measure the voltage of TP7 on MCB by multimeter, take
exposure and adjust POT7 on MCB board to make sure the
measured voltage is -0.8V±0.05V
5. Remove jumper on J5 of MCB board. Take exposure and
adjust POT 5 on MCB board to make sure the voltage of TP7
4-11
on MCB is -0.8V±0.01V. Clockwise rotation will increase the voltage value.

6. Take exposure and adjust POT7 on MCB board to make sure the measured mA value is
2.1±0.05mA, anticlockwise rotation will increase the current.
mA Preheat Table Calibration:
7. Short J5 on MCB board. Select “Preheat mA calibration” in calibration screen of service mode.
“CA21”will display on control panel. Press footswitch or hand switch and hold on until “END END”
is displayed on control panel LED field, which would last for about 20 minutes.
If the footswitch or hand switch is released early, you should press the switch again until the
control panel LED displays “END END”.
If the “Er* Er*” is displayed on the control panel, you should redo the mA calibration procedure
from step1.
8. Make sure the footswitch or hand switch is released. Remove the jumper on J5. Reboot the
system. Take exposure at 80kV, 0.1mA. Check the measured current value should be 0.20±
0.01mA. Otherwise, adjust POT4 on MCB board. Clockwise rotation will increase the current. And
anticlockwise rotation will decrease the current.
9. Take exposure at 80kV, 2mA. Measure TP7 (MA-SMP) on MCB board with oscilloscope. Set
oscilloscope in TRIGGER mode and the trigger level is –250mV. The first pulse wave should be
orthogonal and the mA feedback curve shall be converged within 10ms, similar to the picture
below:
4-12
Calibration
Otherwise, redo the mA Preheat Table Calibration. If the curve still can’t be converged within 10ms,
slightly trim R37and redo mA Preheat Table Calibration.
10. Please refer to section 4.3.1 to confirm the mA accuracy.
4-13
POT4
POT7
POT5
J5
TP17
TP7
4-14
Calibration
4.4. mAs Measurement and Calibration

4.4.1. mAs Measurment and Accuracy Check
Remove J46 jumper on extend board. Connect the probes of ampere meter to TP222 (+) and TP210 (-) on
extend board. Connect the mAs meter to ampere meter in serial.
Take exposure by the parameters below. The error of mAs should be within ±10%.
kV, mAs Minimum (mAs) Maximum (mAs)
40KV, 40mAs 36 44
60KV, 20mAs 18 22
80KV, 10mAs 9 11
110kV, 1mAs 0.9 1.1
4.4.2. mAs Calibration

1. Take exposure at 80kVp, 20mAs. Adjust POT2 on MCB board until the measured mAs value is
20.0mAs±1mAs.
2. Check mAs accuracy according to section 4.4.1.
After the calibration, connect the jumper to J46 on extend board.
NOTE
4.5. X-Ray Generator Warm

This procedure is used to improve the life of the X-Ray generator. It is only performed after the Generator
is not powered for more than 3 months.
1. Power on the system
2. Close the collimator IRIS and place a lead shield in the X-Ray beam to protect the Image
Intensifier and CCD camera.
3. Select the Manual Fluoroscopy mode. Set the kVp value to 60 kVp@1mA. Take an exposure for 3
minutes.
4. Wait for 5 minutes after exposure.
5. Set the kVp value to 80kVp@1mA and take an exposure for 3 minutes.
6. Wait for 5 minutes.
7. Power off the system.
4-15
4.6. Beam Alignment and Image Calibration

4.6.1. Camera Centering
Camera Centering Check:
1. Let C-arm in Image Intensifier Up/Monoblock Down position, Log in software service mode, in
calibration Tab, click “Beam alignment…” button.
2. Rough (recommend to 1.8LP/mm) adjust camera focus to see the light image margin clearly, refer to
4.6.8.
3. Perform Camera Centering Check as below:
Fail Fail
Circular Mask Circular Mask
Fail image: ABS and ABC mode there is black Fail image: None_ABS and None_ABC, manual
margin in circular mask ring exposure in 60KV, 1.1mA with contrast in 65
and rightness in 40, there is black margin in
circular mask ring
4-16
Calibration
Good Good 2
1
Circular Mask Circular Mask
4 3
Good Image: ABC mode, manual exposure mode, Good Image: None_ABS and None_ABC, manual
in 60KV, 1.1mA, there is NO black margin in exposure in 60KV, 1.1mA with contrast in 65 and
circular mask ring rightness in 40, there is NO black margin in
circular mask ring.
Difference of two reading scales between display mark and light image margin in image
NOTE area 1/3, for Brivo OEC 865 system shall be ≤1scale of display mark, for Brivo OEC
715/785 shall be <6 scales of display mark.
Difference of two reading scales between display mark and light image margin in image
area 2/4, for Brivo OEC 865 system shall be ≤1scale of display mark, for Brivo OEC
715/785 shall be <6 scales of display mark.
1 2
4 3
4-17
Camera Centering Calibration procedure for Brivo OEC 715/785:

1. To have access to the Camera Securing Screws, perform the following.
a. Position the C-arm to Image Intensifier up, Monoblock down.
b. Remove the I.I. cover and cables connected to Camera.
c. Release 4 M4*16 secure screws of Image Intensifier upper counter balance to remove the
upper counter weight.
d. Reused 4 M4*16 screws which are secure upper counter balance as camera alignment
screws. Fasten the 4 screws with modest torque.
Camera Alignment Screws (there

are 4 screws with 90 degrees apart)
e. Loosen 3 camera secure screws.
4-18
Calibration
Camera
Securing Screw
2. Log in software service mode, in calibration TAB, click “Beam alignment…”
3. Use the 4 Camera alignment screws to adjust the camera center. Make sure to unscrew one
screw first, and then fasten the screw on the other side to center camera. Perform camera
centering check and repeat adjusting camera alignment screws as many times as necessary.
4. When the camera centering verification meets the specification, fasten the alignment screws
and camera secure screws.
5. After fasten secure screws, recheck the alignment result. If fail, redo calibration.
Camera Centering Calibration procedure for Brivo OEC 865:
1. To have access to the Camera Securing Screws, perform the following.
a. Position the C-arm to Image Intensifier up, Monoblock down.
b. Remove the I.I. back cover and cables connected to Camera.
c. Remove the upper counter balance
4-19
Upper Counter Balance
d. Release 4 secure screws by TORX T20 screw driver.
2. Log in software service mode, in calibration TAB, click “Beam alignment…” button
3. Use 2 camera alignment screws (by 1/8 Inch HEX wrench) to adjust the camera center. (On the
other side are two spring screws which do not need to be adjusted, just fasten/loose alignment
screws can center the camera.) Perform camera centering check and repeat adjusting camera
alignment screws as many times as necessary.
4-20
Calibration
1/8 Inch HEX Spring Alignment

alignment screws Screws
4. When the camera centering verification meets the specification, fasten the alignment screws
and camera secure screws.
5. After fasten secure screws, recheck the alignment result. If fail, redo calibration.
4.6.2. BAFT Installation:

1. Let C-arm in Up (Image Intensifier)/Down position.
2. Put the 9-inch BAFT (Beam Alignment Fast Tool) on top of the Image Intensifier.
3. Orient the tool so that the number 1 and 2 on the BAFT tool is away from the mainframe, number
3 and 4 is on the Mainframe side. (See the picture below)
4. Orient the tool so that the tool sides are aligned with the mounting surface of the Image
Intensifier.
Aligned
in
parallel
5. Set to normal mode, and fully open the collimator, and to make a shot.
6. Align the BAFT tool center to image display center:
4-21
a. Loosen the securing screws (4 screws for each horizontal and vertical adjustment).
b. During a MAG 1 Fluoro exposure, adjust position adjustment screws (1 screw for each
horizontal and vertical adjustment) on the BAFT tool to make the BAFT center and
intersection of the two lines overlapped.
c. Tighten the securing screws. Then make X-ray shot and double check the BAFT alignment.
8 Securing Screws
2 Alignment Screws
NOTE Ensure BAFT tool is aligned perfectly, before performance below calibration.
4-22
Calibration
4.6.3. Collimator Centering

Collimator Iris Centering Check / Calibration:
1. Position the C-arm with Image Intensifier up and Monoblock down.
2. Log in software service mode, in calibration TAB, click “Beam alignment…” button.
3. Take exposure in Normal Fluoro and ABS mode and adjust the BAFT to make BAFT center is match
the display center (≤3mm, between BAFT and cross mark).
4. Take exposure in Normal Fluoro and ABS mode, open/close the iris slow and continuously to show
the iris near circular mask and verify that the iris leaves is shown as balanced along the circular mask
around all angles.
The distance between leaf_1/2/3/4 and circular mask shall equal to the distance between opposite
leaf_5/6/7/8 and circular mask, and tolerance of two scales is ≤4 scales of display mark.
1 2
8 3
7 4
6 5
5. If not aligned, open the collimator cover, loosen the set screws (2 pieces), and adjust the
collimator iris alignment screws (2 pieces) to center the collimator on the BAFT (Use the BAFT
image to determine the direction to shift the collimator iris). Repeat step4 and 5 to center the
collimator.
6. Fasten the set screw of collimator.
4-23
When adjusting alignment screws clockwise from the screw head, iris will move to
NOTE
the marked direction. Iris will move to reverse direction when adjusting anti-
clockwise.
2 Set screws
2 Alignment screws
Cleanup
1. After completing collimator iris centering calibration, make sure to tighten all Collimator Iris
secure screws.
2. Take exposure in Normal Fluoro and ABS mode Recheck the calibration result, if fail, redo the
calibration.
3. Assemble the collimator cover.
4. Remove the BAFT tool from the Image Intensifier
4-24
Calibration
4.6.4. Collimator Check and Calibration

Collimator Check:
In application interface, perform below procedure to check the collimator status.
1. Install BAFT on the I.I. and take exposure in Normal Fluoro and
ABS mode and adjust the BAFT to make BAFT center is match
the display center (≤3mm, between BAFT and cross mark).
and center it on the image.
2. Set the system in Auto Technique mode and Auto
Brightness/Contrast mode to perform below check.
3. Check the accuracy of collimator preview:
a. Switch between Normal mode/Mag1/Mag2. The leaves
of Iris/Shutter are out of image. (No include the country
with special regulation, eg. Germany).
b. Minimum position of Iris/Shutter is in 50mm*50mm
square of BAFT.
c. Press the Close/Open/Rotation (for shutter) button of Iris/Shutter on mainframe control panel
from maximum to minimum to see the preview line moving smoothly. Randomly select a
position record the preview line and then take exposure, the difference between preview line
and real Iris/Shutter leaves shall less than15mm/10degree(for shutter rotation).
4. If system can’t pass the check, perform the collimator calibration again.
Collimator Calibration:
Position the C-arm with Image Intensifier up and Monoblock down.

Login Administration interface with service authority. In “Calibration” Tab, click “Collimator calibration”
button and follow the calibraiton wizard to do collimator calibration.
Please strictely follow below procedure to perform collimator calibration, exposure and
NOTE move Iris/shuter to right position , step 2/3/4/7/8/9 need adjust Iris/Shutter leaves just
out of circular mask, according to the calibration Wizard, then fill in reading value,
otherwise can result in error# 0112501.
4-25
Calibration Process:
Step1 Collimator Calibration Initializtion:
Comments: Shutter/Iris limitation position calibration.
Step2 Calibrate Iris maximum position for Normal mode: (Move Iris untill the leaves just out of the
circular mask)
4-26
Calibration
Definition for iris and Shutter position:

NOTE
Make all iris and shutter leaves’ penumbra (One/both/all of the leaves) is just out of
image circular mask.
Measurement margin
Circular mask
Methods for measuring Iris diameter:

NOTE Situation_1. In below left image:
Via opening Iris, two opposite leaves are just out of circular mask. Other leaves have
been out of image (Image intensifier output window). Measure the linear distance
between two leaves’ penumbra margins as the diameter of Iris.
Situation_2. In below right image,
Via opening Iris, only one leaves is just out of circular mask. Other leaves have been
out of light image (Image intensifier output window). So the linear distance between
4-27
two leaves’ penumbra can’t be measured. Herein measure the linear distance between
the leave margin and 180° light image (Image intensifier output window) margin as
the diameter of Iris.
Measure Measure
penumbra penumbra
margin margin
Measure
penumbra
margin
Measure light
image margin
Negative Image can be treat as a reference for check the edge between penumbra
NOTE
and light image
4-28
Calibration
Normal image Negative image
Step 3 Calibrate Iris maximum position for Mag1: (Adjusted way refer to step2, Move Iris untill the
leaves just out of the circular mask)
Step 4 Calibrate Iris maximum position for Mag2: (Adjusted way refer to step2, Move Iris untill the
leaves just out of the circular mask)
Step 5 Calibrate Iris position between 60mm and 65mm:
4-29
Diameter=60~65mm
Step 5 Calibrate Iris position into 50mm*50mm square:
50mm×50mm Square of BAFT
Step 7 Calibrate shutter maximum position for Normal Mode: (Move shutter untill the leaves just out
of the circular mask)
Comments: Measure method is same as Iris diameter measure method.
Step 8 Calibrate shutter maximum position for Mag1: (Move Iris untill the leaves just out of the circular
mask)
4-30
Calibration
Step 9 Calibrate shutter maximum position for Mag2: (Move Iris untill the leaves just out of the circular
mask)
Step 10 Shutter position for 50mm*50mm square:

Comments: Rotate shutter to make shutter leavse parallel with the side of 50mm*50mm square. And let
the shutter leave back shadle cover the line of 50mm*50mm square.
Step 11 Normal mode diameter of circular mask:
4-31
Step 12 Mag 1 diameter of circular mask:
Step 13: Mag 2 diameter of circular mask:
Step 14 Collimator calibration successfully completed:
4-32
Calibration
German regulatory required that the collimator has

NOTE to be visible on two sides of the image, which are
not opposite. For the system installed in German,
adjust the collimator iris until the collimator meets
the requirement as below.
Australia regulatory required that the beam limiting
device must automatically limit the primary beam
to X-ray image receptor area (within 1% SID), which
it must set to the selected field of the I.I. or image
receptor in the fluoroscopic mode. For the system
installed in Australia, adjust collimator iris until the
collimator 8 leaves can be seen in the image.
4-33
4.6.5. I.I. Field Size Check and Calibration

I.I. Field Size Check
1. Select relative field size, open the collimator to the maximum, and take an exposure.
2. Read the BAFT tick mark on the boundary of the image. The size of the image should be within
the range of the values below.
Mag Mode NORM MAG1 MAG2
Displayed Image Diameter (mm) 210 ±10 155 ±8 115 ±8
3. If the size of the image is out of requirement, I.I. Field Size Calibration shall be performed.
I.I. Field Size Calibration
I. I. Size adjustment is done in the I.I. factory. Adjust with much care only if the Power
NOTE Supply is changed or repaired. Always use non-metal flathead screwdriver to adjust the
I.I. potentiometer to avoid short circuit.
1. Loosen the 2 I.I. power supply fixed screws.
2. Disconnect relative cables to take out the I.I. Power Supply. Carefully adjust I. I. Field Size
potentiometer. Below are two ways to fixed I.I. power supply in calibration:
4-34
Calibration
Field Size
Edge Resolution Center Resolution
A5 As A13A12 A11A23A22A21A33A32A31
a. NORM field size: Set Field size to NORM, adjust trimmer A31.
b. MAG1 filed size: Set Field size to MAG1, adjust trimmer A32.
c. MAG2 filed size: Set Field size to MAG2, adjust trimmer A33.
3. Take an exposure, and check the Field size, repeat as many times as necessary as field size is in
specification.
Cleanup
1. After passing, remove the BAFT from the I.I. Grid.
2. Make sure to re-assembly of all components as the following
a. Power off the system.
b. Disconnect Camera Cables.
c. Reinstall the I.I. Power Supply and connect cables between power supply and I.I.
d. Connect Camera Cables, and make sure to tighten the secure screws.
e. Assemble the I.I. cover.
f. Power on the system.
Ensure the cable tightly connect to the I.I. Power Supply. Virtual connection will lead to
NOTE no image or image vibration in Fluoro.
4-35
4.6.6. Limiting Field Size (Collimator Iris Field Size)

Limiting Field Size Verification
1. Create a new exam.
2. Load a film cassette in the BAFT.
3. Make sure the iris is opened completely.
4. Make an exposure at 45kVp@0.5mA in Normal, MAG 1, MAG 2 for 5~10 seconds for each mode.
Take the three exposures on one sheet of film. Note: to select the Film MAG Mode, do the
following: Select Manual - Fluoro, then Normal, MAG1 or MAG 2.
5. Remove the Film Cassette and develop the film.
6. Measure the Normal field size diameter of the collimator iris as projected on the film at 45 and
135 angle with the ruler.
L2
L1
7. Set the system to Normal field size, and take an exposure.

8. Measure, using the BAFT tick marks on the display monitor, the diameter of the circular image at
45 and 135 angle.
9. Calculate the diameter difference between film and display monitor at each 45 and 135 angle.
10. The difference should be within the range of the values below.
Diameter difference
≤ 10 mm ≤ 10 mm ≤ 10 mm
at 45 and 135 angle
11. Calculate the sum of diameter difference at 45 and 135 angle.
12. The difference should be within the range of the values below.
Combined diameter
≤ 16 mm ≤ 16 mm ≤ 16 mm
difference
13. Repeat step 6 to step 12 for MAG1 and MAG2 field size.
4-36
Calibration
14. If the requirements are not met, you must perform Limiting Field Size (Collimator Iris Field Size)
Calibration.
15. Refer to “Collimator Calibration Procedure” to do collimator calibration.
4.6.7. ABS Tracking Check and Adjustment

ABS Tracking Check
1. Make sure that X-ray tube cover is installed.
2. Position the C-arm with I.I. above the X-ray tube.
3. Select Auto Fluoroscopy mode, and the NORM field size to take an exposure. Put the 1mm, 2mm,
and 3mm copper filter on the tube head.
4. Verify that the kVp stabilizes in the specified range below for each copper filter thickness:
Model Copper Filter Thickness 1mm 2mm 3mm
Brivo OEC 715
kVp range 64±4kVp 74±4kVp 82±4kVp
Brivo OEC 785
Brivo OEC865 kVp range 62±4kVp 72±4kVp 80±4kVp
5. If the ABS Tracking check fails, perform KVp accuracy check. If KVp accuracy check pass, perform
Entrance Dose Rate Check and Camera Iris Adjustment as below.
Entrance Dose Rate Check and Camera Iris Adjustment
NOTE Camera Iris adjustment is done in the factory. Adjust with much care only if necessary.
1. Place the dosimeter probe on the I.I. grid center, and secure it with transparent tape.
2. Use 2mm copper to cover the beam path on the X-ray tube, and secure it with tape.
3. Position the C-arm to lateral position.
4. Make an exposure in Auto Fluoroscopy, and wait until the technique stabilizes. Check if the dose
rate is within:
Brivo OEC 715/Brivo OEC 785: 4.1±0.3mR/min (35.92±2.63uGy/min or 2155±157uGy/hr)
4-37
Brivo OEC 865: 3.1±0.3mR/min (27.16±2.63uGy/min or 1629±157uGy/hr)

5. If failed, open the Camera head cover, and carefully adjust the camera iris. Loosen Camera Iris
Securing Screw, turn Camera Iris to smaller index to decrease the stable dose rate, and to bigger
index to increase stable dose rate.
Camera Iris Camera Iris

Adjustment Ring Secure Screw
Camera of Brivo OEC 715/785
Camera Iris
Set Screw
Iris internal
secure Screw
Camera Iris
Adjustment Ring
Camera of Brivo OEC 865

The secure screw of Brivo OEC 865’s Camera is 1/16 inch HEX.
NOTE
Don’t touch the iris internal secure screw which can lead to iris adjustment ring disabled.
NOTE
6. Make an exposure to make sure the entrance dose rate:

Brivo OEC 715/785: 4.1±0.3mR/min (35.92±2.63uGy/min or 2155±157uGy/hr)
4-38
Calibration
Brivo OEC 865: 3.1±0.3mR/min (27.16±2.63uGy/min or 1629±157uGy/hr) as close as possible.

7. If failed after many trials, check the kVp and mA calibration, and come back to Camera Iris
Adjustment. Repeat as many times as necessary.
8. When passed, check if the kVp is within specification of ABS Tracking Check. If fails, perform
kVp and mA check, and return back to the Camera Iris adjustment.
9. When passed, fix the iris by tighten the Camera Iris Securing Screw, and remove the dosimeter
probe from the I.I., and remove copper from the X-ray tube, and perform ABS Tracking check.
Cleanup
When you follow the normal beam alignment procedure, at this stage, you do not need to
reassemble the Camera Head Cover. You may still need to access the camera head for Camera focus
adjustment.
4.6.8. Limiting Resolution

Limiting Resolution Setup
1. Position the C-arm with I.I. above the X-ray tube.
2. Create a new exam to make default settings.
3. Place a Spatial Resolution tool on the Image
Intensifier, and secure it with transparent tape.The
angle between the horizontal axis of the image and
the Spatial Resolution tool shall be around 45
degrees, and the layout of Spatial Resolution tool
should be as follow.
4. Select Auto Fluoroscopy mode. Take an exposure,
and stop when image is stable. Adjust kVp and mA if
necessary.
5. Read the limiting resolution on the display image. It is Brivo OEC 715/765/865
the maximum number (lp/mm) where half of the
lines are distinguishable. Adjusting brightness and contrast to get high image quality.
6. Verify if the resolution is within the specified value range below.
NORM MAG1 MAG2
Field Size OEC 715, OEC 715, OEC 715,
OEC 865 OEC 865 OEC 865
OEC 785 OEC 785 OEC 785
Resolution
≥ 2.0 ≥ 2.2 ≥ 2.6 ≥ 3.0 ≥ 3.1 ≥ 3.5
(Lp/mm)
7. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for MAG1 mode.
8. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for MAG2 mode.
9. If the resolution check fails, adjust the Camera Focus.
4-39
Camera Focus Calibration

Camera Focus adjustment is done in the factory. Adjust with much care only if
NOTE
necessary.
1. To have access to CCD Camera Focus, perform the following.
a. Turn off the power.
b. Position the C-arm to lateral position.
c. Disconnect the Camera Cables.
d. Remove counter weight.
e. Reconnect the Camera Cables.
f. Power on the system.
2. Loosen Camera Focus Securing Screw, adjustment Camera focus.
3. Make an exposure, and check the resolution again. Repeat as many times as necessary.
4. If passed:
a. Tighten the Camera Focus Securing Screw.
b. Power off system
c. Disconnect camera cables
d. Install counter weight
e. Connect camera cable
f. Install I.I. cover
5. If the resolution check still fails after many trials, proceed to I.I. Focus adjustment.
Camera Focus
Adjustment Camera Focus
Ring secure Screw
Brivo OEC 715/785
4-40
Calibration
Camera Focus Camera Focus

Adjustment Handle Security Screw
OEC 865
The security screw of Brivo OEC 865’s Camera is 1/16 inch HEX.
NOTE
Image Intensifier Focus Calibration

I.I. Focus adjustment is done in the I.I. factory. Adjust with much care only if the power
NOTE supply is changed or repaired. Always use non-metal flathead screwdriver to adjust the
I.I. potentiometer to avoid short circuit.
1. Loosen 2 securing screws for I.I. Power Supply.
2. Disconnect relative cables to take out the I.I Power Supply. Carefully adjust I. I. Field Size
potentiometer. Fixed I.I. power supply in below two ways as calibration:
4-41
3. Carefully adjust the I. I. center resolution potentiometer and edge resolution potentiometer.
Edge Resolution Center Resolution
Field Size
A5 As A13A12 A11A23A22A21A33A32A31
a. NORM field size: Set Field size to NORM, adjust trimmer A21 and A11.
b. MAG1 filed size: Set Field size to MAG1, adjust trimmer A22 and A12.
c. MAG2 filed size: Set Field size to MAG2, adjust trimmer A23 and A13.
4. Take an exposure, and check the Field. Repeat as many times as necessary as limiting resolution
is in specification.
Cleanup
1. After passing, remove the resolution tool from the I.I. Grid.
2. Make sure to re-assembly of all components as the following
4-42
Calibration
a. Power off the system.

b. Disconnect Camera Cables.
c. Reinstall the I.I. Power Supply and connect cables between power supply and I.I.
d. Install counter weight.
e. Connect Camera Head Cable, and make sure to tighten the securing screw.
f. Assemble the I.I. cover.
g. Power on the system.
Ensure the cable tightly connect to the I.I. Power Supply. Virtual connection will lead to no
NOTE image or image vibration in Fluoro.
4.6.9. Shading Correction Check and Calibration

Shading Correction Calibration Check:
1. Set to Normal mode, Auto Technique On.
2. Take a Shot.
3. Turn on the Automatic Brightness& Contrast.
4. Keep the brightness level and manually increase Contrast Level to see well on Brightness
uniformity. Adjust the brightness level if necessary.
5. Pass if you see the brightness uniformity is good enough. For example the 1st image shows the
good brightness uniformity, and the 2nd image, 3rd image shows the brightness uniformity is not
good.
1st image(good example) 2nd image (Margin is darker 3rd image (brightness of
than center ) brightness margin is brighter than center)
6. If you fail in step 5, need perform Shading Correction Calibration.
4-43
Shading Correction Calibration:

1. Before calibration, make sure no object, C-arm is up-down position
2. Login Administration interface by service authority, select Calibration Tab, click “shading
Calibration” button.
3. In shading calibration interface, click each Mag calibration buttons, shading correction
calibration Wizard will be prompted. According to the Wizard complete the calibration.
4. Redo the Shading Correction Calibration Check to ensure the system is in good brightness
uniformity status.
4-44
Calibration
4.7. DAP Accuracy Verification and Calibration

4.7.1. DAP Calibration Verification:
Login Administration interface by Service authority, select “Calibration” Tab. DAP calibration buttons
for system with filter and without filter are displayed on right screen.
System with filter shall performance both calibration DAP Calibration with Filter and
NOTE Without Filter.
System without filter shall performance DAP Calibration Without Filter and the “DAP
Calibration with Filter” button is in grey.
verification to potect Iamge Intensifie.
4-45
A 2 I
Beam Diameter Measurement:

Take a shot and measure the beam diameter of Normal mode by 9-inch BAFT (00-878105-02), then
input measure result to Area_1.
4-46
Calibration
DOSE Value Measurement:

Put the sensor of Dosimeter on the center of Image Intensifier and set Dosimeter in accumulated dose
in Gy mode. Expose about 10 seconds as the KV&mA protocol in Area_A, then input each measure
result in Aerea_2.
DOSE Accuracy Calculation:
After finishing 6 measurements, click “Calculate Error” button, system will automatically calculate and
show the “% of Dose Error and % of DAP Error” in Area_I.
The data of “% of Dose Error” shall be less than 10%, otherwise the system shall be
NOTE calibrated by “Calculate Dose Coef.”
The data of “% of DAP Error” shall be less than 10%, otherwise the system shall be
calibrated by “Calculate DAP Coef.”
4.7.2. DAP Accuracy Application Verification:

In application interface, perform below procedure to verify the DAP calibraiton result.
Dose Rate and Dose Accuracy Application Verification:
1. Create a new exam named "DOSE CHECK". Make sure the collimator is at the maximum position.
2. Put detector of Dosimeter at 30.0+/-1.0cm from the image intensifier surface in the beam axis.
Take an exposure in Auto Technique mode, observe and adjust the Dosimeter detector to the
center of I.I. Set Dosimeter to dose rate in Gy/min.
3. Take exposure with the modes and parameters listed below. When the reading of Dosimeter is
stable, record the dose rate displayed on left screen into column Dose Rate displayed on left
monitor; record the dose rate displayed on Dosimeter into column Dose Rate read from Dosimeter;
work out the Error and fill it into the column Error.
displayed on left
meter (mGy/min)
Dose Rate read
Error= (Dose Rate

(mGy/min)
from Dose
Dose Rate
displayed on left - Dose

monitor
mode kV mA Rate read from Dose

meter )/ Dose Rate read
from Dose meter <30%
normal 45 2
4. Set Dosimeter to accumulated Dose in Gy and reset Dosimeter to zero.

5. Take exposure with the modes and parameters listed below. Record the dose value displayed
on left monitor into the column Dose displayed on left monitor before exposure, take exposure
and hold on for 5~10s then stop exposure, Record the dose displayed on left screen into column
Dose displayed on left monitor after exposure; record the dose displayed on Dosimeter into
column Dose read from Dosimeter, work out the Error and fill it into the column Error.
4-47
Dose on the left

Error= (Dose on
before exposure
Dose read from

Dose displayed
Dose displayed
on left monitor
on left monitor
monitor= Dose displayed
after exposure
the left monitor -
Dose meter
on left monitor after
Dose read from
(mGy)
(mGy)
(mGy)
mode
kV mA exposure- Dose
Dose meter )/
displayed on left
Dose read from
monitor before exposure
Dose meter <30%
(mGy)
4pps 80 1

DAP Accuracy Application Verification:
1. Position C-arm to AP position. Ensure the Monoblock is at bottom and I.I. is at top.
2. Create a new exam named “DAP CHECK”.
3. Set Image Intensifier Field Size to MAG2
4. Install BAFT on I.I. Take exposure in Auto Fluoro mode and hold on. Close Iris a little by pressing
the Iris Collimator Close button on control panel until at least two opposite leaves are visible on
left monitor. And then stop exposure. Read the distance on BAFT between any pair of opposite
leaves. Record the value in column "Diameter". The unit shall be mm. Remove BAFT from I.I.
The semi-transparent part of leaves shall be considered. The measurement shall start and
NOTE end at the middle of semi-transparent area.
5. Fix Dosimeter detector at II surface. Take an exposure in Auto Fluoro mode, observe and adjust
the Dosimeter detector to the center of I.I. surface. Set up the dosimeter to accumulated dose in
Gy and reset Dosimeter.
6. Set the kVp/mA and exposure mode as the parameters in below table and do measurement in
sequence. For each measurement, record the DAP displayed on left monitor into column "DAP
on monitor before exposure", then take exposure for at least 20 seconds. After exposure
stopped, record the DAP displayed on left monitor in column “DAP on monitor after exposure”.
Record the reading dose of Dosimeter in column “Reading Dose”. Reset the Dosimeter after
each measurement is done.
7. Calculate and fill DAP estimated in column “DAP estimated”.
DAP estimated = DAP on monitor after exposure - DAP on monitor before exposure
Calculate and fill DAP measured in column “DAP measured”
DAP measured = Reading Dose * 0.8285 * Diameter²/ 100000
Calculate and fill Error in column “Error (%)”.
Error = (DAP estimated - DAP measured) / DAP measured * 100
8. The errors calculated should meet the requirement according to local regulations (Not more
than 30% ):
4-48
Calibration
before exposure
DAP on monitor
DAP on monitor
Diameter (mm)
DAP estimated
DAP measured
after exposure
Reading dose
(Gy.cm2)
(Gy.cm2)
(Gy.cm2)
(Gy.cm2)
Error (%)
exposure
(mGy)
Mag kVp
mA
mode
Normal
Mag2 45 4
fluoro
Normal
Mag2 105 1
fluoro
9. If system can’t pass the verification, perform the Collimator Calibration and DAP calibration,
then perform this verification again, until system passes the verification.
4-49
4.7.3. DAP Calibration:
II III
B 3
Formal DAP Calibration:

Must do DAP calibration verification before perform DAP calibraiton.
NOTE
If Just one of Dose/DAP Coefficient is failed, just calculate the failed coefficient
1. DOSE Rate Measurement:

Put the sensor of Dosimeter on the center of Image Intensifier and set Dosimeter in DOSE Rate in
Gy/sec model. Expose as the KV&mA protocol in Area_B, then input each 6 measurement results in
Area_3.
2. Dose Coef Calculation:
Click “Calculate Dose Coef” button, “Dose Coefficients” will be calculated and displayed in Area_II.
3. DAP Coef Calculation:
Click “Calculate DAP Coef” button, “DAP Coefficients” will be calculated and displayed in Area_III.
Click “OK”, DAP calibration is completed and a dialogue with “DAP Calibration Done” will be prompted.
4-50
Calibration
4.8. Monitor Brightness and Contrast Adjustment

4.8.1. Keys assignment and operation LED
A “dynamic help for keypad function” is available for each menu. It explains the role of each Key on the
OSD menu window, which is currently active.
4.8.2. Lock and unlock the OSD menu

Action Key sequence
Lock OSD menu (except hotkeys Press key Exit and Up Up Up in 3 seconds,
if enabled) when keys are unlocked.
Unlock OSD menu (except Press key Exit and Up Up Up in 3 seconds,
hotkeys if enabled) when keys are locked
4.8.3. Key functions in the OSD menu

Key(s) Situation Action
Menu Always Jump to next line
Up Slide controller Increase value
Selection point To previous selection
Command "Enter key"
Down Slide controller Decrease value
Selection point To subsequent selection
Exit Except "Exit OSD" menu One menu level upwards (settings are
retained)
In "Exit OSD" menu Return to main menu (settings are retained)
4-51
4.8.4. Brightness and Contrast Adjustment
The monitor is factory calibrated. For DVI-D input we suggest don’t change the contrast
NOTE value, any change of this will change the optimized LUT settings and will lose some of
the image information. We suggest to only adjust the backlight of the monitor if the
luminance is not acceptable.
Main Menu Function Adjustment range Description

Adjustment of contrast
This allows the brighter area to be seen more
Contrast 0…255 distinctly. The center point is in 128 position.
Note: for DVI-D signals the Contrast setting is
optimized. Manual changes are not recommended.
It is used to adjust the black level of the monitor. The
center point is in 128 position.
This allows the darker area to be seen more
Brightness 0…255
distinctly.
Brightness
Note: for DVI-D signals the brightness setting is
optimized. Manual changes are not recommended.
Adjustment brightness of LCD backlight to adapt
Backlight 0…255
total brightness for room illumination
SETTING1 While choose backlight it will recall factory default

contrast, brightness, backlight.
SETTING2
Settings
SETTING3
User
4-52
Calibration
Accept changes Quick OSD menu and either save or reject the
Quit OSD changes. If you have reached this menu
menu unintentionally, you can return to the main menu
using the EXIT key.
Reject changes
OSD is If this message is displayed, you do not have the
locked authority to carry out the changes in the OSD menu.
Please contact your servicing partner in this case.
4-53
4.9. Power Input Tolerance Check

4.9.1. Input Voltage Check:
Follow below procedure to perform Input voltage Check:
1. Check the current input voltage adaption of system and treat current input voltage as
parameter V1.
There are 7 standard voltage configurations for different countries as follows:
NOTE
100V/110V/120V/200V/220V/230V/240V
The voltage adaption for 115V is the same with the 110V; V1=110V;
The voltage adaption for 127V is the same with the 120V; V1=120V;
2. Remove the WKS back cover and Power Distribution Unit Board protection cover.
3. Plug out the connectors PJ3 and PJ10 on Power Distribution Unit Board;
4. Switch on the breaker on WKS;
5. Test the voltage between the terminal J1-9 and J1-12 by multi meter and treat the voltage
as parameter V2;
6. Long press the switch on/off button, until the WKS power on switch inner LED starts to flash;
7. Test the voltage between the test points TP19 (red) and TP25 (black) on the PDU board with
the DC voltage shift of multi meter. The voltage shall be within (V2*6.25/V1)±0.01V
Example 1:
If the voltage adaption is 115V, then the V1 is 110V, and the actual tested input voltage is
117V (between J1-9 and J1-12), so the V2 is 117V.
So the voltage between the TP19 and TP25 shall be within (117*6.25/110)±0.01.
Example 2:
If the voltage adaption is 220V, then the V1is 220V, and the actual tested input voltage is
215V (between J1-9 and J1-12), so the V2 is 215V;
So the voltage between the TP19 and TP25 shall be within (215*6.25/220)±0.01.
8. If the voltage fulfill (V2*6.25/V1)±0.01V, plug in connectors PJ3 and PJ10 removed in step3,
recover the Power Distribution Unit Board protection cover and WKS back cover.
If the voltage do not fulfill (V2*6.25/V1)±0.01V, refer to 4.9.2 to perform calibration.
4-54
Calibration
4.9.2. Input Voltage Calibration:

If the voltage is not in the specification, adjust potential meter R52 to ensure the voltage
between TP19 (red) and TP25 (black) on the PDU board is within the (V2*6.25/V1)±0.01V,
R52
TP25
TP19
4-55
Chapter5. Software
5.1. Overview
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product provides service tool in software for the service
engineer.
Using the service tool, service engineer can:
 Get system information and set system ID
 Configure Product Model and Options
 Configure exposure management parameters
 Configure image processing parameter
 System maintenance
 System Log Viewer
This chapter will describe how to use the service tool and the procedure of software upgrade and
installation.
5.2. Service Tool

After Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system boots up successfully, press down “Ctrl”, “Shift”, “Alt” and ”→” keys
together, administration interface can be invoked.
Select “Service” as the user, input the password, then click “Login” button to enter the main screen of
Administration with service tool.
All settings in service tool can be activated.
NOTE
5-2
Software
5.2.1. System Information
“System information” Tab including:

 Product name
 Host ID (ID to generate eLicense key for software function)
 Serial Number
 System ID
 Workstation information:
Hardware information
Software Version
Build Number
 Mainframe information:
Hardware information
Software Version
Build Number
 Usage statistics
5-3
Above screen is an example and the software version in it may not be the latest version. Take the actual
show version of the software as standard.
About system ID set or upgrade:
Field engineer can set or upgrade system ID of the system. Current system ID is displayed on the screen
automatically. Fill in the new system ID in the textbox and restart system is OK.
The system ID will be set to blank in manufactory. Field engineer shall set system ID during installation
and make sure it’s the same as the SID in service record system (GIB).
5.2.2. Configure Product
1 2
3 4
Configure Product by typing:

Input Product Name into Area_1 and input 16 digital option key into Area_2. Click <Add> button in
product configuration area.
Activate software option feature by typing:
Input Feature Name into Area_2 and input 16 digital option key into Area_4. Click <Add> button in
software option area.
Configure Product by import form USB stick:
Insert USB stick with license file into USB port of Workstation, in “Medium” pull down manual select
corresponding subarea and license file, click <import>, click <OK>.
Activate software option feature from USB stick:
5-4
Software
Insert USB stick with license file into USB port of Workstation, in “Medium” pull down manual select
corresponding subarea and license file, click <OK>.
If invalid eLicense Key added or eLicense File imported, it will prompt the information
NOTE dialog with message: It’s an invalid eLicense key/file. Input/import eLicense key/file is
needed.
Hardware Configure:
Monitor Type: Selects the monitor type (Mono Display / Color Display) from pull down manual for the
current product (No monitor type is set as default).
Filter Option: Disable/Enable removal filter option.
5.2.3. Calibration
Above is the calibration interface, detailed calibration instruction, please refer to Calibration chapter 4.
5-5
5.2.4. Exposure Management
Select “Exposure Config” Tab on the main screen. “Exposure Config” screen will be displayed.
 Restore Default:
Restore Default can restore all setting back to new default value, as above picture.
Once click Restore Default button need follow below instructions to recheck and set all of
NOTE
the items in “Exposure Config”.
 Exposure Control:
Enable or disable “Auto Termination at 9'30" in one shot” function. If this function is enable, when the
continuous fluoroscopy time reaches 9’30’’, X-rays will be terminated automatically.
Refer to the below “Exposure Management Matrix” table at the end of this section to set
NOTE
Fluoro Alarm Control.
Select “Film” option to enable or disable film exposure mode.

 Dose Group Setting:
Base on the real power input select corresponding input voltage setting.
5-6
Software
Wrong input voltage settings will lead to system work in abnormal mode.
NOTE
The following section describes the instruction how to set Dose Group and X-ray Control
NOTE according to the following Table “Exposure Management Matrix”. If the instruction
contradicts the corresponding regulatory requirements of certain countries or regions (for
example, some regulatory requirements are updated), change the setting according to
the regulatory requirements.
Select “Dose Group Option” by country to set the dose limitation in normal (standard) and HLF exposure.
The available options are:
‒ Normal 88 and HLF 100
The skin dose rate in the Dose Group represents the value for conditions of free-in-air irradiation at the
patient skin: 30cm along the beam axis from the image intensifier surface.
1. Two dose groups in normal (standard) Fluoro mode:
‒ Normal50: The skin dose rate does not exceed 50mGy/min in standard Fluoro mode, such as
Australia, Japan, New Zealand, etc.
‒ Normal88: The skin dose rate does not exceed 88mGy/min in standard Fluoro mode, such as
USA, Germany, etc.
2. Two dose groups in HLF mode:
‒ HLF50: The skin dose rate does not exceed 50 mGy/min in HLF mode, such as Japan, etc.
‒ HLF100: The skin dose rate does not exceed 100 mGy/min in HLF mode, such as Australia,
Italy, UK, New Zealand, etc.
For the country, such as USA, if the skin dose rate shall not exceed 176 mGy/min in HLF mode from its
regulatory requirements, the system will use HLF100 in HLF mode because the maximum skin dose rate
of the X-ray tube cannot exceed 100 mGy/min.
3. For some countries, their dose limitation should be the combination of the above normal and HLF
groups. For example:
‒ Australia: Normal50 and HLF100
‒ China: Normal88 and HLF100
4. For countries or regions that have a higher standard Fluoro dose (at the patient skin) rate limit
than USA, the dose limits are set to the same value as for USA.
5. For countries or regions that have a higher HLF dose (at the patient skin) rate limit than USA, the
dose limits are set to the same value as for USA.
6. For countries or regions that do not specify standard Fluoro dose at patient skin, the dose limits
are set to the same value as for USA.
7. For countries or regions that do not specify HLF dose at patient skin, the dose limits are set to the
same value as for USA.
Refer to the below table “Exposure Management Matrix” to set Dose Group.
5-7
 DAP Unit Config:

Field engineer can configure software DAP unite on this interface.
 HLF level exposure setting:
Disable after High Level Exposure: Enable or disable “The system automatically Disable After High Level
Exposure” function. Some countries or regions, such as certain provincial locations in Australia, may
require enabling it.
Disable after No Exposure for 5 Minutes: Enable or disable “Disable after No Exposure for 5 Minutes”
function. Some countries or regions, such as certain provincial locations in Australia, may require
enabling it.
HLF Accessible Only in Auto ABS: Enable or disable “HLF Accessible Only in Auto ABS” function. Some
countries or regions, such as certain provincial locations in Australia, may require enabling it.
Automatic Termination at 20” in One Shot: Enable or disable “Automatic Termination at 20” in One Shot”
function. Some countries or regions, such as Australia or Switzerland, require enabling it.
Refer to the following table “Exposure Management Matrix” to set HLF scene setting.
Exposure Management Matrix
HLF Automatic Disable after Auto

Disable after
Countries / Accessible Termination No Exposure Termination
Dose Group Option High Level
Regions Only in at 20” in for 5 at 9'30" in one
Exposure
Auto ABS One Shot Minutes shot
Albania Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Algeria Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Angola Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Argentina Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Australia Normal 50 and HLF 100 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
Austria Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Bahrain Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Bangladesh Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Belarus Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Belgium Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Bolivia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Bosnia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Brazil Normal 50 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Brunei Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
5-8
Software

Disable after
Exposure
Burkina Faso Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Cambodia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Cameroon Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Chile Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
China (P.R.) Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Colombia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Costa Rica Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Cote d'lvoire Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Croatia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Cyprus Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Czech
Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Republic
Denmark Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Egypt Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
France Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Germany Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Greece Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Guatemala Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Honduras Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Hong Kong Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Hungary Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
India Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Indonesia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Iraq Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Ireland Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Israel Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Italy Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Jamaica Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
5-9

Disable after
Exposure
Japan Normal 50 and HLF 50 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable

Jordan Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Kazakhstan Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Kuwait Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Laos Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Lebanon Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Libya Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Luxembourg Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Macedonia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Malaysia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Malta Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Mexico Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Montenegro Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Morocco Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
New Zealand Normal 50 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Netherlands Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Nigeria Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Oman Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Pakistan Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Panama Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Paraguay Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Peru Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Philippines Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Poland Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Portugal Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Romania Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Russia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Qatar Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
5-10
Software

Disable after
Exposure
Saudi Arabia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Serbia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Singapore Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Slovakia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
South Africa Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
South Korea Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Spain Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Switzerland Normal88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Taiwan Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Thailand Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Trinidad &
Tobago
Tunisia Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Turkey Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Ukraine Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
United Arab
Emirates
United States Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
United
Kingdom
Uruguay Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
Venezuela Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable
Vietnam Normal 88 and HLF 100 Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable
5-11
5.2.5. Imaging Processing Config
System provide tool to set imaging parameters. Click “Image Processing configure” tab on the main
screen, the image processing interface is displayed.
Changes on Image Brightness, Image Contrast, Black/Wihte Margin and Sharpen
NOTE power are not recommended because these values have been optimized for the image
quality to compromise any anatolomical imaging. Any changes will affect the system
image quality.
 Image Brightness: Pressing up or down arrow or dragging the block allows you to adjust image
brightness default from 0 to 100.
 Image Contrast: Pressing up or down arrow or dragging the block allows you to adjust image
contrast default from 0 to 100.
 Edge Enhance: Select default value of sharpening power from 0-9.
 Rotation Angle: Select default value of image rotation angle from 0~359.
 TNR (Temporal Noise Reduction): Select default value of noise filter from 0-3.
 SM (Smart Metal) value: Select default value of the appearance reduction of metal in the image
from 0-50.
5-12
Software
 Enable or disable IP circular mask: it is used to assist beam alignment calibration. Make sure it is
set back to the default setting “Enable” after beam alignment.
 Enable or disable IP shading correction image processing function.
 Enable or disable Display Mark: it is used to assist beam alignment calibration. Make sure it is set
back to the default setting “Disable” after beam alignment.
 Enable or disable Shading: it is used to assist to judge shading correction calibration result. Make
sure it is set back to the default setting “enable” after judging shading correction calibration.
 Black/White Margin: This adjustment shall be made very carefully only when necessary, as it may
affect the overall image quality. Pressing up or down arrow allows you to adjust image margin
from 0 to 10000. Increasing White Margin value may decrease the overall contrast and
brightness, and increasing Black Margin value may decrease the overall contrast and increase
the overall brightness.
5.2.6. Maintenance
5-13
Export/Import System Setup:

Export/Import configuration file set in user Administration interface by USB stick.
Export/Import Administration Config:
Export/Import configuration file set in service tool (Administration) interface by USB stick.
Recommend export both files before upgrading system Operation System and Application software and
import after upgrading.
Backup/Restore Database:
Backup/Restore Database for/from database pool.
Backup the current database file on this screen. The database file contains patient and exam’s
information. Click “Backup” button to save the current database file. A double confirm screen will pop up.
Click “Yes” button to start backup. The process will complete until “Database backup finished.” message
displays. There are two backup files in the system and used by turns.
Click “Restore…” button to enter the Database Restore screen. The backup files’ name contain the time
stamp. You can choose a database according to the time. Click Restore button and click “Yes” on the
double confirm screen to start the restore process. The restore will complete until “Database restore
finished.” message displays.
Data Integrity Check:
The consistency check function is to check the consistency between the database and image files. Click
“Data Integrated Check” button on main screen to enter consistency check screen.
Click “Check” button on the screen, and then click “Yes” button in confirmation screen to start the check
process. The result will be displayed on the frame after the process complete.
Upgrade Software:
This feature is for uninstall the APP software of Brivo OEC 715/785/865 C-Arm system. After uninstalling
the APP software system will go back to Operation System interface. Then insert the APP installation CD,
APP installation Wizard will be invoked automatically.
Detailed software upgrade procedure refer to 5.3.
Reset Admin Password:
This feature is to reset Admin password to original.
5-14
Software
5.2.7. Log Viewer
Log viewer screen allows service engineer to review the system log including the system event and
detailed information of error, warning and information messages, detailed even code explanation please
refer to chapter6.
There is system Log which is less about 100MB and divided into 10 files, 10M per file. Log information will
be recovered when the file size exceeds the limitation automatically.
Click “Log Viewer” Tab on main screen:
Date: Used to select the period to show the log. You can search the logs created in the selected
period. The available options are: all date, day, week, month, half year or one year.
Type: Select the log type including error, warning, information and event.
Sub-system: Search the log information according to software sub-system that the event or failure
happened on.
Search for: Input the key words of the log text in the textbox to search.
Exception code: Input the error code displayed on the monitor and control panel to search the log.
Module: Search the log information according to module that the event or failure happened on. The
available options are: computer, software, X-ray exposure and all.
Search Button: Click the button to start the search operation and invoke detailed Log information.
5-15
Log Information Area: Display the search results of the log. This field will show the error code, Type,
sub-system, module, create date and log text of the log.
Reset Button: Click “Reset” button to clear all selected search option and restore to defaults.
Export Button: Click “Export” button to export log files to USB disk which is selected in Medium pull
down manual. The export complete with a message “Log export finished.” All log files will be exported
into one *.zip file named with system S/N and exported date/time. Extract the file with password
(same as login service tool), System Log will be divided into small files after exported, the maximum of
the file numbers are 10.
5-16
Software
5.3. Software Installation and Upgrade

5.3.1. Install Operating System
There are two software installation Disks for Brivo OEC 715/785/865 C-Arm X-ray Product.
Disc 1/2 is the Operating System (OS) installation CD
Disc 2/2 is the application Software
The OS installation CD should be installed prior to Application CD during the initial installation.
Setting and Configuration backup/restore:

NOTE System providing User settings, Administration Settings, and Product configuration
backup/Restore feature. Before installing OS and APP backup all setting and
configuration are recommended. Detailed please refer to 5.2.2 and 5.2.6.
CD/DVD Rom is an option part, so upgrade software need use USB CD/DVD Rom with
NOTE
Part No# 5075511 on none CD/DVD Rom system.
You must press key immediately during system booting in step 1.

NOTE
As installing Operating System or Application, system (Power Distribution Board) will

NOTE make a beep alert sound for loosing heart beat between workstation and System
Interface Board more than 3 minutes.
5-17
1. Turn on the system (during the memory testing) repeated press key on the keyboard. Input
BIOS password to Login BIOS setup interface.
2. Use the arrow right button to select the “Boot” screen.
5-18
Software
3. Use arrow down “Boot Device Priority” and press “Enter”. Then choose the “CD/DVD” as 1st boot
device.
4. Press the “ ” key and then press “Enter”. This will save your settings, and the system will
reboot. (The system is now set to boot from CD ROM first.)
5-19
5. System will boot up, in system boot up section, insert the OS installation CD into the CD/DVD
driver of the Workstation. When below screen is prompted. Select “Surgery Bluestone Program”,
and then press “Enter”.
6. Later interface with progress bar will be prompted.
7. As Helios installation complete interface prompted, take out operation system installation CD and
reboot system.
5-20
Software
8. Reset HDD as first boot up device in BIOS, according to above BIOS setting step.
9. System log into Linux that means operation system is successfully installed.
5-21
5.3.2. Install Application Software

Installing application software on new operation system, please directly jump setp3.
NOTE
CD/DVD Rom is an option part, so upgrade software need use USB CD/DVD Rom with
Part No# 5075511 on none CD/DVD Rom system.
Unplug Ethernet cable and turn off WiFi power supply on the back of Workstation, before
clicking Upgrade Software button.
Setting and Configuration backup/restore:
NOTE System providing User settings, Administration Settings, and Product configuration
backup/Restore feature. Before installing OS and APP backup all setting and
configuration are recommended. Detailed please refer to 5.2.2 and 5.2.6.
1. In Admin interface Click “Maintenance” Tab, then click “Upgrade Software” button. Upgrade software
will be prompted, click “Yes”,
5-22
Software
2. Shut down and reboot system, waiting for log in Linux desktop.
3. Insert the Application CD to CD/DVD driver of the workstation, click “OK” on below dialogue :
4. Click “Run” on below dialogue:
5-23
5. Input system serial No. twice, and then click “OK”.
6. By default the application will be installed with “Retain the existing user data” on the system. If the
user data need not be retained on the system, select “Not retain the existing user data”. Click “OK”
go to next step.
Select “Not retain the existing user data” will delete all existing data and it cannot be
CAUTION recovered.
7. In the confirmation screen, click “Yes” to continue the installation process. If do not want continue
current installation mode, press “No”.
5-24
Software
8. After the installation mode is selected, the application install process will be started.
9. If no error is detected during the installation, stage 1 complete screen will be displayed.
10. Click “OK” to complete the installation stage1, reboot system. After system booting up, the installation
stage 2 will be started when the system boot up complete.
If no keyboard/mouse input in 5 minutes, system will be in screen saver mode, monitor

NOTE will be turned off. Move mouse, system will be back to normal mode, monitor will be
turned on.
11. When the installation stage 2 complete, Brivo OEC Product application install complete screen will be
displayed, Click “OK”. Take out the application installation CD and shutdown system.
12. Turn on system and login APP interface to do workstation operation check as defined in section3.6.1.
5-25
13. If in step6 select “Not retain the user data”, need login Admin interface by service authority to
perform Shading Correction Calibration refer to Chapter 4 and reconfigure/set system refer to
Chapter 5.
5.4. Firmware Upgrade

5.4.1. MCU Firmware Upgrade
Installing PCW16FXsetup Programmer into laptop, Windows 2K/XP/7:
1. Insert the Firmware Download Software Tool CD to CD/DVD drive, find the installation software:
2. Double Click the installation Software, a progress bar will be prompted:
3. Click “Next” button:
5-26
Software
4. Click “Next”:
5. Click “Install”:
5-27
6. Click “Finish” button to complete installation procedure.
Install USB converter driver in Windows 2K/XP/7 into laptop:

Method 1:
After insert the converter the system can install the driver automatically.
Method 2:
Use converter User guide CD to install the driver. The CD is packed with the converter.
Plug in USB converter to laptop and insert Firmware Download Software Tool. Diver and User guide
interface will be promoted. Click “Product Driver”, select the corresponding operation system in laptop,
and then click setup in the folder to complete the driver installation.
5-28
Software
If methods 1/2 are not available, please follow method 3 in below.

NOTE
5-29
Method 3:
In Firmware Download Software Tool CD, in patch “the location of the driver on your system:\MCU
Firmware Download Software Tool\USB-232-485-422” click “autorun” icon. After “Driver and User’s
Guide” interface being promoted, follow method 2 install driver.
5-30
Software
MCU firmware flash

1. Recommend export the Product configuration
and Software option license file by USB stick, in
administration interface by service authority,
refer to 5.2.2.
2. Shutdown system and remove the Mainframe
back cover and eBox cover.
3. Shorten the boot mode jumper right 2 pins on
the Mainframe Control Board, as shown on
right picture.
4. Plug in the upgrade cable as right picture and
insert USB convertor with upgrade cable to
laptop USB port.
5. Then power on system.
6. Start FUJITSU FLASH MCU Programmer on by click Start\Programs\FUJITSU FLASH MCU

Programmer\ FMC16FX
Change the “Target Microcontroller” to “MB96F346A/R/Y” as show in below:
7. Find COM No. and Set Environment:

Find COM No.:
In “Computer Management” check COM No. of the USB Serial Port.
For Example: In below screen capture, Ports_USB Serial Port is “COM3”.
5-31
Set Environment:
In “Set Environment” set the COM No. as getting from “Computer Management”, as above example
radio button of COM3 is checked in Environment in below picture.
8. Click “Open” button and chose MCB*.mhx (In below picture the file name is MCB*.mhx) stored on the
Install CD.
5-32
Software
9. Click “Full Operation” button, then reset the MCU by pressing “Reset” button on Mainframe control
Board as below, then click “OK”.
5-33
10. Click “OK” as below to finished MCU firmware flash.
11. System Recovery

 Power off the system reshort cut the jumper as original.
 Unplug the firmware download cable from Mainframe Control Board.
 Reinstall the eBox cover and Mainframe back cover.
 Power on system, then reconfigure Product and Software option function as original, refer to
5.2.2.
 Performance below calibrations, refer to Chapter 4:
Below mA calibration and Beam Alignment Calibration interface just press “OK” button is to
NOTE finish the mA calibration. Because no hardware setting is changed, actual calibration is not
needed.
‒ mA Calibration
‒ mA Preheat calibration
‒ Beam Alignment Calibration
‒ Collimator Calibration
‒ Necessary DAP Calibration
‒ Shading Correction Calibrations
5-34
Software
5.4.2. CPLD Upgrade

USB-Blaster Driver installation
In order to install the USB-Blaster driver successfully, please confirm your operation system
NOTE in your laptop, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows 7 System, then following the
corresponding directions below before installation.
Install the USB-Blaster Driver on Windows 2000/XP：
1. Insert the Firmware Download Software Tool CD, and plug in the USB-Blaster download cable into the
PC.
2. On the Found New Hardware Wizard window,
select Install from a list of specific location
(Advanced) and then click “Next” to continue.
3. Select “Don’t search”. I will choose the driver to

install and click “Next” to continue.
5-35
4. Select Sound, video and game controllers, and

click “Next” to continue.
5. Select Have Disk and browse to the location of

the driver on your system: \CPLD Firmware
Download Software Tool\USB Blaster
Drivers\usb-blaster and click OK.
5-36
Software
6. Select Altera USB-Blaster and click “Next” to

continue.
7. Click Continue Anyway when the Hardware

Installation warning window appears.
8. Click Finish in the Completing the Add/Remove

Hardware Wizard window and Reboot your
system.
Installing the USB-Blaster Driver on Windows 7:

1. Insert the Application CD to CD/DVD drive and plug the USB-Blaster download cable into the PC.
5-37
2. Open Control panel

and click View devices
and printers to
continue
3. Double Click USB-Blaster in the device list
4. Click Hardware and Properties to continue.
5-38
Software
5. Click Change settings to continue.
6. Click Update Driver to continue
5-39
7. Click “Browse my computer for driver

software” to locate and install driver
software manually.
8. Browse to the location of the driver

software on your system and click
Next to continue.
9. Click “install this driver software

anyway” on the windows security.
5-40
Software
10. Click close and the USB blaster

driver is installed on your system
successfully.
Install Stand-Alone Quartus II Programer

1. Open the CD/DVD Rom find the installation software in CD
5-41
2. Click on install to continue
3. Click Next to continue
5-42
Software
4. Click I agree to the terms of

the license agreement and
Next to continue
5-43
8. Click Yes to remove the

temporary extracted files
when installation
5-44
Software
9. Click finish to complete the

installation
5-45
CPLD Firmware Download

1. Shutdown system and remove relative covers to access below boards, refer to chapter7.
2. Insert USB-Blaster download cable, then boot up the system:
Mainframe Control board System Interface Board
Download Port is J3
Power Distribution Unit
Download Port is J13 Download Port is PJ9

Red cable is opposite to 1 pin of J13.
NOTE
3. Open the Stand-Alone Quartus II Programer on laptop
5-46
Software
4. Click Hardware Setup and double click USB-Blaster to select it, then close the window
5. Download model selection:

For Mainframe Control Board and System interface
Board, model shall be “Active Serial Programming”
5-47
For Power Distribution Unit, model shall be “JTAG”
6. Click “Add File” and “Browse” to the location of the file on your system: select the right firmware file,
click open to continue.
5-48
Software
CPLD firmware file name:

For Mainframe Control Board: Xray_Control*.pof
For Power Distribution Unit: PDU*.pof
For System interface Board: SIB*.pof
7. Check program/configure and verify check box. And then click start button to download CPLD.
For Mainframe Control Board and System interface Board:
For Power Distribution Unit:
5-49
Firmware programing
8. When the progress bar reaches to 100%, the downloading is completed. Then shut down the system
and pull out the USB-Blaster download cable.
5-50
Software
In case progress bar displays failed, the progress is interrupted. Check the connection
NOTE
of USB-Blaster download cable and reload from 5.4.2 STEP 1.
System Recovery
1. Shutdown system and unplug the firmware download cable.
2. Reinstall all covers.
5-51
Chapter6. Troubleshooting
6.1. Overview
This chapter describes messages that appear on the right workstation monitor during system operation.
Messages may indicate any of the following:
 Error Messages
 Warning Messages
 Information
When the error message appears, error code will also be displayed on the kV, mA display field on control
panel, if the Mainframe is connected with Workstation.
6.2. Error Recovery Steps

Perform the following error recovery procedures if you encounter problems during start-up or operation:
1. Some messages can be cleared by pressing OK button or taking exposure, but will periodically re-
display while the condition exists.
2. If an error message occurs, shutdown the system. Wait one minute, and then press the power on key.
If this fails to restore normal operation then proceed with step 3.
3. Press the power off key, disconnect the power cord, and call for service. Refer to chapter 1 for
communication center telephone numbers. Do not continue using the system.
System may fail at any time. Ignoring error and warning messages may result in
WARNING equipment damage and personal injury.
6.3. Event Messages

6.3.1. Structure of Message Code
Three subcodes constitute the message:
Subsystem Code Component Code Exception No. Message ID Description
** ** *** **_**_*** -------
Example:
01 02 001 01 02 001 Tube temperature sensor
feedback SPI line work
abnormal
6-2
Troubleshooting
6.3.2. Definition of Code

Subsystem Subsystem Code Component Component Code
XRay Control 01
CPLD 01
Tube 02
Collimator 03
KV Control Board 04
Filament Drive Board 05
Control Panel 06
Hand Switch 07
Foot Switch 08
Key Switch 09
Emergency Switch 10
Up/Down Control Board 11
DAP 12
ComServo 13
Camera 14
Calibration 15
ABS 16
KVMA 17
Exposure Control 18
WKSMessage 19
Imaging 02
ImageAcquisition 01
PreProcess 02
PostProcess 03
Viewer 04
ImagingEngine 05
Application 03
Annotation 01
CinePlayer 02
CineSetup 03
ExamManagement 04
GraphicApplicationKit 05
ImageDirectory 06
Measurement 07
ModeSetup 08
Setup 09
ZoomRoam 10
Administration 11
6-3
MiniImageDirectory 12
Infrastructure 04
CommServo 01
DatabaseManagement 02
DcmDataTranslator 03
DcmTranscationUnit 04
DcmScu 05
Desktop 06
MediaManagement 07
DeviceManagement 08
SystemInit 09
Logger 10
ImageManagement 11
6-4
Troubleshooting
6.3.3. Message List

Exception Error Exception Message Diagnosis Reference
ID Warning Description (Displayed in User Interface)
(In system Log)
X-ray Control
0101001 Warning CPLD firmware Mainframe hardware version 1. MCU or CPLD Firmware
version is exception. The mainframe flashed wrong version
incompatible stopped.\nPlease call for 2. MCB Issue
with MCB service.
software
0101002 Warning Camera frame Camera signal can’t 1. Camera may be
sync signal is detected.\nPlease restart the abnormal.
lost system. If this issue persists, 2. MCB may be abnormal.
please call for service. 3.Maybe Bundle connection
issue or Bundle cable is
abnormal
0101003 Warning CPLD works Mainframe hardware 1. MCB may be abnormal
abnormally exception.The mainframe
after checking stopped.\nPlease restart the
external system. If this issue persists,
watchdog chip please call for service.
during system
boot up
0102001 Warning Tube Tube temperature monitoring 1.MCB may be abnormal
temperature exception. Exposure is
sensor's disabled.\nPlease restart the
feedback SPI system. If this issue persists,
line is works please call for service.
abnormal
0102002 Warning Tube Tube temperature monitoring 1. Maybe Tube temperature
temperature exception. Exposure is sensor connection issue.
sensor's disabled.\nPlease restart the
feedback line is system. If this issue persists,
disconnected please call for service.
0102800 Warning Tank surface Xray tube housing overheated. N/A
temperature Exposure is disabled.\nPlease
has reached do not touch the
untouch- housing.\nPlease wait for the
temperature tube to cool down before
making another exposure.
0102803 Warning Tube is hot Tube is hot.\nYou may N/A
continue with exposure, but
discretion is advised.
0102804 Warning Tube is Tube overheated. Exposure is N/A
overheating disabled.\nPlease wait for the
tube to cool down before
making another exposure.
6-5

(In system Log)
0103001 Warning Iris stuck Collimator iris stuck.\nPlease Leaves rotation stuck
restart the system. If this issue 1.Collimator may be
persists, please call for service. abnormal
2.CCB may be abnormal
3.MCB may be abnormal
4.Mother Board may be
abnormal
5.Cable between
Motherboard and
Collimator may be
abnormal
0103002 Warning Leaves Collimator leaves open/close Leaves rotation stuck
open/close stuck.\nPlease restart the 1. Collimator may be
stuck system. If this issue persists, abnormal
please call for service. 2. CCB may be abnormal
3. MCB may be abnormal
4. Mother Board may be
abnormal
5. Cable between
Motherboard and
Collimator may be
abnormal
0103003 Warning Leaves rotation Collimator leaves rotation Leaves rotation stuck
stuck stuck.\nPlease restart the 1.Collimator may be
system. If this issue persists, abnormal
please call for service. 2.CCB may be abnormal
3.MCB may be abnormal
4.Mother Board may be
abnormal
5.Cable between
Motherboard and
Collimator may be
abnormal
0103004 Warning IRIS width SPI Collimator iris monitoring MCU IRIS width A/D failure,
channel is exception. Iris can’t open or MCB may be abnormal
abnormal close.\nPlease restart the
system. If this issue persists,
please call for service.
0103005 Warning Leaves width Collimator leaves open/close MCU Leaves width A/D
feedback SPI monitoring exception. Leaves failure, MCB may be
channel is can’t open or close.\nPlease abnormal
abnormal restart the system. If this issue
persists, please call for service.
0103006 Warning Leaves angle Collimator leaves rotation MCU angle width A/D
feedback SPI monitoring exception. Leaves failure, MCB may be
channel is can’t rotate.\nPlease restart abnormal
6-6
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
abnormal the system. If this issue
0103007 Warning Iris channel SPI Collimator iris control 1. MCB may be abnormal
bus Tx is time exception. Iris can’t open or 2. Mother Board may be
out close.\nPlease restart the abnormal
system. If this issue persists, 3. CCB may be abnormal
0103008 Warning Iris channel SPI Collimator iris control 1. MCB may be abnormal
bus Rx is time exception. Iris can’t open or 2. Mother Board may be
out close.\nPlease restart the abnormal
system. If this issue persists, 3. CCB may be abnormal
0103009 Warning Leaves Collimator leaves open/close Leaves open/close channel
open/close control exception. Leaves can’t SPI (MCU) bus Tx is time out
channel SPI bus open or close.\nPlease restart 1. MCB may be abnormal
Tx is time out the system. If this issue 2. Mother Board may be
3. CCB may be abnormal
0103010 Warning Leaves Collimator leaves open/close Leaves open/close channel
open/close control exception. Leaves can’t SPI (MCU) bus Rx is time out
channel SPI bus open or close.\nPlease restart 1. MCB may be abnormal
Rx is time out the system. If this issue 2. Mother Board may be
0103011 Warning Leaves rotation Collimator leaves rotation Leaves rotation channel SPI
channel SPI bus control exception. Leaves can’t (MCU) bus Tx is time out
Tx is time out rotate.\nPlease restart the 1. MCB may be abnormal
system. If this issue persists, 2. Mother Board may be
please call for service. abnormal
0103012 Warning Leaves rotation Collimator leaves rotation Leaves rotation channel SPI
channel SPI bus control exception. Leaves can’t (MCU) bus Rx is time out
Rx is time out rotate.\nPlease restart the 1. MCB may be abnormal
system. If this issue persists, 2. Mother Board may be
0103800 Warning Collimator is Collimator not calibrated. Iris 1. Calibrate collimator
not calibrated. and leaves can’t be
manipulated.\nPlease call
service to calibrate the
collimator.
0104001 Warning DC is Error Generator power exception. 1. DC Bus Fuse maybe
Exposure is disabled.\nPlease broken.
restart the system. If this issue 2. IGBT assembly kit issue
6-7

(In system Log)
0104002 Warning IGBT is error Generator power exception. 1. IGBT drive cable maybe
Exposure is disabled.\nPlease disconnected.
restart the system. If this issue 2. HV drive transformer may
persists, please call for service. be abnormal. Check the
IGBT driver transformer
output voltage at kV control
board on the capacitor C98,
C99, C100, C101 or other
components connected
capacitor, voltage is 24VDC
+/-1V.
3. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
0104003 Warning KV is high than Generator exception. Exposure KV need be calibrated
120KV is disabled.\nPlease restart the
0104004 Warning KV is lower than Generator exception. Exposure 1. Security line maybe
35kv is disabled.\nPlease restart the disconnected.
system. If this issue persists, 2. KV need be calibrated.
please call for service. 3. KV return cable
disconnects.
4. Cables connected
Monoblock maybe
disconnect.
5. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
0104005 Warning KV is unbalance Execution exception.\nPlease 1. One of KV return cable
restart the system. If this issue maybe disconnects.
persists, please call for service. 2. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
0105001 Warning Filament is over Execution exception.\nPlease 1. 24V (F6) fuse for FDB may
current by HW restart the system. If this issue be broken.
monitor persists, please call for service. 2. FDB may be broken.
3. Filament drive cables are
may be short circuited.
4. Tube insert of Monoblock
may be abnormal.
0105002 Warning Inverter is over Execution exception.\nPlease 1. -15V (F5) fuse for FDB
current restart the system. If this issue burnout
persists, please call for service. 2. Monoblock may be
abnormal.
0105003 Warning Filament is over Execution exception.\nPlease 1. FDB may be Broken
current by SW restart the system. If this issue 2. -15V (F5) fuse for FDB
monitor persists, please call for service. burnout.
3. Filament drive cables are
6-8
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
short circuited.
4 MCB may be broken
5. Tube insert of Monoblock
breaks.
0106001 Warning 6954 chip Control Panel exception. 1. MAX6954 chip of Display
verification is Exposure is disabled.\nPlease Board may be abnormal
failed: The restart the system. If this issue 2. Maybe connection issue
written value is persists, please call for service. in Cable between Display
not same with Board and Mother board
the read back 3. Power supply may be
value abnormal
4. MCB SPI channel may be
abnormal
0106002 Warning 7301 chip Control Panel exception. 1. 7301 chip of Display
verification is Exposure is disabled.\nPlease Board may be abnormal.
failed: The restart the system. If this issue 2. Maybe connection issue
written value is persists, please call for service. in Cable between DB and
not same with Mothor board
the read back 3. Power supply may be
value abnormal
4. Maybe MCB SPI channel
may be abnormal.
0106003 Warning 6954 channel Control Panel exception. 1. MCB may be abnormal
of SPI bus TX is Exposure is disabled.\nPlease 2. Motherboard and Display
time out restart the system. If this issue Board cable connection
persists, please call for service. may be abnormal
3. DB may be abnormal
0106004 Warning 6954 channel Control Panel exception. MCB SPI write to Display
of SPI bus RX is Exposure is disabled.\nPlease Board (Nixie tube
time out restart the system. If this issue ) time out:
persists, please call for service. 1. MCB may be abnormal
2. Motherboard and Display
Board cable connection
may be abnormal
0106005 Warning 7301 channel Control Panel exception. MCB SPI write to Display
of SPI bus TX is Exposure is disabled.\nPlease Board (Nixie tube
time out restart the system. If this issue ) time out:
Board cable connection
may be abnormal
6-9

(In system Log)
0106006 Warning 7301 channel Control Panel exception. MCB SPI writes to Display
of SPI bus RX is Exposure is disabled.\nPlease Board (Function LED) time
time out restart the system. If this issue out
Board cable connetction
may be abnormal
0107001 Warning Left hand Left hand switch stuck. N/A
switch is stuck Exposure is disabled.\nPlease
since safe line check the left handswitch and
error restart the system. If this issue
0107002 Warning Right hand Right hand switch stuck. N/A
since safe line check the right hand switch
error and restart the system. If this
issue persists, please call for
service.
0107800 Warning During bootup , Left hand switch pressed N/A
left hand switch during boot up. Please release
is pressed the left hand switch.
0107801 Warning During bootup , Right hand switch pressed N/A

right hand during boot up. Please release
switch is the right hand switch.
pressed
0108001 Warning Left foot switch Left foot switch stuck. N/A
is stuck since Exposure is disabled.\nPlease
safe line error check the left foot switch and
restart the system. If this issue
0108002 Warning Right foot Right foot switch stuck. N/A
since safe line check the left foot switch and
error restart the system. If this issue
0108800 Warning During bootup , Left foot switch pressed during N/A
left foot switch boot up. Please release the left
is pressed foot switch.
0108801 Warning During bootup , Right foot switch pressed N/A

right foot during boot up. Please release
switch is the right foot switch.
pressed
6-10
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0109800 Warning Key switch is Key Switch in Xray Off. N/A
rotated to "X- Exposure is disabled.\nTo
ray Off" position enable exposure, please turn it
to On.
0109801 Warning Key switch is Keyswitch in Off. Exposure and N/A
rotated to "Off" lift column motion are
position disabled.\nTo enable exposure
or lift column motion, please
turn it to On.
0110800 Warning Emergency Emergency switch pressed. N/A
switch is Exposure and lift column
pressed motion are disabled.\nTo
enable exposure or lift column
motion, please release the
switch.
0112500 Warning DAP event Mainframe buffer overflow. The 1. Don't follow calibration
buffer overflow mainframe stopped.\nPlease procedure to perform
restart the system. If this issue calibration. (Reboot system
persists, please call for service. and Login Serivice Interface,
directly perform collimator
calibration to resolve this
problem.)
0112501 Warning DAP parameter Mainframe buffer overflow. The 1. Don't follow calibration
buffer overflow mainframe stopped.\nPlease procedure to perform
restart the system. If this issue calibration. (Reboot system
persists, please call for service. and Login Service Interface,
directly perform collimator
calibration to resolve this
problem.)
0112800 Warning DAP is not Dose not calibrated for the
calibrated tube without filter
without filter option.\nPlease call service to
calibrate dose.
0112801 Warning DAP is not Dose not calibrated for the
calibrated with tube with filter option.\nPlease
filter call service to calibrate dose.
0113002 Warning WKS UART Communication exception. The MCB serial port writes to
write fault mainframe stopped.\nPlease WKS fault.
restart the system. If this issue 1. MCB may be abnormal.
persists, please call for service. 2. Motherboard may be
abnormal.
3. Cable connection may be
abnormal
6-11

(In system Log)
0113500 Warning Mainframe Communication protocol 1. WKS and MF version may
comservo exception. The mainframe be not compatible.
protocol is stopped.\nPlease call for
incompatible service.
with WKS
comservo
protocol
0113501 Warning RCC time out Communication exception. The Serial communication
mainframe stopped.\nPlease between WKS and MF
restart the system. If this issue failure:
persists, please call for service. 1.Bundle cable may be
abnormal.
2. Cable connection
between WKS computer
serial port and
motherboard may be
abnormal.
3. WKS computer serial port
may be abnormal.
0113502 Warning WKS message Communication exception. The 1.MCB may be abnormal
buffer overflow mainframe stopped.\nPlease
0113503 Warning sendMessage Communication exception. The Serial communication
from MF to mainframe stopped.\nPlease between WKS and MF
WKS time out restart the system. If this issue failure:
persists, please call for service. 1.Bundle cable may be
abnormal.
2. Cable connection
between WKS computer
serial port and
motherboard may be
abnormal.
3. WKS computer serial port
may be abnormal.
0113504 Warning RCC-UART Tx Communication exception. The 1. MCB may be abnormal
buffer overflow mainframe stopped.\nPlease
0113505 Warning Mainframe not Communication exception. The (Just displayed on MF
finds WKS in 4 mainframe stopped.\nPlease control panel) Serial port
minutes after restart the system. If this issue communication failure
system boot up persists, please call for service. between WKS and MF.
1. Mainframe Control Board
may be abnormal
2. Power Distribution Unite
6-12
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
may be abnormal. It can’t
report power on status of
Mainframe.
3. Bundle cable may be
abnormal
4.WKS computer serial port
connection may be
abnormal
5.WKS computer serial port
may be abnormal.
6.Mother Board serial port
connection may be
abnormal
7.WKS boot up failure
0113506 Warning Ping time out Can’t detect the workstation. MF receive Ping frame time
The mainframe interval more than 2s
stopped.\nPlease restart the 1.WKS software may be
system. If this issue persists, abnormal.
0114001 Warning Camera serial Camera control exception. The 1.MCB may be abnormal
port UART write mainframe stopped.\nPlease
fault restart the system. If this issue
0114500 Warning Camera serial Camera control exception. The 1.MCB may be abnormal
port mainframe stopped.\nPlease
transmission restart the system. If this issue
buffer overflow persists, please call for service.
0114501 Warning Camera serial Camera control exception. The Communication between
port RCC time mainframe stopped.\nPlease MCB and camera failure
out restart the system. If this issue 1.MCB may be abnormal
persists, please call for service. 2.Camera may be abnormal
3.Motherboard may be
abnormal
4.Bundle cable may be
abnormal
0114502 Warning Camera serial Camera control exception. The Camera communication
port mainframe stopped.\nPlease protocol issue
unexpected restart the system. If this issue 1.Camera may be
data error persists, please call for service. abnormal.
0115001 Warning Flash erase Calibration data save Flash erase fault during
fault during exception. The mainframe calibration
calibration stopped.\nPlease restart the 1.MCB
6-13

(In system Log)
0115002 Warning Flash erase Calibration data save 1.MCB may be abnormal
fault when exception. The mainframe
saving product stopped.\nPlease restart the
information system. If this issue persists,
0115003 Warning Flash write fault Calibration data save 1.MCB may be abnormal
during MA exception. The mainframe
calibration stopped.\nPlease restart the
0115004 Warning Flash write fault Calibration data save 1.MCB may be abnormal
during beam exception. The mainframe
alignment stopped.\nPlease restart the
0115005 Warning Flash erase Calibration data save 1.MCB may be abnormal
fault during exception. The mainframe
Collimator stopped.\nPlease restart the
calibration system. If this issue persists,
0115006 Warning Flash write fault Calibration data save Flash write fault during DAP
during DAP exception. The mainframe calibration
calibration stopped.\nPlease restart the 1.MCB may be abnormal
0117001 Warning KV is not System execution Redo KV calibration
accurate exception.\nPlease try again. If
this issue persists, please call
for service.
0117002 Warning MA is not System execution Redo mA calibration
accurate exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.
0117003 Warning MA is very low System execution Redo mA calibration
(<0.05ma) exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.
0117004 Warning MA is very System execution Redo mA calibration
high(>23.5ma) exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.
0117005 Warning KV feedback Execution exception.\nPlease 1.MCB may be abnormal
channel SPI is restart the system. If this issue
abnormal persists, please call for service.
6-14
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0117006 Warning MA feedback Execution exception.\nPlease 1.MCB may be abnormal
channel SPI is restart the system. If this issue
abnormal persists, please call for service.
0117007 Warning Little MA Execution exception.\nPlease 1.MCB may be abnormal

feedback restart the system. If this issue
channel SPI is persists, please call for service.
abnormal
channel SPI Tx restart the system. If this issue
time out persists, please call for service.
channel SPI Rx restart the system. If this issue
time out persists, please call for service.
0117010 Warning Preheat MA Execution exception.\nPlease 1.MCB may be abnormal
channel SPI Tx persists, please call for service.
time out
0117011 Warning Preheat MA Execution exception.\nPlease 1.MCB may be abnormal
channel SPI Rx persists, please call for service.
time out
channel SPI Tx persists, please call for service.
time out
channel SPI Rx persists, please call for service.
time out
0117014 Warning MAS output is Execution exception.\nPlease 1. MCB maybe abnormal
over limit restart the system. If this issue 2.mA feedback is abnormal,
persists, please call for service. recheck mA accuracy.
0117800 Warning Preheat MA is System execution N/A

not calibrated exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.
0118001 Warning Xray leakage is Execution exception.\nPlease Maybe Monoblock
detected when restart the system. If this issue grounding issue.
there is no persists, please call for service.
exposure
0118800 Warning Exposure is Room door open. Exposure is N/A
disabled disabled.\nPlease close the
because the door to enable exposure.
room door is
6-15

(In system Log)
opened
0118801 Warning Exposure is Limit of maximum 9'30" for one N/A

automatically shot reached. Exposure is
terminated as terminated.
the limit of
9'30" for one
shot is reached
0118802 Warning Accumulated Accumulated fluoro time N/A
exposure longer than 99.9 minutes. This
display time is exceeds mainframe fluoro time
longer than display capacity.\nPlease press
99.9 minutes. and hold Alarm key to reset the
Mainframe accumulated exposure time.
can’t display
rightly
accumulated
exposure time.
0118803 Warning 9'30" exposure Limit of maximum 9'30" for one N/A
time limit will shot will be reached in 30s.
be reached in Exposure will be terminated
30" then.
0119500 Warning Priority II Mainframe buffer overflow. The MCU abnormal, MCB may
message buffer mainframe stopped.\nPlease be abnormal.
overflow restart the system. If this issue
STOP0032 Warning WKS error Just display on Mainframe There is calibration data in
768 before MF boot Control Panel MCB, but WKS didn't
up configure product model
Imaging
0205501 Error Allocate Run out of memory.\nPlease Check memory using state
memory failed restart the system. If this issue
0205502 Error Allocate shared Memory exception.\nPlease Check if there exists some
memory restart the system. If this issue unwanted share memory in
segment failed persists, please call for service. the system, or check if
software is installed
correctly.
0205503 Error Attach shared Memory exception.\nPlease Check if there exists some
memory restart the system. If this issue unwanted share memory in
segment failed persists, please call for service. the system, or check if
software is installed
correctly.
6-16
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0205504 Error Initialize and Semaphore exception.\nPlease Check if there exists some
open a named restart the system. If this issue unwanted semaphore in
semaphore persists, please call for service. the system, or check if
failed software is installed
correctly.
0205505 Error Post a Semaphore exception.\nPlease Check if the semaphore is
semaphore restart the system. If this issue valid, or check if the
failed persists, please call for service. maximum allowable value
for the semaphore will be
exceeded.
0205506 Warning FIFO is full Image FIFO full. The mainframe Check CPU affairenite and
stopped.\nPlease restart the thread priority. Complied
system. If this issue persists, SW version (Debug or
please call for service. Release)
0205507 Warning Load IP IP configuration exception. Check if IP configuration file
configuration Image quality may be crashed
file failed affected.\nPlease restart the
0205508 Warning Load setup Setup configuration exception. Check if Setup configuration
configuration Some system setting may be file crashed
file failed missed.\nPlease restart the
0205509 Error Init critical Execution exception.\nPlease System unknown error
section failed restart the system. If this issue
0205510 Error Lock critical Execution exception.\nPlease System unknown error
0205511 Error Unlock critical Execution exception.\nPlease System unknown error
0205512 Warning Init Xkey lock Image processing LEDs on Check system IO state and
failed keyboard display exception. keyboard connection
The display may be
abnormal.\n Please ensure no
key is pressed on keyboard,
then press “Auto B/C” key and
“Negate” key. If this issue
0205513 Warning Set Xkey lock Image processing LEDs on Check system IO state, and
failed keyboard display exception. keyboard connection
The display may be
abnormal.\n Please ensure no
key is pressed on keyboard,
6-17

(In system Log)
then press “Auto B/C” key and
“Negate” key. If this issue
0205514 Error Create thread Execution thread System unknown error

failed exception.\nPlease restart the
0205515 Error Start thread Execution thread System unknown error
0205517 Error Register CORBA Workstation communication Make sure if omniNames
servant failed exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
system. If this issue persists, initialization failed
0205518 Error Register CORBA Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
sync notify exception.\nPlease restart the service failed,
servant failed system. If this issue persists, CorbaEventChannel
please call for service. initialization failed
0205519 Warning Unregister Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
CORBA servant closing exception.\nPlease service failed, check
failed restart the system. If this issue omniOrb log file
0205520 Error Subscribe sync Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
event failed exception.\nPlease restart the service failed,
system. If this issue persists, CorbaEventChannel
0205521 Error Unsubscribe Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
sync event exception.\nPlease restart the service failed,
failed system. If this issue persists, CorbaEventChannel
0205522 Error Resolve CORBA Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
object in name exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
service failed system. If this issue persists, crashed
0205523 Error Invoke CORBA Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
interface failed exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
system. If this issue persists, crashed
0205524 Warning Read IQ param Image processing parameter check IQ config file
failed, the value over limit. Image quality may
is over limit be affected.\nPlease restart
the system. If this issue
6-18
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0205525 Warning Write IQ Image processing parameter check IQ config file
parameters save failure. Image quality may
failed be affected.\nPlease restart
0201501 Warning Start callback Image acquisition exception. Start capture failed.
failure System can’t take exposure. 1. Gige camera may be
The mainframe abnormal
stopped.\nPlease restart the 2. If LED on ethnet interface
system. If this issue persists, is not flicker, please infix the
please call for service. net line into ethnet interface
again or change another
net line.
3. If all above methods can’t
fix the exception, please re-
install software.
0201502 Warning End callback Image acquisition exception. End capture failed.
failure System can’t take exposure. 1. Gige camera may be
The mainframe abnormal
stopped.\nPlease restart the 2. If LED on ethnet interface
system. If this issue persists, is not flicker, please infix the
please call for service. net line into ethnet interface
net line.
install software.
0201503 Warning Init camera Image acquisition exception. End capture failed.
buffer failed System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
The mainframe working correctly, please
stopped.\nPlease restart the change camera.
system. If this issue persists, 2. If LED on ethnet interface
please call for service. is not flicker, please infix the
net line into ethnet interface
net line.
install software.
0201504 Warning Open camera Image acquisition exception. End capture failed.
failed System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
6-19

(In system Log)
net line.
install software.
0201505 Warning Load driver Camera driver exception. End capture failed.
configuration System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
file failed The mainframe working correctly, please
net line.
install software.
0201506 Warning Get driver Camera driver exception. End capture failed.
thread failed System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
net line.
install software.
0201507 Warning Set capture Image acquisition exception. End capture failed.
thread priority System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
failed The mainframe working correctly, please
net line.
install software.
0201508 Warning Set capture Image acquisition exception. End capture failed.
thread CPU System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
affinity failed The mainframe working correctly, please
6-20
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
net line.
install software.
0201509 Warning Camera Camera disconnected. System End capture failed.
network lost can’t start exposure. The 1. If Gige camera is not
mainframe stopped.\nPlease working correctly, please
restart the system. If this issue change camera.
persists, please call for service. 2. If LED on ethnet interface
is not flicker, please infix the
net line.
install software.
0201510 Warning Init camera Image acquisition exception. End capture failed.
callback failed System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
net line.
install software.
0201511 Warning Camera Camera disconnected. System Check network connect; re-
callback time can’t start exposure. The install software.
out mainframe stopped.\nPlease
0202501 Error Allocate Image acquisition exception. End capture failed.
memory failed System can’t take exposure. 1. If Gige camera is not
net line.
6-21

(In system Log)
install software.
0202502 Warning Read shading Shading parameter loading Template file are not
template failed failure. Image quality may be deployed corrected.
impacted.\nPlease restart the
0202503 Warning Write shading Shading parameter saves Disk is full or directory has
template failed exception. The parameter was no permission to write.
not saved.\nPlease re-calibrate
shading.
0202504 Warning Load shading Load shading calibration data
calibration failure. Image quality may be
failure affected.\nPlease restart the
0203501 Error Allocate Run out of memory.\nPlease Check memory using state
0204501 Error Open XDisplay Failed to find the display make sure monitor
failed device. Images can’t be connection, if display driver
displayed.\nPlease restart the installed correctly
0204502 Error Create display Display driver exception. Image make sure display driver
context failed can’t be displayed.\nPlease installed correctly
0204503 Error Create display Display driver exception. Image make sure display driver
window failed can’t be displayed.\nPlease installed correctly
0204505 Warning Load font Font not installed correctly. make sure Torch font
resource failed Text on left monitor may be installed correctly
abnormal.\nPlease restart the
0204506 Warning Load icon file System Icon files loading check if icon file crashed
failed failure. Some icons may be
missed.\nPlease restart the
0204507 Error Allocate Run out of memory.\nPlease check memory using state
6-22
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
Application
0306501 Warning Load Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
connectivity loading failure. Some 2. If not work, re-install
XML failed configuration may be Workstation software.
0306502 Warning Get text Get text resource failure. 1. Restart the system.
resource failed Application display may be 2. If not work, re-install
abnormal.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0306503 Warning Enconter Undefined exception.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.
undefined restart the system. If this issue 2. If not work, re-install
exception persists, please call for service. Workstation software.
3. If not work, re-install OS.
0306504 Warning Init Abandon Reason loading 1. Restart the system.
AbandonReaso failure. Abandon Exam 2. If not work, re-install
n.xml file failed function will be Workstation software.
0306505 Warning Load abandon Abandon Reason loading 1. Restart the system.
reason list failure. Abandon Exam 2. If not work, re-install
failed function will be Workstation software.
0306506 Warning Load DICOM Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
printer list loading failure. DICOM printer 2. If not work, re-install
failed list missed.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0306507 Warning Load setup Setup configuration loading 1. Restart the system.
configuration failure. Some setting may be 2. If not work, re-install
file failed missed.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0306508 Warning Load exam list Setup configuration loading
option failed failure. Exam list display setting
6-23

(In system Log)
0306509 Warning Load default Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.

MPPS server loading failure. Default MPPS 2. If not work, re-install
failed server setting missed.\nPlease Workstation software.
0306510 Warning Load DICOM Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
storage server loading failure. Storage server 2. If not work, re-install
failed setting missed.\nPlease restart Workstation software.
0306511 Warning Read local AE Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
title failed loading failure. Local AE title 2. If not work, re-install
missed.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0306513 Warning Read MWL Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
server list failed loading failure. Worklist server 2. If not work, re-install
list missed.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0306514 Warning Read MWL Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
server query loading failure. Worklist query 2. If not work, re-install
filter failed filter setting missed.\nPlease Workstation software.
0306515 Warning Load dose Dose summary icon loading 1. Restart the system.
summary icon failure. Display may be 2. If not work, re-install
failed abnormal.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0306516 Error ImageDirectory Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
module register exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
OSGI service system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
exception please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0306517 Error Call Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
DatabaseMana exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
gement service system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
failed please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
6-24
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
ImageStorage exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
service failed system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
CurrentExam exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
service failed system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
MediaManage exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
ment service system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0306521 Error Subscribe event Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
failed exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0306522 Error Bind name Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
service object exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
failed system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0306523 Warning Failed to load Exposure configuration loading 1. Restart the system.
Exposure config exception. Some configuration 2. If not work, re-install
file may be missed.\nPlease Workstation software.
restart the system. If this issue 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0306524 Warning Get dose Get Dose summary modality 1. Restart the system.
summary setting failed.\nPlease restart 2. If not work, re-install
modality type the system. If this issue Workstation software.
failed persists, please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0306525 Warning Setup CD/DVD Import images from CD/DVD 1. Restart the system.
for importing exception.\nPlease try again. If 2. If not work, re-install
image failed this issue persists, please call Workstation software.
for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0306026 Warning Get string failed Loading message fail.\nPlease
0306527 Error ImageDirectory Workstation communication

module get exception.\nPlease restart the
OSGI service system. If this issue persists,
exception please call for service.
6-25

(In system Log)
0306528 Warning Stop Close ImageDirectory
application exception.\nPlease restart the
exception system. If this issue persists,
0306529 Error ImageDirectory Workstation communication
module exception.\nPlease restart the
unregister OSGI system. If this issue persists,
service please call for service.
exception
0304501 Warning Start exam Open Exam Management
exception failure.\nPlease restart the
0304510 Warning Init Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
XmlFileParseUtil loading failure. Some 2. If not work, re-install
ity for configuration may be Workstation software.
ConnectivitySet missed.\nPlease restart the 3. If not work, re-install OS.
up.xml failed system. If this issue persists,
0304511 Warning Set current Set current exam 1. Restart the system.
exam to failure.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
Imaging Engine system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0304512 Warning Delete image Delete exam 1. Restart the system.
by exam tco exception.\nPlease try again. If 2. If not work, re-install
failed this issue persists, please call Workstation software.
for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
system. If this issue persists, 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0304514 Warning Load Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
connectivity loading failure. Some 2. If not work, re-install
configuration configuration may be Workstation software.
file fail missed.\nPlease restart the 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0304516 Warning Load default Connectivity configuration file 1. Restart the system.
storage server loading exception. Default 2. If not work, re-install
failed storage server setting is Workstation software.
missed.\nPlease restart the 3. If not work, re-install OS.
6-26
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0304517 Warning Init exam list Setup configuration loading

option failed failure. Exam list display setting
0304518 Warning Init height & Setup configuration loading 1. Restart the system.
weight unit failure. Weight/Height units 2. If not work, re-install
failed missed.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0304519 Warning Init default Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
MPPS server loading failure. Default MPPS 2. If not work, re-install
failed server setting missed.\nPlease Workstation software.
restart the system. If this issue 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0304520 Warning Init MWL server Connectivity configuration 1. Restart the system.
list failed loading failure. Worklist server 2. If not work, re-install
list missed.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
0304521 Warning Load anatomic Anatomic Regions list 1. Restart the system.
region missed.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
configuration system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
file failed please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0304523 Warning Init date & time Setup configuration loading
format failed failure. Date/Time format
setting missed.\nPlease restart
0304525 Warning Stop Stop ExamManagement

ExamManagem failed.\nPlease restart the
ent failed system. If this issue persists,
6-27

(In system Log)
0304526 Error ExamManagem Workstation communication
ent module exception.\nPlease restart the
register OSGI system. If this issue persists,
exception
ent module get exception.\nPlease restart the
ent module exception.\nPlease restart the
exception
0304529 Warning Stop Close ExamManagement
0312501 Warning Encounter Undefined exception.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.
0312502 Error Get system Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
engine servant exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0312503 Error Subscribe event Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
failed exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0312504 Error MiniImageDirec Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
tory module exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
register CORBA system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
servant please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
exception
0312505 Error Unsubscribe Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
sync event exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
6-28
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0312506 Error Subscribe Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
CORBA event exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0312507 Error Unsubscribe Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
CORBA event exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0312508 Warning MiniImageDirec Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
tory module get exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0312509 Warning Get image Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
management exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
servant failed system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0312510 Error MiniImageDirec Workstation communication
tory module exception.\nPlease restart the
exception
exception
unregister system. If this issue persists,
CORBA servant please call for service.
exception
0301501 Warning Get image and Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
overlay from IE exception. Can’t get image and 2. If not work, re-install
failed overlay from the left Workstation software.
monitor.\nPlease restart the
0301502 Warning Set annotation Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
to IE failed exception. Can’t set annotation 2. If not work, re-install
data to the left Workstation software.
6-29

(In system Log)
0301503 Warning Set crop to IE Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.

failed exception. Can’t set crop to the 2. If not work, re-install
left monitor.\nPlease restart Workstation software.
0301504 Error Annotation Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
servant system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
module exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
subscribe sync system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
event exception please call for service.
unsubscribe system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
sync event please call for service.
exception
unregister system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
servant please call for service.
exception
0301508 Warning Init annotation Annotation init 1. Restart the system.
controller failed exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0301509 Warning Parse image or Parse image or overlay 1. Restart the system.
overlay data exception. Can’t display the 2. If not work, re-install
failed image or overlay.\nPlease Workstation software.
0301510 Warning Stop Close Annotation 1. Restart the system.
application exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
exception system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
6-30
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0301511 Warning Start Open Annotation
0301512 Warning Stop Close Annotation
0301513 Error Annotation Workstation communication
overlay from IE exception. Can’t get image and 2. If not work, re-install
failed overlay from the left Workstation software.
0307502 Warning Get Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
measurement exception. Can’t get 2. If not work, re-install
information measurement parameters Workstation software.
from IE failed from the left monitor.\nPlease
0307503 Warning Set Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
measurement exception. Can’t set 2. If not work, re-install
to IE failed measurement data to the left Workstation software.
0307504 Warning Set Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
measurement exception. Can’t set 2. If not work, re-install
unit to IE failed measurement unit to the left Workstation software.
0307505 Warning Set calibration Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
to IE failed exception. Can’t set 2. If not work, re-install
measurement calibration data Workstation software.
to the left monitor.\nPlease
6-31

(In system Log)
0307506 Warning Do calibration Calibration exception.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.
exception try again. If this issue persists, 2. If not work, re-install
please call for service. Workstation software.
0307507 Error Measurement Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.

exception
exception
0307511 Warning Init Measurement init 1. Restart the system.
measurement exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
controller failed system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0307512 Warning Parse image or Parse image or overlay 1. Restart the system.
overlay exception. Can’t display the 2. If not work, re-install
exception image or overlay.\nPlease Workstation software.
0307513 Warning Stop bundle Close Measurement 1. Restart the system.
exception exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0307514 Warning Start Open Measurement
measurement exception.\nPlease restart the
6-32
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0307515 Warning Stop Close Measurement
measurement exception.\nPlease restart the
0307517 Warning Get resource Loading message fail.\nPlease

bundle failed restart the system. If this issue
0307518 Error Measurement Workstation communication

0307519 Warning Stop Close Measurement
zoom exception. Can’t get image and 2. If not work, re-install
information zoom roam data from the left Workstation software.
from IE failed monitor.\nPlease restart the
0310502 Warning Set zoom to IE Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
failed exception. Can’t set zoom 2. If not work, re-install
roam data to the left Workstation software.
0310503 Error ZoomRoam Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
6-33

(In system Log)
exception
0310506 Warning ZoomRoam Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.
exception
0310507 Warning Init zoom Zoom Roam init 1. Restart the system.
controller exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0310508 Warning Parse data Parse Zoom Roam data 1. Restart the system.
exception exception. Display may be 2. If not work, re-install
0310509 Warning Stop Close Zoom Roam 1. Restart the system.
application exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0310510 Warning Start Open Zoom Roam
zoomroam exception.\nPlease restart the
0310511 Warning Stop zoomroam Close Zoom Roam
exception exception.\nPlease restart the
0310513 Error ZoomRoam Workstation communication

6-34
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0311501 Warning Read Configuration loading Re install software or import

configuration failure.\nPlease restart the configure file
file failed system.
0311502 Warning Write Configuration save failure. Re install software or import

configuration Some configuration may be configure file
file failed lost.\nPlease restart the
system.
0311503 Error Administration Workstation communication Re install software
module register exception.\nPlease restart the
servant system.
exception
0311504 Error CORBA Workstation communication Re install software
communication exception.\nPlease restart the
failed system.

subscribe sync system.
event exception
0311507 Error Thread Execution exception.\nPlease Re install software
operation failed restart the system.

OSGI service system.
exception
0311509 Error OSGI Workstation communication Re install software
failed system.
0311510 Error Get authority Load account data Re install software

failed failure.\nPlease restart the
system.
6-35

(In system Log)
0311511 Warning Get filter status Can’t get the filter option's Re install software
failed status.\nPlease restart the
system.
0311512 Warning Get mainframe Can’t get the mainframe Re install software
status failed connection status.\nPlease
restart the system.
0311514 Error Register CORBA Workstation communication Re install software

notify failed exception.\nPlease restart the
system.
0311519 Warning File operation File operation Re install software

exception exception.\nPlease retry. If this
issue persists, please restart
the system.
0311520 Warning Execute System execution Re install software
command exception.\nPlease try again. If
failed this issue persists, please call
for service.
0311521 Warning Delete image Delete image from database Re install software
from database failure.\nPlease restart the
failed system.
0311522 Warning Check license Check product license Re install software

system.
0311523 Warning Set product Configure product failure. The Re install software
name failed product configuration will not
be saved.\nPlease restart the
system.
0311524 Warning Export Export configuration file Re install software
configuration failure.\nPlease check if the
file failed USB disk is writable and has
enough space, or change a
disk.
0311525 Warning Import Import configuration file Re install software
configuration failure.\nPlease restart the
file failed system.
6-36
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0311526 Warning Export log files Export log files failure.\nPlease Re install software
failed check if the USB disk is writable
and has enough space, or
change a disk.
0311528 Warning Delete option Delete option failure.\nPlease Re install software
failed retry. If this issue persistes,
please restart the system.
0311530 Warning Import license Import license file Re install software

file failed failure.\nPlease retry. If this
issue persists, please change a
USB disk.
0311531 Warning Export license Export license file Re install software
file failed failure.\nPlease check if the
USB disk is writable and has
enough space, or change a
disk.
0311532 Warning Read log failed Open log failure.\nPlease retry. Re install software
If this issue persists, restart the
system.
0311534 Warning Copy file failed Copy file failure.\nPlease retry. Re install software
If this issue persists, please
restart the system.
0311535 Warning Boot up Open terminal failure.\nPlease Re install software
terminal failed restart the system.
0311536 Warning Get un-finalized Search unfinalized image Re install software
image failed failure.\nPlease restart the
system.
0311537 Warning Perform Calibration failure.\nPlease Re install software
calibration retry. If this issue persists,
failed please call for service.
0311539 Warning Calculated Dose or DAP coefficient
Dose or DAP calculation exception. Please
coefficient retry. If this issue persists,
failed please restart the system.
0311540 Warning Compress Compress file failure.\nPlease
folder failed retry. If this issue persists,
please restart the system.
6-37

(In system Log)

0311543 Error Administration Workstation communication

exception
exception
unsubscribe system. If this issue persists,
exception
0309500 Warning Setup.xml does Setup configuration loading check if configuration file
not exist failure.\nPlease restart the crashed
0309501 Warning Setup Default Setup configuration check if default
Default.xml loading failure.\nPlease restart configuration file crashed
does not exist the system. If this issue
0309502 Warning ConnectivitySet Connectivity configuration check if Dicom
up.xml is not loading failure. Please restart configuration file crashed
exist the system. If this issue
6-38
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0309503 Warning ConnectivitySet Default connectivity check if default Dicom
upDefault.xml is configuration loading configuration file crashed
not exist failure.\nPlease restart the
0309504 Warning Administration. Administration configuration check if admin
xml is not exist loading failure.\nPlease restart configuration file crashed
0309505 Warning ExposureContro Exposure control configuration check if exposure
l.xml is not exist file loading failure.\nPlease configuration file crashed
0309506 Warning SwBuild.xml is Software version access 1. Restart the system.
not exist failure.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0309507 Warning SerialNumber.x Serial number access 1. Restart the system.
ml is not exist failure.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0309508 Warning Start setup Open Setup exception.\nPlease system unknown error
exception restart the system. If this issue
0309509 Warning Stop setup Close Setup exception.\nPlease system unknown error
exception restart the system. If this issue
0309510 Warning Read Connectivity configuration check if configuration file

configuration loading failure.\nPlease restart crashed
file failed the system. If this issue
0309511 Warning Init tab page Runtime exception.\nPlease system unknown error
controller failed restart the system. If this issue
0309512 Warning Read serial Workstation hardware version 1. Restart the system.
number from access exception. Hardware 2. If not work, re-install
bios failed information can’t be Workstation software.
displayed.\nPlease restart the
6-39

(In system Log)
0309513 Error Register CORBA Workstation communication make sure if omniNames

service failed exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
system. If this issue persists, initialization failed
0309514 Error Unregister Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
CORBA service exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, check
failed system. If this issue persists, omniOrb log file
0309515 Error CORBA sync Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
notify failed exception.\nPlease restart the service failed,
0309516 Error Subscribe sync Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
event failed exception.\nPlease restart the service failed,
sync event exception.\nPlease restart the service failed,
0309518 Error CORBA async Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
notify failed exception.\nPlease restart the and notifd service failed,
0309519 Error Subscribe Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
async event exception.\nPlease restart the and notifd service failed,
async event exception.\nPlease restart the and notifd service failed,
0309521 Error CORBA Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
communication exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
failed system. If this issue persists, crashed
6-40
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0309522 Warning Parse Configuraiton loading check if configuration file
configuration exception. Some configuration (Admin/Exposure
file failed may be missed.\nPlease contorl..)crashed
0309523 Warning Export Export configuration system unknown error
configuration failure.\nPlease check if the
file failed, no USB disk is writable and has
enough space enough space, or change a
or no disk.
permission
0309524 Warning Export log file Export log files failure.\nPlease system unknown error
failed, no check if the USB disk is writable
enough space and has enough space, or
or no change a disk.
permission
0309525 Warning Create folder Export log files IO error or disk error
failed, no exception.\nPlease retry. If this
enough space issue persists, please restart
or no the system.
permission
0309526 Warning Delete folder Operation exception.\nPlease IO error or disk error
failed retry. If this issues, please
restart the system.
0309527 Warning Network Network monitoring

change failed exception.\nPlease restart the
0309528 Warning Execute Ping Ping failed.\nPlease check
failed network setting and ensure
network available. And retry.
0309529 Warning Compress Export log failure.\nPlease

Folder for Log retry. If this issue persists,
Export failed please restart the system.

6-41

(In system Log)
0309532 Error Setup module Workstation communication

get OSGI exception.\nPlease restart the
service system. If this issue persists,
0309533 Warning Stop Close Setup exception.\nPlease
application restart the system. If this issue
exception persists, please call for service.
0309534 Warning Multi language Multi language package is not

package is not installed.\nPlease restart the
installed system. If this issue persists,
0309535 Warning Multi language Multi language package does
package does not support current language
not support setting.\nPlease restart the
current system. If this issue persists,
language please call for service.
setting
0308501 W Get string failed Loading message fail.\nPlease

0308503 Warning Set mode to Workstation communication

Mcb failed exception.\nPlease restart the
0308504 Error ModeSetup Workstation communication
6-42
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
exception
0308507 Warning Stop Close Modesetup
0313501 W Get string failed Loading message fail.\nPlease
0313503 Error QueryRetrieve Workstation communication
0313504 Warning Stop Close QueryRetrieve

Infrastructure
0406501 Error Application Application configuration 1. Restart the system.
configuration loading exception.\nPlease 2. If not work, re-install
file is empty restart the system. If this issue Workstation software.
persists, please call for service. Re-install workstation
software.
0406502 Error Start Application start 1. Restart the system.
application failed.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0406503 Warning Stop Application stop failed.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.
application restart the system. If this issue 2. If not work, re-install
failed persists, please call for service. Workstation software.
6-43

(In system Log)
0406504 Error Get bundle Module access failed.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.
failed restart the system. If this issue 2. If not work, re-install
persists, please call for service. Workstation software.
0406505 Error Desktop System start failed.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.

module Invoke restart the system. If this issue 2. If not work, re-install
corba service persists, please call for service. Workstation software.
exception 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0406506 Error Desktop Workstation communication 1. Restart the system.

0406507 Error Init locale UI locale exception.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.

property failed restart the system. If this issue 2. If not work, re-install
persists, please call for service. Workstation software.
0406509 Warning Activate screen Screen saver activiation 1. Restart the system.
saver failed failed.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0406510 Warning Simulate key Screen saver 1. Restart the system.

input failed exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
0406511 Warning Refresh screen Refresh screen saver 1. Restart the system.
0406512 Warning Load setup Setup configuration loading 1. Restart the system.
configuration exception. Some setup may be 2. If not work, re-install
file failed missed.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.
6-44
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0406513 Warning Write screen Screen saver configuration 1. Restart the system.
saver save failed. The screen saver 2. If not work, re-install
configuration configuration will be Workstation software.
file failed lost.\nPlease restart the 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0406514 Warning Load security Security configuration loading 1. Restart the system.
configuration exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
file failed system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0406515 Warning Update security Update security configuration 1. Restart the system.
configuration file failed. Some seeting may 2. If not work, re-install
file failed be lost.\nPlease restart the Workstation software.

servant please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
exception
event exception please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.

sync event please call for service. 3. If not work, re-install OS.
exception
0406521 Error Load Application configuration 1. Restart the system.
application loading exception.\nPlease 2. If not work, re-install
configuration restart the system. If this issue Workstation software.
file failed persists, please call for service.
0406522 Warning Load mode Mode Setup configuration 1. Restart the system.
setup loading exception.\nPlease 2. If not work, re-install
configuration restart the system. If this issue Workstation software.
6-45

(In system Log)
0406523 Error Desktop Workstation communicaiton 1. Restart the system.
module resolve exception.\nPlease restart the 2. If not work, re-install
object system. If this issue persists, Workstation software.
0406525 Warning OSGI Account encryption exception. 1. Restart the system.

encryption Account password can’t be 2. If not work, re-install
failed authenticated.\nPlease restart Workstation software.
the system. If this issue 3. If not work, re-install OS.
0406526 Warning Dose exceeds Dose exceeded the threshold.
customized
threshold
0406527 Warning Load Administration configuration 1. Restart the system.

administration loading exception. Some 2. If not work, re-install
configuration configuration may be Workstation software.
0406529 Warning Encounter Undefined exception.\nPlease 1. Restart the system.
0406531 Warning Restart screen Restart screen saver 1. Restart the system.
0406532 Warning Load Product configuration loading 1. Restart the system.
Product.xml exception.\nSome 2. If not work, re-install
failed configuration may be Workstation software.
0406534 Error Desktop Workstation communication
6-46
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0406535 Error Desktop Workstation communication
exception
0411501 Error Allocate System run out of Check memory using state
memory failed memory.\nPlease restart the
0411502 Error Allocate shared System shared memory There may exist some
memory exception.\nPlease restart the unwanted share memory in
segment failed system. If this issue persists, the system, or the caller
please call for service. have no permission.
0411503 Error Attach shared System shared memory Attaches the shared
memory exception.\nPlease restart the memory segment identified
segment failed system. If this issue persists, by shmid to the address
please call for service. space of the calling process
failed.
0411504 Error Init and open a Semaphore exception.\nPlease The open file numbers
named restart the system. If this issue limited by the system or the
semaphore persists, please call for service. process may be reached, or
failed the caller have no
permission.
0411505 Error Post a Semaphore exception.\nPlease Invalid semaphore or the
semaphore restart the system. If this issue maximum allowable value
failed persists, please call for service. for a semaphore would be
exceeded.
0411506 Error Init critical Critical section system unknown error

section failed exception.\nPlease restart the
0411507 Error Lock critical Critical section system unknown error

0411508 Error Unlock critical Critical section system unknown error

6-47

(In system Log)
0411510 Error Create thread Execution thread system unknown error
0411512 Warning Cancel thread Execution thread system unknown error

0411513 Warning Open image file Image file open File crashed or no
failed failure.\nPlease restart the permission
0411514 Warning Read data from Image file read failure.\nPlease File crashed or no
image file failed restart the system. If this issue permission
0411515 Warning Write image Image file write File crashed or no

data to file failure.\nPlease restart the permission
failed system. If this issue persists,
0411516 Warning Close image Image file close File crashed or no
file failed failure.\nPlease restart the permission
0411517 Warning Delete image Image file delete No permission
file failed failure.\nPlease restart the
0411518 Warning Create image Image file create No permission or no
file failed failure.\nPlease restart the enough space on disk
0411519 Warning Move image file Image file move File crashed or no
failed failure.\nPlease restart the permission
6-48
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0411520 Error IM module Workstation communicaiton make sure if omniNames
register servant exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
exception system. If this issue persists, initialization failed

unregister exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, check
servant system. If this issue persists, omniOrb log file
resolve object exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
exception system. If this issue persists, crashed
Invoke corba exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
service system. If this issue persists, crashed
0411529 Warning FIFO is full Image FIFO full. Image display Check CPU affairenite and
refreshing may be thread priority. Complied
slow.\nPlease restart the SW version (Debug or
system. If this issue persists, Release)
0411531 Warning Create System file operation file crashed or no
directory failed failed.\nPlease restart the permission
0411532 Error IM module Workstation communication
syncNotify exception.\nPlease restart the
event exception system. If this issue persists,
0411533 Error IM module Workstation communication
asyncNotify exception.\nPlease restart the
0411801 Warning System's image The image can’t be saved. remove some images
capacity reach Image storage capacity limit of
limit 100,000 images
reached.\nPlease delete
useless or out-of-date images
to make disk space for new
images.
6-49

(In system Log)
0411802 Warning Exam's image Image storage capacity limit of
capacity reach 9999 images for each exam
limit reached. No more images can
be saved under the
exam.\nPlease delete some
useless images if you want to
save new images of the exam.
0403501 Error DTR sets locale System start failure. Set locale
failed failed. Please restart the
0403502 Error DTR reports System start failed.\nPlease

ready failed restart the system. If this issue
0403503 Warning DTR parse Parse retrieved image

retrieved image failure.\nPlease try again. If this
failed issue persists, please call for
service.
0403504 Warning DTR gets exam Parse exam information of raw

information images failure.\nPlease try
failed again. If this issue persists,
0403505 Warning DTR creates Create DICOM RDSR

RDSR object failure.\nPlease try again. If this
failed issue persists, please call for
service.
0403506 Warning DTR creates Create DICOM file

DICOM file exception.\nPlease try again. If
setup failed this issue persists, please call
for service.

DICOM file start exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.
0403508 Warning DTR imports Import raw image

raw image exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.
6-50
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
raw image start exception.\nPlease try again. If
exception this issue persists, please call
for service.

process failed this issue persists, please call
for service.

for service.
0403513 Warning DTR creates Create DICOMDIR file

DICOMDIR exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.

for service.
DICOMDIR start exception.\nPlease try again. If
for service.
teardown this issue persists, please call
exception for service.
6-51

(In system Log)
0403519 Error DTR module Workstation communication
resolve object exception.\nPlease restart the

Invoke corba exception.\nPlease restart the

register servant exception.\nPlease restart the

unregister exception.\nPlease restart the
servant system. If this issue persists,
0405501 Warning SCU prints DICOM print failure.\nPlease Check DICM configuration.
image failed make sure the network and
DICOM printer configuration
are correct, and the printer is
available. And try again. If this
service.
0405502 Warning SCU performs Verify the DICOM server Check DICM configuration.
echo operation failure.\nPlease make sure the
failed network and DICOM server
configuration are correct, and
the server is available. And try
again. If this issue persists,
0405503 Warning SCU performs Report MPPS failure.\nPlease Check DICM configuration.
MPPS operation make sure the network and
failed MPPS server configuration are
correct, and the server is
service.
0405504 Warning SCU performs Worklist query failure.\nPlease Check DICM configuration.
MWL operation make sure the network and
failed worklist server configuration
are correct, and the server is
6-52
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
service.
0405505 Warning SCU performs DICOM query failure.\nPlease Check DICM configuration.
query operation make sure the network and
failed Q&R server configuration are
service.
0405506 Warning SCU performs DICOM retrieve failure.\nPlease Check DICM configuration.
retrieve make sure the network and
operation failed Q&R server configuration are
service.
0405507 Warning SCU performs DICOM storage commitment Check DICM configuration.
storage failure.\nPlease make sure the
commitment network and storage
failed commitment server
configuration are correct, and
the server is available. And try
again. If this issue persists,
0405508 Warning SCU performs DICOM storage failure.\nPlease Check DICM configuration.
storage make sure the network and
operation failed storage server configuration
are correct, and the server is
service.
0405509 Error SCU sets locale System start failure. Set locale System unknown error
failed failed.\nPlease restart the
0405510 Error SCU reports System start failure.\nPlease make sure if omniNames
ready failed restart the system. If this issue service failed, any module
persists, please call for service. crashed
0405701 Error SCU module Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
6-53

(In system Log)
please call for service

Invoke corba exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, any module
service system. If this issue persists, crashed
exception please call for service
0405703 Error SCU creates Execution thread System unknown error

thread failed exception.\nPlease restart the
0405704 Warning SCU cancels Cancel execution thread System unknown error
thread failed exception.\nPlease restart the
0405705 Error SCU allocates System run out of Check memory using state
exception system. If this issue persists, initialization failed
0405707 Warning SCU module Workstation communication make sure if omniNames
0405708 Error SCU inits a Semaphore exception.\nPlease system unknown error

semaphore restart the system. If this issue
failed persists, please call for service.
0405709 Error SCU module Workstation communication
0407501 Error MM module Workstation communication Make sure if omniNames
exception system. If this issue persists, initialization failed.
6-54
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
Invoke corba exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, check
service system. If this issue persists, omniOrb log file.
0407503 Warning Cancel thread Cancel execution thread System error: can’t cancel a
failed exception.\nPlease restart the thread.

register servant exception.\nPlease restart the service failed, check
exception system. If this issue persists, omniOrb log file.
0407505 Error Init semaphore Semaphore exception.\nPlease Check if the semaphore is

failed restart the system. If this issue valid, or check if the
persists, please call for service. maximum allowable value
for the semaphore will be
exceeded.
0407506 Error Set locale failed System start failure. Set locale System error. Call to
failed. Please restart the setlocal() function failed.
0407507 Error Allocate System run out of Check memory using state.
0407508 Warning Enumerate Enumerate devices System error: can’t
devices failed failure.\nPlease restart the enumerate devices.
0407512 Warning Run makeisofs Create CD/DVD file Make sure the makeisofs
script failed exception.\nPlease retry or script is the exact version
insert another disk. If this issue that is shipped with
persists, please call for service. product.
0407514 Warning Run synccopy Copy to USB disk Make sure the synccopy
script failed exception.\nPlease check the script is the exact version
USB disk or replace with that is shipped with
another disk. If this issue product.
6-55

(In system Log)
0407516 Error Start System module init Make sure there is enough
application failure.\nPlease restart the memory and the udev
failed system. If this issue persists, library is correctly installed.
0407517 Error Report ready System start failed, Application can’t be booted,
failed MediaManagement report contact service.
ready failed. Please restart the
0407519 Warning Run command System command execution System error. Call to system
failed failed.\nPlease try again. If this function failed.
service.
0407521 Warning Print head Print head temperature Check the temperature for
temperature exception.\nPlease restart the the printer.
exception local printer and retry. If this
service.
0407522 Warning Printer paper Paper feed error.\nPlease take Get the paper out of printer
feed error the paper out of printer and and put it in.
put it in again. If this issue
0407523 Warning Printer is not Printer is not ready.\nPlease Make sure the printer has
initialized make sure the printer is well- been initialized.
connected and already turned
on. And then try again. If this
service.
0407524 Error MM module Workstation communication
0407525 Error MM module Workstation communication

asyncNotify exception.\nPlease restart the
0407800 Warning Export images Export to CD/DVD failure. Disk Make sure the disc is
to CD/DVD is write protected or there is no writable and there is
failed enough space.\nPlease replace enough space.
the disk and try again.\nIf this
6-56
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
service.
0407801 Warning Export images Export to USB failure.\nPlease Make sure the USB disk is
to USB failed make sure the disk is well well connected and is
plugged, not write protected, writable, do have enough
and has enough space. And space.
then try again.\nIf this issue
0407802 Warning Print image Print image failure.\nPlease Print error: the print job
failed make sure the printer is ready can’t be finished, please
for print and try again.\nIf this check the log file for more.
service.
0407803 Warning Import data Import data from the disk Please insert another disc.
from the disc failure.\nPlease retry or insert
failed another disk. If this issue
0402502 Warning Insert exam Insert exam failure.\nPlease try

failed again. If this issue persists,
Please call for service.
0402504 Warning Insert image Insert image failure.\nPlease

failed try again. If this issue persists,
0402505 Warning Update exam Update exam information

failed failure.\nPlease try again. If this
issue persists, Please call for
service.
0402507 Warning Update image Update image information

service.
0402509 Warning DB undefined Undefined exception

exception is encountered.\nPlease try
caught again. If this issue persists,
6-57

(In system Log)
0402510 Warning Search row in Query information from DB For example: updateExam()
DB failed failure.\nPlease try again. If this 1. getExam(examId);--> not
issue persists, Please call for found;
service.
0402511 Warning Delete row Delete information from DB

from DB failed failure.\nPlease try again. If this
service.
0402512 Warning Update row in Update information
DB failed failure.\nPlease try again. If this
service.
0402513 Warning Search exam Query exam information from
row in DB failed DB failure.\nPlease try again. If
this issue persists, Please call
for service.
0402515 Warning Search image Query image information from
row in DB failed DB failure.\nPlease try again. If
this issue persists, Please call
for service.
0402517 Warning Insert row Insert information
service.
0402518 Error DatabaseMana Workstation communication
gement module exception.\nPlease restart the
register servant system. If this issue persists,
exception
resolve object system. If this issue persists,

Invoke corba system. If this issue persists,
6-58
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
exception

exception
get OSGI system. If this issue persists,
exception
exception
0412501 Warning Init hot key Function key init failure. 1. Keyboard error
grabber failed Function keys can’t be
2. OS error 3. Software error
used.\nPlease restart the
(So file missing)
0412502 Error SystemControl Workstation communication Software error
0412503 Error CORBA fatal Workstation communication 1. Software internal error

error exception.\nPlease restart the
2. Corba server error.
0412504 Warning Load or parse Setup configuration loading 1. Configure file miss
setup exception. Some setup
2. Configure file format
configuration configuration may be
error
0412505 Warning Load or parse Administration configuration 1. Configure file miss
administration loading exception.\nPlease
configuration restart the system. If this issue
error
6-59

(In system Log)
0412506 Warning Load or parse Software version access 1. Configure file miss
version failure.\nPlease restart the
configuration system. If this issue persists,
error
file failed please call for service.
0412507 Warning No handler for Unexpected
the message message.\nPleasre restart the
please call for the service.
0412510 Warning Mainframe and Mainframe software

workstation incompatible. Mainframe is
softawre stopped.\nPlease make sure
incompatible connecting the right
mainframe. If the mainframe is
correct, please call service to
upgrade mainframe and/or
workstation software.
0412512 Warning Load or parse Connectivity configuration
connectivity loading failure. Some
setup configuration may be
configuration missed.\nPlease restart the
file failed system. If this issue persists,
0412513 Error SystemControl Workstation communication
0412514 Error SystemControl Workstation communication
exception
0412800 Warning Serial numbers Mainframe has different serial
of MCB and number from Workstation.
WKS are not Mixing use of workstation with
compatible other system's mainframe is
not supported.\nPlease make
sure workstation and
mainframe is match.
0412801 Warning Static image Image storage capacity limit of
storage space 100,000 images reached.
is full Can’t start Digital Spot
exposure.\nPlease delete
useless or out-of-date images
6-60
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
to free disk space.
0412804 Warning Product models Workstation product model is

of MF and WKS different from mainframe.
are different Mixing use of workstation with
different product model
mainframe is not
supported.\nPlease make sure
workstation and mainframe is
match.
0412805 Error Workstation Product is not
product model configured.\nPlease call
not configured service to configure product
model with product license.
0412806 Warning Workstation System does not have product

product model license. System can’t work with
configured by full functions.\nPlease call
MFG service to configure product
with product license.
0401500 Error Allocate System run out of Re install software
Memory failed memory.\nPlease restart the
0401501 Warning Write PIPE Communication Re install software
0401502 Warning Read PIPE failed Communication Re install software
exception.\nPlease restart the
6-61

(In system Log)
0401503 Error Set PIPE failed Communication ini Re install software
0401504 Error CORBA Workstation communication Re install software

0401505 Error Sync operation Execution exception.\nPlease Re install software

failed restart the system. If this issue
0401506 Error Thread Execution thread Re install software
operation failed exception.\nPlease restart the
0401001 Error Open serial port Workstation and mainframe

failed communication
0401002 Warning Write serial port Workstation and mainframe
0401003 Warning Read serial port Workstation and mainframe
0401004 Error Set serial port Workstation and mainframe
0401005 Warning Communication Workstation and mainframe
Lost communication lost.\nPlease
6-62
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0408500 Error Allocate System run out of WKS software work
memory failed memory.\nPlease restart the abnormal
system. If this issue persists, 1.Reboot system
please call for service. 2.Reinstall system
0408501 Warning Write PIPE System can’t get peripheral WKS software work
failed device information.\nIf this abnormal
1.Reboot system
service.
2.Reinstall system
0408502 Warning Read PIPE failed System can’t get peripheral WKS software work
device information.\nIf this abnormal
1.Reboot system
service.
2.Reinstall system
0408503 Error Set PIPE failed Module init failure.\nIf this
service.
0408504 Warning Read XML file Setup configuration laoding Read setup configuration
failed failure. Some setup file failure
configuration may be 1.Try to import setup
missed.\nPlease restart the configuration file
system. If this issue persists, 2.Reinstall WKS software
please call for service. 3.Replace hardware disk
0408505 Error CORBA Workstation communication WKS software work
communication exception.\nPlease restart the abnormal
failed system. If this issue persists, 1.Reboot system
0408506 Error Thread Execution thread WKS software work

operation failed exception.\nPlease restart the abnormal
system. If this issue persists, 1.Reboot system
0408507 Error Thread sync Exectuion exception.\nPlease WKS software work

operation failed restart the system. If this issue abnormal
persists, please call for service. 1.Reboot system
2.Reinstall system
0408508 Warning Read default Default Setup configuration WKS software work
XML file failed loading failure.\nPlease restart abnormal
the system. If this issue 1.Reboot system
persists, please call for service. 2.Reinstall system
6-63

(In system Log)
0408509 Warning System connect System can’t detect Communication between
UPS failed UPS.\nPlease shut down UPS and WKS is abnormal.
system to avoid data loss. If 1. PC USB for UPS may be
this issue persists, please call abnormal
for service. 2. Connection between PC
and UPS may be abnormal
3. UPS may be abnormal.
0408510 Warning UPS return System can’t detect Communication between
nothing or UPS.\nPlease shut down UPS and WKS is abnormal.
wrong data system to avoid data loss. If 1. PC USB for UPS may be
this issue persists. please call abnormal
for service. 2.Connection between PC
4. Reinstall WKS software
0408511 Warning Catch System can’t detect WKS S/W is abnormal
exception UPS.\nPlease shut down 1. WKS software may be
during UPS system to avoid data loss. If abnormal.
communication this issue persists. please call 2. WKS software and OS
for service. may be abnormal.
0408001 Warning UPS battery low UPS battery low.\nPlease 1. Battery of UPS need
keeps AC power plugged in to recharged
avoid data loss. If this issue 2. UPS may be abnormal.
0408002 Error System AC AC power lost. System will Main power input may be
power lost shutdown in 4".\nPlease save abnormal.
data in time to avoid data loss.
0408003 Warning SIB connection Peripharal inferface exception. Communication between

lost Power Off and Room Interface SIB and PC is abnormal.
functions may be 1. Serial port of WKS may be
abnormal.\nPlease restart the abnormal
system. If this issue persists. 2. Serial port of SIB may be
3. Connection between SIB
and PDU may be abnormal.
0408004 Warning PDU Power distribution unit control Communication between
connection lost exception.\nIf this issue SIB and PDU is abnormal.
persists, please call for service. 1. SIB may be abnormal
2.connection between SIB
and PDU may be abnormal
3. PDU may be abnormal.
6-64
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0408005 Warning SIB PDU ready Power distribution unit control Communication between
line exception.\nIf this issue SIB and PDU is abnormal.
disconnected persists, please call for service. 1. SIB may be abnormal
2.connection between SIB
and PDU may be abnormal
4. WKS software may be
abnormal
0408006 Warning Secondary Secondary voltage overload. It 1. Main transformer
voltage may result in exposure primary input power supply
overload exception.\nPlease restart the may be abnormal.
system. If this issue persists, 2. Output of main
please call for service. transformer may be
abnormal.
3. Adjust R52 follow SM
chapter 4.9
0408007 Warning Secondary Secondary voltage underload. 1. Main transformer
voltage It may result in exposure primary input power supply
underload exception.\nPlease restart the may be abnormal.
system. If this issue persists, 2. 28V output of main
please call for service. transformer may be
abnormal.
3. Adjust R52 follow SM
chapter 4.9
0408008 Warning PDU not detect Power monitoring 1. 12V output of WKS may
IPC 12V exception.\nIf this issue be abnormal.
persists, please call for service. 2. 12 V input for PDU may
be abnormal.
0408009 Error Open serial port Workstation and peripheral Serial port of WKS abnormal
failed interface communicaiton 1. WKS serial port for UPS
exception.\nPlease restart the may be abnormal.
0408010 Warning Write serial port Workstation and peripheral Serial port of WKS abnormal
0408011 Warning Read serial port Workstation and peripheral Serial port of WKS abnormal
6-65

(In system Log)
0408012 Error Set serial port Workstation and peripheral Serial port of WKS abnormal
0408015 Warning No battery in No battery in UPS.\nPlease
UPS keep AC plugged in to avoid
data loss. If this issue persists.
0408016 Warning Can’t detect System can’t detect Communication between
UPS UPS.\nPlease keep AC plugged UPS and WKS is abnormal.
in to avoid data loss. If this 1. PC USB for UPS may be
issue persists. Please call for abnormal
service. 2.connection between PC
4. Reinstall WKS software
0408018 UPS needs to UPS battery aged.\nPlease call
be replaced for service to replace the battery.
aging of battery
0408019 Warning UPS battery UPS battery 1, PC power supply may be

overloads overloaded.\nPlease restart abnormal
the system to avoid data loss.
If this issue persists, please call
for service.
0409501 Error OSGI boot up Application modules boot up
failed failure.\nPlease restart the
0409502 Error C module boot System modules boot up

up failed failure.\nPlease restart the
0409503 Error CORBA Workstation communication

6-66
Troubleshooting

(In system Log)
0404501 Error TRU module Workstation communication
resolve object exception.\nPlease restart the

Invoke corba exception.\nPlease restart the

register OSGI exception.\nPlease restart the
0404504 Error TRU module get Workstation communication

OSGI service exception.\nPlease restart the

unregister OSGI exception.\nPlease restart the
6-67
6.4. Troubleshooting Guide

6.4.1. Workstation and Control Panel Boot up Display
Workstation screen:
1. BIOS 2. Linux
3. App
Control Panel:
1. MCB Ready 2. MCB & WKS Comm. and 3. Done

Exchange information
6.4.2. Shut down Workstation and Control Panel Display
WKS MCB
Normal Boot up time is about 1’20” and Shut down time is about 25”.
6-68
Troubleshooting
6.4.3. Troubleshooting Tree

Below are troubleshooting tree for:
1. Boot up failure
2. X-ray Failure
3. No Image Failure
Refer to Diagnostic
instruction and
1. Boot up Failure Recommend action of 6.3.3
Y
No responds MF control panel
when press in processing but WKS boot up but Error displayed
N N N
power On/Off WKS bootup MF no responds? on right monitor?
button? failure
Power off and Y Y
check filter
Check room connection Check the power
Power plug Input of DC
main power N N filter and wire
insert? power supply?
switch connection
Y Insert power
Y plug Y
N Jack power Output of DC Replace DC power

Breaker on? N N
on? power supply? supply
Y Turn Y
Breaker On MX12 connect
Power On Y
N Motherboard is N Reconnect MX12
Indicator on?
OK?
Y Y
Check wire
connection or Power On/Off Fuse on MB is
N N Replace Fuse
Replace Power button light on? OK?
On/Off Button
Y Y
Check wire LED of MF
connection or Replace
display board N
Replace Power motherboard
on?
On/Off Button
Y
N Monitor on?
Replace MCB
Power on
N Monitor power?
monitor
Y
Y
Check DVI cable
connect In BIOS self check
interface?
Replace computer
Y
power supply Y
Check the filter and Computer power According BIOS

N
wire connection input? check result
N maintain computer
N
Fan of computer
supply running?
Replace computer Check the LED on

N
MB Computer MB
Replace Computer
display board
6-69
Manual mode, Chart 2

2. X-Ray Failure Warning error? N
KV right?
N
KV failure
Y Y
Chart 1 Chart 3
Error handling mA failure
Adjust R50 on KVCB to

The TP15 voltage on KVCB is
make the voltage of
N equal to KV value / 20 when Y Done
TP15 on KVCB equal to
exposure?
KV value / 20
Check TP5 voltage

Chart 1
on MCB = KV value / N Replace MCB Replace KVCB
Error Handling 20?
Y
Y
Error 0104004 KV low JP1 on monobloc

Check fuse on J2 pin seal board well N Reconnect JP1
and DS4 on KVCB is Y DS9 on KVCB on? N
16 connected?
on?
N Y
Error 0104003 KV high

MX5 on MB well
and DS5 on KVCB is Y N Reconnect MX5
connected?
on?
Error 0117004 filament Replace

Replace IGBT, still
over current and DS6 on Y Y monobloc, still Y Replace KVCB
over current?
KVCB is on? over current?
N N Done
N
Done Done N
Error 0104005 KV Restart system and

unbalance and DS7 on Y expose again, still KV
KVCB is on? unbalance?
Voltage out of scope, Replace monobloc

N Replace KVCB Restart system
unable to comply
N N N
The input voltage is The voltage on the The voltage on the

Error 0104001 DC error
Y within 10% Y capacity 3300uF is Y capacity is less than Y Change DC bus fuse
and DS8 on KVCB is on?
toelrance? within 320V +/- 20V? 20V?
Error 0104002 IGBT Replace IGBT,

error and DS2 on KVCB Y expose and DS2 still N Done
is on? on?
N Y
Refer to error code in

Replace KVCB
SM
6-70
Troubleshooting
6-71
6-72
Chapter7. Replacement
7.1. FRU list

Item PN Description Q’ty Comments
Mainframe C-arm
1 5085004 ASM, GENERATOR 1
2 5417680 ASM, COLLIMATOR KIT 1
3 5075929 ASM, 9' Image Intensifier for 715/785 1 Brivo OEC 715/785
4 5075930 ASM, 9' Image Intensifier for 865 1 Brivo OEC 865
5 5075006 Component, GigE Camera AM1565, Surgery 1 Brivo OEC 715/785
6 5085003 Component, GigE Camera AM1565B, Surgery 1 Brivo OEC 865
7 5075505 Component, grid for 715,785 1 Brivo OEC 715/785
8 5330066 Component, Grid, EVR 1 Brivo OEC 865
9 5085160 Plastic, 9 inch II cover 1
10 5075009 Component, I.I Power Supply 1
Mainframe Base
11 5085603 PWA, COLLIMATOR CONTROL BOARD 1
12 5085600 PWA, MAINFRAME CONTROLLOR BOARD 1
13 5085604 PWA, FILAMENT DRIVE BOARD 1
14 5085610 PWA, KV CONTROL BOARD 1
15 5085601 PWA, MOTHER BOARD, EVR 1
16 5329281 MISC, RESONANT CAPACITOR,EVR 1
17 5085800 MISC, POWER SUPPLY MPQ-200F 1
18 5085801 MISC, POWER SUPPLY RPT-75D 1
19 5329275 MISC, RECTIFIER BRIDGE, EVR 1
20 5085805 MISC, DRIVE POWER TRANSFORMER, EVR 1
21 5331600 MISC, C_ARM POWER FILTER, EVR 1
22 5329278 MISC, DC BUS CAPACITOR 2
23 5329279 MISC, DC BUS FUSE 1
24 5085096 ASM, FOOTSWITCH ASM 1 Standard configuration
25 5085113 ASM, HAND SWITCH ASSY 1
26 5085408 ASM, IGBT INVERTER MODULE,EVR 1
27 5085607 PWA, UPDOWN BOARD 1
28 5075901 FRU, C-ARM UP and DOWN BUTTON KIT 1
29 5075902 FRU, MAINFRAME FRONT WHEEL KIT 1
30 5075903 FRU, MAINFRAME BODY COVERS KIT 1
31 5075904 FRU, MAINFRAME BACK WHEEL PLATE KIT 1
32 5075905 FRU, C-ARM HANDLES KIT 1
33 5333084 FRU, MAINFRAME STEERING HANDLE KIT 1
34 5333085 FRU, CROSS-ARM BRAKE HANDLE KIT 1
35 5075906 FRU, WIG-WAG BRAKE HANDLE KIT 1
36 5333087 FRU, ORBITAL OR ROTATIONAL BRAKE HANDLES KIT 1
37 5075907 FRU, MAINFRAME CONTROL PANEL KIT 1
38 5075921 FRU, LINEAR ACTUATOR KIT 1
Workstation
39 5085606 PWA, POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT 1
40 5085605 PWA, SYSTEM INTERFACE BOARD 1
41 5075503 Component, 19 Inch Color LCD Monitor, Surgery 2 Brivo OEC 715
7-2
Replacement

42 5085503 COMPONENT, LEFT MONITOR 1 Brivo OEC 865
43 5085505 COMPONENT, RIGHT MONITOR 1 Brivo OEC 865
44 5085512 Power Supply, Surgery 1
45 5085508 COMPUTER, MEMORY BANK 1
46 5075506 Workstation, Mainboard Assembly, Surgery 1
47 5085507 COMPUTER, DISPLAY CARD 1
48 5085509 COMPUTER, HARDDISK 1
49 5085514 COMPUTER, MOUSE 1
50 5075513 UPS, Surgery 1
51 5085803 MISC, MAIN TRANSFORMER 1
52 5085804 MISC, START UP TRANSFORMER 1
53 5331638 MISC, EXPOSURE INDICATOR, EVR 1
54 5330849 MISC, EMERGENCY SWITCH, EVR 1
00- PUSHER~ CABLE~ 5 INCH CASTER~ 9600 Brivo OEC 865
55 1
877298-01
56 5075908 FRU, WKS CONTROL PANEL KIT 1
00- CASTER SWIVEL 5 INCH Brivo OEC 865
57 1
900695-01
00- CASTER~ LOCK~ 5 INCH Brivo OEC 865
58 1
900696-01
59 5075909 FRU, 715 WORKSTATION FRONT COVER KIT 1 Brivo OEC 715
62 5075912 FRU, WORKSTATION SIDE COVERS KIT 1
63 5075913 FRU, WORKSTATION TOP COVERS KIT 1
64 5075914 FRU, WORKSTATION HANDLE KIT 1
65 5075915 FRU, WORKSTATION BASE COVER KIT 1 Brivo OEC 865
66 5075926 FRU, WORKSTATION BASE COVER KIT 715 and 785 1 Brivo OEC 715/785
67 5343601 ASM UNIVERSAL TRUCKLE WITH BRAKE EVR 1 Brivo OEC 715/785
Cables
68 5085708 Cable, INTERCONNECT WKS 1
69 5085700 CABLE, BUNDLE ASM 1
70 5085431 ASM, INTERCONNECT CABLE AND SUPPORT 1
Service Tool, Option and Others
71 5075816 ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITH LASER AIMER KIT 1 Option
ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITHOUT LASER AIMER
72 5075917 1
KIT
73 5075918 FRU, REMOVE FILTER AND SENSOR KIT 1 Option
74 5075928 Workstation Software 1
75 5085900 COMPUTER, WiFi Connector Kit 1 Option
76 5075919 FRU, FUSE KIT 1
77 5085115 ASM, FOOT SWITCH ASSY 1 Option with dual pedal
78 5085099 Collector, REMOVABLE GRID A 1 Option
79 5075922 FRU, Button and Switch KIT 1
80 5330055 Component, LCD monitor, EVR 1 Option, Brivo OEC 785
81 5085511 COMPUTER, DVD RW DRIVER 1 Option
82 5085609 PWA, EXTEND BOARD 1 Service Tool
7-3

5330473- Option
83 LASER AIMER in Image intensifier SIDE 1
33
00- Service Tool
84 9’ BEAM ALIGNMENT TOOL ASSEMBLY 1
878105-02
85 5331605 MISC, BREAKER FOR 220V, EVR 1 220V power input
86 5085809 MISC, BREAKER FOR 110V 1 110V power input
87 5085838 MISC, WKS CIRCUIT BREAKER PRIMARY 1 110V power input
88 5407037 Cable with plug_AFSNIT 107-2-D1 1
89 5407042 Cable with plug_AS/NZS 3112 1
90 5407045 Cable with plug_IRAM 2073 1
91 5407039 Cable with plug_NBR 14136 1
92 5408318 Cable with plug_NEMA 5-15P 1
93 5407035 Cable with plug_NEMA 5-20P 1
94 5407036 Cable with plug_L6-20P 1
95 5407050 Cable with plug_SI-32 1
Component, Video distributor for external DVI video Option
96 5332898 1
output, EVR
97 5407033 Cable, Power Cable with BS1363A, EVR 1
98 5407032 Cable, Power Cable with BS546, EVR 1
99 5407031 Cable, Power Cable with CEE77, EVR 1
100 5408320 Cable, Power Cable with GB1002, EVR 1
101 5407038 Cable, 110V Power Cable with NEMA5-15, EVR 1
102 5407048 Cable, Power Cable with SEV1011, EVR 1
103 2418430 Component, UP-D897 Printer, EVR 1 Option
104 5330067 Component, UP-990AD Thermal Printer, EVR 1 Option
105 5085235 SKIN SPACERS 1 Option
106 5075923 Collector, Firmware Upgrade Kit 1 Service Tool
107 5075511 APP Software Installation DVD-RW 1 Service Tool
For the 5 parts as below, field engineer must ship the failed parts to Surgery engineering in
NOTE
China for autopsy in the first year after M3.
Contact:
Cheng Jianan
GE HUALUN Medical Systems Co. Ltd
No. 1 Yongchang North Road,
Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area
Beijing, P.R. China 100176
Tel: 8610-58068888-70483
1 5085600 PWA, MAINFRAME CONTROLLOR BOARD
7-4
Replacement
2 5085610 PWA, KV CONTROL BOARD
3 5085004 ASM,GENERATOR
4 5075006 Component, GigE Camera AM1565, Surgery
5 5085003 Component, GigE Camera AM1565B, Surgery
After the replacement of the 5 parts below, please fill in the product locator card and mail
NOTE
it to local service operation office.
Item Part Number Part Description Comments

1 5085004 ASM,GENERATOR
2 5075929 FRU,9’’ Image Intensifier for 715,785 The product locator card is
for the low tie part 5075001
3 5075930 FRU,9' Image Intensifier for 865 The product locator card is
for the low tie part 5075008
4 5417680 ASM, COLLIMATOR KIT
5 5075816 ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITH LASER AIMER KIT
The FRU list contains 4 special tools to be used in Software installation calibration or
NOTE troubleshooting.
1 5085609 PWA, EXTEND BOARD
2 5075511 APP Software Installation DVD-RW
3 5075923 Collector, Firmware Upgrade Kit
4 00-878105-02 9’ BEAM ALIGHMENT TOOL ASSEMBLY
7-5
7.2. Locations of FRU
9 10
5, 6
3, 4 32
7, 8
54
37 26
73 12
11 13
2
30
1
30
31 14
7-6
Replacement
7-7
7.3. Replacement
Electrical circuits inside the equipment use voltages that are capable of Causing serious
WARNING injury or death from electrical shock. Use appropriate precautions.
WARNING
Please use specified fuse.
If the system has power applied, power off the machine and unplug the AC power cord
WARNING from the wall outlet.
7.3.1. General Screws Fastening torque Reference

NOTE
If no specification in parts replacement procedure, take below general screws fastening
torque as reference.
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw:

Material: Steel; Property: 8.8; Finish: Zinc Plated; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw

Thread Specification M2 M2.5 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12
Torque Value 0.3 0.6 1 2.3 4.6 7.9 19.2 38.4 66.4
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the 80% of
Notes the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Casting,
the tighten torque is the 50% of the steel tighten torque
Cross Recessed Countersunk Head Screws:
Material: Steel; Property: 4.8 & 8.8; Finish: Zinc Plated; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Countersunk Head Screws

Thread Specification M2.5 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10
Torque Property 4.8 0.3 0.4 1 2 3.4 8.4 16.8
Value Property 8.8 0.6 1 2.3 4.6 7.9 19.2 38.4
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the 80% of
Notes the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Casting, the
tighten torque is the 50% of the steel tighten torque
7-8
Replacement
Pozidriv Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw:

Material: Steel; Property: 4.8&8.8; Finish: Zinc Plated; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw
Thread Specification M2.5 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10
Torque Property 4.8 0.3 0.4 1 2 3.4 8.4 16.8
Value Property 8.8 0.6 1 2.3 4.6 7.9 19.2 38.4
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the
Notes 80% of the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum
Casting, the tighten torque is the 50% of the steel tighten torque
Cross Recessed Pan Head Tapping Screw:

Material: Steel case hardened; Property: min 450 HV (>>45 HRC); Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Pan Head Tapping Screw
Thread Specification ST2.2 ST2.9 ST3.5 ST3.9 ST4.2 ST4.8 ST5.5 ST6.3
Torque Value 0.4 1.2 2.2 2.7 3.5 5.0 8.0 11.0
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the 80%
Notes of the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum
Socket Set Screw:
Material: Steel case hardened; Property: 45H; Torque Unit: Nm;
Tighten Torque Value For Cross Recessed Pan Head Tapping Screw
Thread Specification M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
Torque Value 0.4 0.8 2.4 4.0 8.0 16.0 36.0 72.0
If the material of the thread hole is Aluminum Ally, the tighten torque is the
Notes 80% of the steel tighten torque; if the material of the thread hole is Aluminum
Austenitic Stainless Steels A2:
Austenitic Stainless Steels A2

Thread Specification M1.6 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14
Torque Property A2- 50 0.1 0.2 0.8 1.0 1.9 3.3 8.1 16.2 27.8 44.8
Value Property A2-70 0.2 0.2 0.9 2.1 4.1 7.0 17.1 35.2 59.2 95.2
7-9
7.3.2. Calibration Matrix

For the parts below, the calibration procedure or some following action should be done after the replacement. For detail
NOTE information, please refer to the replacement procedure.
contrast adjust if needed

X-ray Generator Warm
KV Calibration
mA Calibration
mA Pre_Heat table Cali.
mAs Calibration
Camera Centering
Collimator Centering
Collimator Calibration
Limiting Field Size Check
ABS Tracking Check&Cal.
Shading Calibration
Image Resolution check
DAP Calibration
Reinstall OS and APP SW
Monitor Brightness and

Laser aimer Calibration
Power Tolerance Check
PN Description
5085603 PWA, COLLIMATOR CONTROL BOARD √ √ √ √
5085600 PWA, MAINFRAME CONTROLLOR BOARD √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
5085604 PWA, FILAMENT DRIVE BOARD √ √ √ √ √ √
5085610 PWA, KV CONTROL BOARD √ √ √ √ √ √ √
5085004 ASM,GENERATOR, (Monoblock) √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
5417680 ASM, COLLIMATOR KIT √ √ √ √ √ √ √
5085509 COMPUTER, HARDDISK √ √
5075009 Component, I.I Power Supply √ √ √ √
5075006 Component, GigE Camera AM1565, Surgery √ √ √ √ √
5085003 Component, GigE Camera AM1565B, Surgery √ √ √ √ √
5075929 FRU,9’’ Image Intensifier for 715,785 √ √ √ √ √ √
5075930 FRU,9' Image Intensifier for 865 √ √ √ √ √ √
5085700 CABLE, BUNDLE CABLE √ √ √ √ √ √ √
5075816 ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITH LASER AIMER KIT √
5330473-01 ASM, LASER AIMER, 9 INCH ENGLISH WITH ALL LANGUAGES
√
SUPPLEMENT
5330055 Component, LCD monitor, EVR √
5075503 Component, 19 Inch Color LCD Monitor, Surgery √
5085503 COMPONENT, LEFT MONITOR √
5085505 COMPONENT, RIGHT MONITOR √
5085606 PWA, POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT √
7-10
Replacement
7.3.3. Calibration Tool Matrix

Standard tools are not included in below matrix, for example: screw driver, TORX screw driver (for Brivo OEC 865 Camera Iris and Focus
calibration), Allen key metric and inch (Brivo OEC 865 Camera Iris and Focus calibration).
contrast adjust if needed
Power Tolerance Check

X-ray Generator Warm
mA Calibration
mA Pre_Heat table Cali.
mAs Calibration
KV Calibration
Collimator Centering
Collimator Calibration
Limiting Field Size Check
ABS Tracking Check&Cal.
Shading Calibration
Image Resolution check
DAP Accuracy Ver. and Cal.
Reinstall OS and APP SW
Monitor Brightness and

Laser aimer Calibration
Camera Centering
PN Description
Standard Tool Dose Meter √ √
Standard Tool Oscilloscope Tektronix 2236 or equivalent √ √ √
Standard Tool Multimeter or equivalent √ √ √
Standard Tool Spatial Resolution Tool √
Standard Tool Lead Apron
Standard Tool kV meter √
Standard Tool Ampere meter or equivalent √ √
Standard Tool Ruler longer than 12 inches (30cm) √
Standard Tool Erasable marker (If needed) √ √
Standard Tool mAs meter √
00-877682-01 Three copper sheets, each 1mm thick √
00-878105-02 9-inch BAFT Tool √ √ √ √ √
5085609 PWA, Extend Board √ √ √
5085005 Asm, 9 Inch Cassette Holder (if required) √
N/A Film √
5075511 APP Software Installation DVD-RW √
7-11
7.3.4. System Covers

Never allow anyone to use the system when any C-Arm cover is removed. Use extreme
WARNING caution if you intend to troubleshoot the equipment with the covers off and power
applied. Failure to heed this warning may result death, personal injury, or equipment
damage.
C-Arm Covers
Remove the rear cover before removing the front cover.
Remove the Cross-arm bearing cover, X-ray Monoblock cover and Image Intensifier cover in any order.
Set the brakes before attempting to remove C-Arm covers.
NOTE
Follow these steps to remove the C-Arm covers:

1. Disconnect AC power plug from AC outlet.
2. Remove four cosmetic caps. Then loosen four screws that
secure C-Arm rear cover. Draw out rear cover away from C-
Arm.
3. Remove the four screws secure C-Arm front cover. Avoid

electric shock with great care.
7-12
Replacement
4. Disconnect the footswitch from the footswitch socket, slowly

move front cover away from C-Arm.
5. Install the covers in reverse sequence (Front cover prior to rear cover).
The torque to screw the C-Arm front cover is 2.5Nm. The torque to screw the rear cover is
NOTE
5.8Nm.
Workstation Covers
Remove Workstation covers in the following sequence:
1. Rear Cover
2. Left and Right lower side covers
3. Front Cover
4. Left and right upper side covers
Follow below steps to remove the Workstation covers:
1. Loosen the 4 screws of the rear cover. Remove the rear cover.
7-13
2. Remove the 2 screws on each lower side cover. Remove lower cover on each side.
3. Remove 6 screws (2 screws on each side and 2 on top of the front cover. Disconnect the USB
extension cable (release the secure screw of USB port cover, then release the secure screw of USB
cable) and power on switch connected cable. Then remove the front cover.
7-14
Replacement
4. Remove all screws of the printer cabinet. Remove the printer cabinet.
5. Remove the screws and disassemble two Workstation handles.
7-15
6. Remove the screws on each side and remove the left and right upper side covers.
7. Replace the cover and install them in reverse sequence.
8. Replace Workstation front cover need refer old front cover to affix local language warning labels
in Multi-language Label Kit (5075934).
The torque requirement to fasten the screws that secure the rear and side covers is
NOTE 2.5Nm.The torque requirement to fasten the screws that secure the front cover is 5.8Nm.
Replace Workstation front cover need order Workstation cover FRU (5075909 for 715,
NOTE 5075910 for 785, 5075911 for 865) and Multi-language Label Kits (5075934).
Top Cover
Rear cover must be removed before upper cover can be removed.
NOTE
1. Remove all screws that secure the front top cover.
2. Disconnect the cable connected to the Workstation

membrane keyboard control board. Remove the
front top cover.
7-16
Replacement
3. Remove the screws that secure the membrane

keyboard. Remove the membrane keyboard in the
front top cover.
4. Reassemble the membrane keyboard in the new top cover.

5. Remove the screws that secure the rear top cover. Remove the rear top cover.
6. Replace the new top cover kits and install them in reverse sequence.
The torque of the screws that secure the top covers is 2.5Nm.
NOTE
Down Side Cover

1. Lift up the side of the Workstation carefully and keep the balance of the Workstation.
2. Remove the screws of the down side cover
and remove the down side cover.
3. When removing the downside cover below

the brake pedal, remove the screws of
brake pedal and remove the brake pedal
first.
7-17
7.3.5. Brake, Handle and Wheel

Lateral Rotation Brake and Orbital Movement Brake (5333087)
Lateral Rotation Brake and Orbital Movement brake have the same replacement procedure:
1. Make sure the brake is set.
2. Loosen the screw that secures the handle to C-Arm.
3. Remove the handle.
4. Install the new handle and fasten the screw. Pay attention to
keep the original assembling direction.
5. Release the brake. Move the C-Arm and verify that C-Arm can be
locked by placing the brake in lock position.
Wig-Wag Brake (5075906)
1. Release the wig-wag brake.
2. Pull up the brake handle and fix the screw below by a

screwdriver, and then rotate the handle clockwise to the
maximum location.
3. Rotate the brake handle counterclockwise to the

maximum, and drop the handle.
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 until remove the screw below.
5. Replace a new wig-wag brake handle kit with a revers steps.
7-18
Replacement
Horizontal Movement (Cross-arm) Brake (5333085)

1. Make sure the horizontal movement brake is set.
2. Loosen 2 screws from horizontal brake
handle and Remove the handle.
3. Remove the screws of the cross arm cover

and remove the cover.
4. Loosen the screws of the plate cover of the

brake and remove the plate cover.
5. Remove the screws and replace the brake

pad assembly.
6. Reassemble the covers of the cross arm.

7. Replace the new horizontal movement handle. Pay attention to keep the original assembling
direction.
8. Place the handle in unlock position. Verify that you can push or pull the cross arm and lock the cross
arm by placing the brake handle in lock position.
7-19
C-Arm Steering Handle (5333084)

1. Remove the cosmetic cover of steering handle.
2. Remove the 2 screws of the steering handle.
3. Remove the handle.
4. Install the new handle and fasten the screws.
Pay attention to keep the original assembling
direction.
5. Verify that the rear wheel can be steered by
the steering handle.
Workstation Handles (5075914)

Refer to section 7.3.1 Workstation covers to remove the Workstation handles.
Mainframe Front Wheel Kit (5075902)

1. Lift up the side of the C-Arm carefully and keep
the balance of the C-Arm. Loose the 4 screws
and remove mainframe front wheel.
2. Replace the new wheel. Move the C-Arm and
verify that the C-Arm can move freely.
Mainframe Back Wheel Plate Kit (5075904)

The FRU part for the rear wheel mainly provides the 2 plates and cable pushers.
1. Lift up the side of the C-Arm carefully and
keep the balance of the C-Arm. Remove the
label cover on the wheel plate. Then remove
the protection cover by releasing 3 secure
screws.
7-20
Replacement
2. Remove the circlip in the shaft.
3. Remove the plate of the wheel. Loose the

screws and then remove the cable pusher.
4. Replace the new parts in steering none brake position and reassemble all the other parts.
5. Move the C-Arm and verify that the C-Arm can move smoothly.
Wheels of Workstation
Brivo OEC 715/785 and Brivo OEC 865 use different Workstation wheels. Brivo OEC 715/785 use universal
wheels with brake. Brivo OEC 865 use central control wheel and non-central control wheels.
For Brivo OEC 715/785 (PN: 5343601)
2. Remove the down side cover secure screws and remove the down side covers.
3. Remove the workstation wheel by loose the nut.
7-21
4. Assemble wheel as above reverse steps.

5. Move the Workstation and verify that the Workstation can move smoothly.
For Brivo OEC 865
Central Control Wheels (00-900696-01)
2. Loose the screws and remove the down side cover.
3. Put the Workstation brake pedal to position 1. Remove the screws of brake pedal and remove the
brake pedal.
7-22
Replacement
4. Loose the nut and remove the central control wheel.

5. Then replace the wheel with a new one.
Pay attention to keep the direction and gear of the
NOTE
new wheel is same as the original one.
6. Install the brake pedal as original position.

7. Place the brake pedal in shift 1/2/3 and verify the central control
wheels are functional in each shift. Place the brake pedal in each
shift and verify the related function, refer to Section 3.6.1.
Non-central Control Wheels (00-900695-01)

1. Lift up the side of the Workstation carefully and keep the
balance of the Workstation.
2. Remove the screws of the side cover and remove the side
cover.
3. Loose the nut and remove the Non-central control wheel.
4. In position 2, move the Workstation and verify that the

Workstation can be moved smoothly.
7-23
7.3.6. Monoblock
2. Disconnect the cables connected to
Monoblock.
3. Underlay the Monoblock to prevent it
from falling.
4. Loosen the 4 screws. Replace the
Monoblock and fasten the 4 screws.
Torque to 19.9Nm during installation

NOTE
The thermal switch normal status is close. Disconnect connector in below/left picture and
NOTE test two pins shall be shortcut, measured by multimeter. Measure the resistance between
each pin and ground by multimeter, the result shall be open. If the result is shortcut, need
check whether the thermal switch cable is shortcut with ground or not.
Thermal Switch cable
5. Connect the cables to Monoblock. Boot up the system.

6. Refer to 7.3.2 and chapter 4 to perform calibrations and checks.
7. Shut down the system.
8. Recover the X-ray Monoblock assembly.
Fasten the screws with the torque to 0.56Nm.
NOTE
If the Monoblock is not powered for more than 3 months, it should be warm first
NOTE according to section 4.5.
7-24
Replacement
7.3.7. Collimator
1. Position the C-Arm for easy access.
3. Release the 3 screws (Inch screws,
released by T15 screw driver) of
collimator lead ring.
4. Remove 4 collimator secure screws
5. Replace a new collimator, fasten

4 collimator secure screws and
reinstall the collimator lead ring
by fastening 3 screws removed in
step3.
6. Power on the system.
7. Select fluoroscopy mode and
make sure to enable Automatic
Technique.
8. During the exposure, press the
shutter close and open button to
check if the movement of the leaf
is smooth.
9. Close the shutter all the way to the limit to check if the movement of the leaf is smooth.
10. Refer to 7.3.2 and chapter 4 to perform calibrations and checks:
11. Fasten all screws and recover the collimator cover
German regulatory required that the collimator has
NOTE to be visible on two sides of the image, which are not
opposite. For the system installed in German, adjust
collimator iris until the collimator meet the
requirement as below.
7-25
7.3.8. PWAs
Collimator Control Board (P/N: 5085603)
1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm console.
2. Release the screws of e-Box cover and remove it.
3. Take off the collimator control board and insert a new one.
4. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do calibration
and checks.
5. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall the
e-Box and Mainframe back covers.
Mainframe Control Board (P/N: 5085600)

1. Refer to 5.2.2 backup the product & software option files.
3. Release the screws of PCB box cover and remove it.
4. Remove the MCB board and insert a new one.
5. Refer to 5.2.2 to reconfigure the product & software options,
use the license file exported in step1.
6. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do
calibration and checks.
7. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall
the e-Box and Mainframe back covers.
7-26
Replacement
Warning 0117800 may occur when Brivo OEC 715/785/865 system boot up with a new
NOTE MCB installed. Please do not shut down the system by pressing the confirm button.
Instead, hold down Press keys “Ctrl +Shift+Alt+→” to invoke the service tool first in
Administration interface. Then, refer to the chapter 4 and follow the instructions to finish
the calibrate process.
Filament Drive Board (P/N: 5085604)
2. Release the screws of e-Box cover
3. Remove Filament Diver Board and insert new one.
4. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do calibration
and checks.
5. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall the
e-Box and Mainframe back covers.
Mother board (P/N: 5085601)

2. Release the screws of e-Box cover and remove it.
3. Remove the collimator control board, mainframe control
board and Filament Drive Board.
4. Release the screws and remove the whole e-Box.
7-27
5. Unplug all cables connected to the motherboard.

6. Loose the screws and remove the mother board.
7. Remove 3 PWA insert error proofing bolts from defect
mother board and assemble them on new board.
8. Assemble the new mother board and connect the cables
according to the label of the cable and the mark on the
board.
9. Install the PCB box and insert the collimator control
board, mainframe control board and Filament Drive
Board. Install the PCB box cover and C-Arm console
cover.
10. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that the
system works normally.
kV control board (P/N: 5085610)

1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm
console.
2. Unplug all cables connected to kV control
board (KJ1, KJ2, KJ3, KJ4, KJ5, KJ6, KJ7).
3. Release the four screws that secured the
board. Replace the new kV control board.
4. Connect all cables.
5. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and
chapter 4 to do calibration and checks.
6. After calibration and check, shut down
system and reinstall the Mainframe back
cover.
7-28
Replacement
IGBT inverter module (P/N: 5085408)

1. Turn off the system power.
2. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm
console.
3. Loose the four screws and remove
the shield cover.
Do not touch the IGBT inverter module, unless the power of DC Bus capacitor has been
CAUTION completely removed and they have been discharged completely.
4. Disconnect all cables connected to IGBT

board and the cables to the fan.
5. Remain the screws on the board after
disconnect the cable. Be careful not to break
the pins.
6. Loose the screws that secured the IGBT
module and replace a new one.
7. Connect all cables to IGBT module.
8. Reassembly the shield cover and the rear
cover of console.
Make sure that all cables are connected before you power on the system. Otherwise, the
WARNING
IGBT assembly will be damaged.
9. Power on the system. Take exposure and verify the system works normally.
7-29
PWA, UPDOWN BOARD (P/N: 5085607)

1. Remove the rear cover and front cover of the C-Arm
console.
2. Disconnect all the cables of Updown Board.
3. Remove the screws that secure Updown board to
chassis.
4. Remove old Updown Board and replace a new one.
5. Plug the cables to corresponding connectors.
6. Reinstall the covers. Restart system and press lift
and down vertical column switches to verify
Updaown board is functional.
Power Distribution Unit Board (PDU) (P/N: 5085606)

1. Power off the system and disconnect Workstation’s
AC plug from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the covers of the Workstation.
3. Remove the shield cover of PDU
4. Disconnect the cables from the PCB board.
5. Remove screws of PDU board.
6. Replace PDU board with a new one.
7. Put the insulation washer and new PDU board on
position and tighten the screws.
8. Plug the wires in the corresponding socket and bind
the cables.
9. The default power supply is AC 220V power input. If
your power supply is 110V, adjust the jumpers (J2
and J3). J2 is for 220V, J3 is for 110V. Refer to
chapter 3.5 for details.
10. Refer to chapter 4.9 to perform power input
tolerance check and calibration (if needed).
11. Reinstall the covers of console and restart system to confirm system can power on and take
exposure. Check all functions can work normally.
7-30
Replacement
System Interface Board (P/N: 5085605)

1. Power off system and refer to 7.3.4 remove Workstation back, side, front covers
2. Disconnect the cables related to system interface board
3. Release 4 secure screws under cabinet, and then pull out cabinet from Workstation frame.
4. Release 5 screws which secure System Interface Board and replace a new one.
Cabinet
5. Connect cables and assemble the cabinet.

6. Assemble Workstation front, side covers.
7. Power on system and check the system can boot up functionally.
Mainframe Control Panel Kit (including membrane, display board and support board) (P/N:
5075907)
1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm.
2. Disconnect all cables connected to control panel.
3. Loose the screws that secure the control panel and remove the metal shield strips. Then remove
the control panel.
4. Replace a new control panel and connect the cables. Install the C-Arm cover.
5. Power on the system. Pressing the buttons and verify that relative indicator can light.
7-31
Workstation Control Panel Kit (5075908)

1. Remove all screws that secure the front upper cover.
2. Disconnect the cable connected with the

membrane keyboard. Remove the front upper cover.
3. Remove the screws that secure the membrane

keyboard.
4. Reinstall a new Workstation control panel kit.
5. Reassemble the membrane keyboard in the new
upper cover.
6. Remove the screws that secure the rear upper
cover. Remove the rear upper cover.
7. Replace the new upper cover kits and install them in
reverse sequence.
The torque of the screws that secure the top covers is 2.5Nm.
NOTE
7-32
Replacement
7.3.9. Parts in Computer and Peripheral

Perform the procedures below to replace the parts of computer.
1. Power off the system and disconnect Workstation’s AC plug
from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the rear cover, side covers and front cover of the
Workstation.
3. Unplug the cables from the computer. Loosen the screws of
the computer cover. Lift up and remove the cover.
4. Replace the FRU parts (such as the hard disk, display card, Memory Bank, mother board, image
grabber card and Chassis Power) in the computer.
7-33
Chassis Power
Mother Board
Slot for Display Card

Com3
(Extend to rear of
computer, then to
Memory Bank MCB)
Com3 Jumper
SATA ports Setting
Hard Disk
Power on cable
(Connect to PDU)
Communication flat cable shall be connected to Com3 port and Com3

NOTE Jumper setting shall be same as the picture on left.
Replacing computer mother board need reload WKS Operation System

and Application Software, and then need request new licence key to
load product configuration and software options for new Host ID.
Replacing Hard disk need to get existing licence file for product
configuration and software options, so license and setting backup is
needed.
Cut off the binding tie before removing the memory bank. And replace a new one to
secure the memory bank after the replacement.
CD/DVD Rom is an option part, so upgrade software need use USB CD/DVD Rom with Part
No# 5075511 on none CD/DVD Rom system.
During replacement of the Hard Disk, connect system SATA cable to SATA1, DVD ROM SATA cable to other
SATA ports. After replacement of hard Disk, you should reinstall both OS and Application software. Refer
to section 5.3.
5. Power on the system. After login the Patient information screen, enter the patient information and
verify that you can enter normally. Create a new exam and take exposure. Verify the system can work
normally and the image will display on the left monitor.
6. If you have replaced the Hard Disk and backup the user data, you should also verify that the original
user data and images are remained in the system.
7-34
Replacement
Peripheral
According to the drawing attached to the computer to install the mouse (connect to port4) and DVD RW
(connect to 24 and 25).
After replacing the mouse, power on the system and move the mouse. Verify that the mouse can
move freely.
After replacing the DVD R/W, power on the system and perform CD/DVD check according to section
3.7.1.
7-35
7.3.10. Exposure Indicator (5331638)

Perform the procedures below to replace exposure indicator:
1. For Brivo OEC 715/785: Release the 2 screws on the strip cover. Remove the strip cover.
For Brivo OEC 865: remove the Monitor back Cover.
Brivo OEC 715/785 Brivo OEC 865

2. Unplug the cable connected to the indicator. And
then remove the four screws on the sheet metal
support of the indicator.
3. Loose the three screws and then you can

remove the exposure indicator and replace it
with a new one. Assemble the sheet metal
support back onto monitors. Then assemble the
strip covers back.
4. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify

that the exposure indicator lights during
exposure.
7-36
Replacement
7.3.11. Monitors
To prevent monitor power lost, a binding is used to fix the monitor power plug (see the
CAUTION picture in step6). The binding is provided with the monitor FRU. Make sure the binding is still
used after the monitor replacement.
Perform the procedures below to replace the monitors.
1. For Brivo OEC865 need remove monitor back
covers.
2. Loosen the screw and remove the monitor

receptacle access cover. Cut the tying strip on
power cable and pull out the two cables. Make
mark on cables to identify which monitor they
should connect to.
3. Remove the sheet metal support of the exposure indicator.

For Brivo OEC 715/785 need remove the strip cover of the exposure indicator wiring firstly.
4. Loosen the screws of the block that secure the

cables. And then loosen the screws on the
sheet metal support and remove it.
5. Release the four screws on the monitor and remove the monitor.
7-37
Brivo OEC715/785 Brivo OEC865

6. Install the new monitor and reset all parts and cables. Make sure the binding is still used after the
monitor replacement.
7. Power on the system. The left monitor of Workstation will display GE logo screen. The right monitor will
enter into the PATIENT INFORMATION Screen automatically. Perform the brightness and contrast
adjustment in section 4.8 if necessary.
7.3.12. CCD Camera

Dangerous voltage levels are present when covers are removed from the C-Arm.
WARNING
To prevent ESD damage to both the old and the new CCD Camera and CCU, make sure that
CAUTION you are grounded with a properly functioning write strap before handling any ESD sensitive
electronic components.
1. Power off the system and position the C-Arm for easy access.
2. Remove the Image intensifier up cover.
3. Release the plug secure screws and unplug Camera cables.
4. Remove the upper counter balance.
5. Remove 3 camera secure screws and the old camera from the Image intensifier. Pay attention to
original mounting direction.
7-38
Replacement
Secure screws
Secure screws

6. Unwrap and prepare new camera to be assembled immediately in the next step.
Be careful not to touch the camera lens or IMAGE INTENSIFIER output window and keep
NOTE both of them clear without any impurity.
7. Assemble the new Camera on the I.I, and tighten 3 camera fastening screws. Pay attention to the
mounting direction of camera on IMAGE INTENSIFIER as original.
8. Reinstalled upper counter balance.
9. Connect the Camera Head Cables and fix them.
10. Refer to 7.3.2 calibration matrix and chapter 4 to do calibration and checks.
11. After calibration and check, shut down system and reinstall covers removed in above steps.
7.3.13. Image Intensifier with power supply

Perform the procedures below to replace the Image Intensifier with power supply (P/N: 5075929 for Brivo
OEC 715/785, 5075930 for Brivo OEC 865).
1. Position the C-Arm for easy access. Remove the Image Intensifier cover. Disconnect all cables connect
CCD camera and Image intensifier Then remove CCD camera, all counter weight.
7-39
2. Loose the four fastening screws of Image Intensifier.
3. Take out both new and old Image intensifier power supply by releasing two secure screws, refer to
Image intensifier power supply replace procedure.
4. Install new Image intensifier on C-Arm.
Be carefully when disassemble the
NOTE Image intensifier and make cables pass
through the Image intensifier housing to
avoid Image Intensifier drop.
Be careful not to touch the camera lens
or IMAGE INTENSIFIER output window
and keep both of them clear without any
impurity.
5. Reassemble Image intensifier power supply, CCD camera, counter weight and connect all cables.
Ensure the cable tightly connect to the Image intensifier Power Supply. False connection
NOTE will lead to no image or image vibration in Fluoro.

7-40
Replacement
7.3.14. Image Intensifier Power supply

There’s another FRU for Image intensifier power supply (P/N: 5075009). During the replacement of the
power supply, replace the new power supply after step2.
1. Remove Image intensifier cover, and then disconnect all cables connected to the power supply
and CCD Camera. Remove 2 secure screws of power supply on Image intensifier housing.
2. Take out and replace a new power supply.

3. Connect the cables and reassemble the Image intensifier cover.
Ensure the cable tightly connect to the Image intensifier Power Supply. Virtual connection
NOTE
will lead to no image or image vibration in Fluoro.
7-41
7.3.15. UPS (5075513)

1. Power off the system and
disconnect Workstation’s AC plug
from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the rear cover, left and
right side covers of the Workstation.
3. Open the Power Distribution
package.
4. Disconnect the power cable
connected to UPS. Use the handle
to remove the UPS.
5. Release 6 secure screws of the
baffle, and then remove UPS.
6. Plug the UPS battery connector of new UPS.

7. Cut off the other end of the power supply cable and strip off 3 wire ends.
8. Reassemble the UPS and connect the cable.

9. Connect the interconnect cable to C-Arm. Plug the power cord into appropriate AC receptacle.
10. Power on the system. Verify that the system can power on normally. Power off the system. Verify
that the system can shut down without error.
11. Install all the covers of the Workstation.
7-42
Replacement
7.3.16. Misc. Parts

Rectifier Bridge (P/N: 5329275)
1. Power system
2. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the
three screws and open the package box. The
parts are on the back of the package.
3. Disconnect the cables connected to the rectifier
bridge.
4. Loose the screw and replace a new part.

AC +
5. Plug the cables to the relative jacks.
6. Reassemble all the parts.
_ AC
system can work normally.
7-43
Drive Power transformer (P/N: 5085805)

2. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm.
3. Remove the kV control board according to 7.3.6.
4. Cut off the binding tie. Disconnect the wires of the
transformer, which are connected to J2.
5. Loose the screws and replace a new transformer. Connect the
wires and bind the wires with the binding tie to make a good
layout.
6. Reassemble all the parts.
system can work normally.
Main Transformer (P/N: 5085803)

1. Power off the system and disconnect Workstation’s AC plug from the AC receptacle.
2. Remove the rear cover, left and right side covers and front cover of the Workstation.
3. Move out the computer.
4. Cut off the binding tie. Disconnect the wires of the
transformer, which are connected to J1 and J2.
5. Loose the secure screws and remove the
transformer.
6. Replace a new one. Connect the wires and bind them
with binding tie to make a good wire layout.
7. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that
the Workstation and C-Arm complete software boot
and initialization without error reported on their
displays. Select the film mode, take exposure with
80mAs, 110kVp. Verify that the system can work
normally.
7-44
Replacement
Start Up transformer (P/N: 5085804)

1. Remove the rear cover of Workstation. Release the three secure screws and open the package
box.
2. Cut off the binding tie. Disconnect the wires of the transformer, which are connected to PDU
board PJ12/PJ13.
3. Loose the secure screws and remove the transformer.

4. Replace a new one. Connect the wires and make a good wire layout.
5. Power on the system. Verify that the Workstation and C-Arm complete software boot and
initialization with no errors reported on their displays.
7-45
DC Power Supply (5085800/ 5085801)

1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the three screws and open the package box. The
parts are on the back of the package.
MISC, DC POWER MISC, DC POWER

SUPPLY +5V, +12V SUPPLY +5V,
AND +24V (P/N: +15V,-15V AND
5085801) +24V (P/N:
5085800)
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the power supply. Loose the screws and replace a new part.
3. Connect the cables according to the labels. Reassemble all parts.
DC bus capacitor (P/N: 5329278)
1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the three screws and open the package box. The
part is on the back of the package.
There are two capacitors here but only one in FRU kit. Please identify the trouble for the part to determine
the quantity of FRU parts.
7-46
Replacement
Do not touch the capacitors unless power has been completely removed and they have
CAUTION been discharged.
2. Disconnect the cables. Release the secured screw and remove the capacitor.
3. Replace a new one. Reassemble all the parts.
4. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that the system can work normally.
Resonant Capacitor (P/N: 5329281) and DC bus fuse (P/N: 5329279)

1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm. Release the three screws and open the package box.
2. Disconnect the cables connected to the resonant capacitor or DC bus fuse. Loose the screws and
replace a new one.
Resonant Capacitor
DC bus fuse
3. Power on the system and take exposure. Verify that the system can work normally.
7-47
Main Power on Breaker

Brivo OEC715/785/865 provides 110V breaker (P/N: 5085809) and 220V breaker (P/N: 5331605).
1. Remove the rear cover of the Workstation. Unplug the cable connected to the circuit breaker.
2. Loose the screws and remove the breaker. Then replace a new breaker.
3. Connect the cables to the breaker and reassemble the parts.

C-Arm Power Filter (P/N: 5331600)

There are 2 power filters in Brivo OEC715/785/865. One is behind the mainframe package box, the other
is in Workstation.
Power filter in Mainframe
1. Remove the rear cover of the C-Arm console
first.
2. Open the mainframe package box to access the
power filter.
3. Unplug the cable connected to the filter.
4. Loose the screws and remove the filter. Replace
a new part and connect the cable according to
the schematic on the filter.
5. Reassemble the new parts. Power on the
system.
6. Verify that the Workstation and C-Arm complete
software boot and initialization with no errors
7-48
Replacement
Power filter in Workstation

1. Remove the Workstation rear cover.
2. Unplug the cable connected to the filter.
3. Loose the screws and remove the filter. Replace
a new part and connect the cable according to
the schematic on the filter.
4. Reassemble the parts. Power on the system.
5. Verify that the Workstation and C-Arm complete
software boot and initialization with no errors
Button and Switch Kit (P/N: 5075922)

This kit includes 4 parts, Battery Power Switch (5085833), MISC, WKS POWER ON BUTTON (5085810), MISC,
C_ARM KEY SWITCH (5085817), Power on Indicator (P/N: 5085836)
Battery Power Switch (5085833):
1. Power off system, and unplug the power cord form
socket.
2. Remove the rear cover of the Workstation. Connector
3. Unplug the wires connected to the Battery Power Switch

4. Release the secure ring of Battery Power Switch.
5. Remove Battery Power Switch and replace a new one.
6. Connect the AC cord to the socket.
7. Power on system, and then turn of the power on breaker,
press Battery Power Switch to verify UPS can be turned Fixed Ring
off.
7-49
WKS Power on Button (5085810)

1. Power off system, and unplug the power cord form Lock Handle
socket.
2. Remove the rear and side covers of the Workstation.
3. Unplug the connector to connect WKS power on
button.
4. Release the secure ring and lock handle of WKS
power on button to Remove WKS Power Switch.
5. Replace a new one and connect the connector.
6. Assemble the Workstation front cover. Secure Ring Connector
7. Connect the AC cord to the socket. Verify that Power
on Button is available.
8. Assemble all other Workstation covers.
MISC, C-Arm Key Switch (5085817)

Secure Ring
socket.
2. Remove the rear and side covers of the Workstation.
3. Unplug the wires connected to C-Arm Key Switch.
4. Release the secure ring of C-Arm Key Switch.
5. Remove C-Arm Key Switch and replace a new one.
6. Connect the AC cord to the socket. Verify that the
power on indicator will light.
Power on Indicator (P/N: 5085836)

socket.
2. Remove the rear cover of the Workstation.
7-50
Replacement
3. Remove the 3 screws of the plate and remove the metal

plate to easily access to power on indicator.
4. Unplug the wires connected to the power on indicator.

5. Release the secure ring of power indicator.
6. Remove the indicator and replace a new one.
7. Connect the AC cord to the socket. Verify that the power
on indicator will light.
7-51
7.3.17. Interconnect WKS (5085708)

Interconnect Cable Workstation (PN#: 5085708):
Connector List:
Connector To
To 5085781 To 5085708 (connector on 5085781)
PE GND
PJ3 Power Distribution Unit Board
PJ6 Power Distribution Unit Board
Ethernet Computer
Cable
RS-485 Computer
Replacement procedure:
1. Remove Workstation back, side, front covers refer to section 7.3.4.
2. Remove all cable pressures.
3. Cut all able ties, and unplug the all connecters.

4. Assemble the new cable and route it according to original.
Keep new cable routed as original to ensure the package of workstation can be open and
NOTE closed smoothly.
5. Install all of the cable pressures.

6. Recheck all connectors are correctly connected and cables are well routed.
7. Power on the system, and take a shot.
8. If system works well, turn off system and assemble all covers.
7-52
Replacement
Interconnect Cable Mainframe: (PN#: 5085431)

Connector List:
Connector To
Emergency Switch MF_AC_28V_N
Emergency Switch
Emergency Switch MF_AC_28V_L
J5 To exposure indicator
MBD MX7 To Mainframe Mother Board
AC220V_L J4
AC220V_N J4
PE GND
N/A (Y/G Cable) GND
1. Remove Mainframe back, front covers refer to section 7.
2. Cut all of cable ties and unplug the connectors
Interconnect Cable Workstation Emergency Switch AC220V

3. Remove the four screws securing the casting, and then remove the four screws securing the inner
socket to take out the head of GigE Ethernet cable.
7-53
4. Replace a new cable and remove the four screws securing the inner socket to assemble the head of
GigE Ethernet cable.
5. Fasten the four screws securing the inner socket and securing screws of casting.
6. Connect all of cables and route all cables as original.
Keep new cable routed as original to ensure the package of mainframe can be open and
NOTE closed smoothly.
7. Recheck all connectors are correctly connected and cables are well routed.
8. Power on the system, and take a shot.
9. If system works well, turn off system and assemble all covers.
7.3.18. Bundle cable: (5085700)

Connector List (Mainframe Base Side):
Connector To
GigE Plug Interconnect Cable MF
MX2 MF Mother Board
GND GND
MX8
MX10 MF Mother Board
MX6 MF Mother Board
Yellow T1
Red Cap
GND GND
MX5
GND GND
MX4 MF Mother Board
7-54
Replacement
Connector List (C-arm_I.I. Side):

Connector To
5085725 (GigE Plug) Camera
Camera Camera
I.I. GND To I.I. Power supply
I.I. To I.I.
Connector List (C-arm_Monoblock Side):

Connector To
Laser J7 Laser Aimer
Monoblock Monoblock
Inverter Monoblock
Seal signal Monoblock
J10 Remove Filter Proximity SW
J11 Remove Filter Proximity SW
Monoblock GND Monoblock
Collimator Collimator
1. Move C-arm to a clear area.
2. Remove mainframe front and back covers, refer to above sections.
3. Open mainframe package.
4. Cut all of bundle cable related cable ties in Mainframe base
5. Disconnect all related cables.
6. Remove 3 securing screws to fix interconnect cable bracket.
7-55
7. Remove two cable sleeves.
8. Refer to section 7.3 remove Monoblock, collimator and Image Intensifier.

9. Remove the Monoblock support and pull out all cables via C-arm carefully.
After removing Monoblock, collimator and Image
NOTE Intensifier, C-cam will in unbalance status. The
back of C-arm will lower than normal. Take care
anything would be pressured by C-arm. Find wood
block to support the mainframe is appreciated.
10. Let C-arm in Up/Down position and Down/Up position to make

the cable go through the C-arm.
7-56
Replacement
11. Install Monoblock support, monoblock, collimator and Image intensifier.
After removing Monoblock, collimator and Image

NOTE Intensifier, C-cam will in unbalance status. The
back of C-arm will lower than normal. Take care
anything would be pressured by C-arm. Find wood
block to support the mainframe is appreciated.
12. Connect relative cables, install cable sleeves, cable supports,

route all cables, install all other parts which were removed on
above steps.
13. Power on system to ensure system boot up successfully.
7-57
7.3.19. Fuse kit (5075919)

The kit contains 6 kinds of fuse. You can choose the fuse to replace according to the requirement.
P/N Qt’y Description Where Used
PROTECTION FUSE, 1A, 5
50856 PWA, SYSTEM INTERFACE
46-267217P29 1.0 x 20 mm , TIME DELAY, F2
05 BOARD
250V, 2AG
PROTECTION FUSE,
50856 PWA, SYSTEM INTERFACE
46-267217P30 1.0 3.15A, 5 x 20 mm , TIME F1
05 BOARD
DELAY, 250V, 2AG
Installed in Fuse soket
MISC, FUSE MODEL 6.3A,
5331602 1.0 N/A model on Workstation U-
EVR
TYPETRACK
FUSE 250V 0.5A 50856 PWA, POWER
5439918 1.0 F1, F6, F8
5X20mm 06 DISTRIBUTION UNIT
FUSE 1.25A 250V 50856
5457478 5.0 PWA, MOTHER BOARD F3, F4, F5, F7, F8
5X20MM 01
FUSE 2.5A 250V 50856
5459754 3.0 PWA, MOTHER BOARD F1, F2, F6
5X20MM 01
7-58
Replacement
7.3.20. Linear Actuator (5075921)

1. Remove the C-Arm console covers. Rotate the
C-Arm to the horizontal position. Lock the
orbital, wig-wag and lateral brakes.
2. Loosen 2 screws from horizontal brake handle

and remove the handle.
3. Remove the screws of the cross arm cover

and remove the cover.
4. Loose the screws and remove the rear plate. Remove the pin in the shaft.
5. Put something (Wood strip or other kind of support) under console to prevent the whole base to tilt
7-59
backward.
6. Loosen the screws on cable holder and
release the cable. Draw out the C-Arm and
Cross-arm assembly slowly.
7. Use something (for example, wood bar) to

block up the C-Arm. And put something on
ground and on left of base (for example,
cardboard). Overturn the C-Arm console to left
side.
8. Remove the bottom cover under the linear actuator. And then remove the lower shaft.
9. Unplug the J4 from the up down drive board. Cut off the 2 wires. Cut off the binding tie and then draw
out the cable from the hole.
7-60
Replacement
10. Open the package box. Remove the screws on the top end of external column, and remove the side
cover. Remove the plug on inner column. Screw a M4 screw into the screw hold on actuator upper pin
and draw the shaft out.
Upper shaft structure:
Upper Shaft
Screw M4 screw in here and

Lower Shaft
pull out upper shaft
7-61
11. Draw out the linear actuator from the bottom.
The actuator is assembled by two cross shafts (Upper shaft and Lower Shaft). To install
NOTE the actuator must let the length of new actuator is same as the replaced one.
12. Replace a new linear actuator and reassemble the parts. Plug the wire into the connector. And then
insert the connector to J4 of the up down drive board.
13. Insert the pin with M4 screw into the hole and check if the pin is in the axis of the linear actuator.
Release the M4 screw and tighten the plug on the hole. Lock the pin on the bottom of the linear
actuator and put the cover back.
14. Turn back the base assembly and reassemble all the parts.
15. Connect the interconnect cable and power on the system. Press the up and down key on control
panel and verify that the C-Arm can rise and drop freely.
7-62
Replacement
7.3.21. Switches
Hand switch (P/N: 5085113)
1. Remove the rear and front cover of the Mainframe.
Disconnect the cable from the Hand switch.
2. Cut the bundles that secured the Hand switch cable.
3. Remove the Hand switch and replace a new one.
4. Reinstall Mainframe front and rear covers.
5. Power on the system. Press the hand switch to take
exposure. Verify that the image will display on the left
monitor.
Footswitch (P/N: 5085096/ 5085115)

2. Insert the footswitch to the connector.
3. Power on system.
4. Press the footswitch to take exposure.
5. Verify that the image will be displayed on the left monitor.
6. For 5085115, press image save Button can save an image displayed on the left monitor.
7-63
Emergency Switch (P/N: 5330849)

1. Remove the rear and front cover of the C-Arm console.
2. Pull out the spring clip and release the emergency switch.
Spring clip
Buckle for switch head
3. Disconnect the cable connected to mounting of the

emergency switch.
4. Loose the screws and remove the base and switch. Then
replace a new one.
Ensure the switch head is buckled by the
NOTE support.
5. Power on the system. Press the emergency switch, vertical

column operation will cease and X-rays will be disabled.
Rotate as arrow indication to release the emergency switch.
You can continue to use the system.
7-64
Replacement
7.3.22. Others
Please refer to chapter3 for the replacement of these FRU parts.
Part Number Part Description Section Number
5085235 ASM,SKIN SPACER 3.7.7
2418430 Component, UP-D897 Thermal Printer, EVR 3.7.4
5330067 Component, UP-990AD Thermal Printer, EVR 3.7.4

5075816 ASM, MONOBLOCK COVER WITH LASER AIMER KIT 3.7.2
5332898 Component, Video distributor for external DVI video output, EVR 3.7.3
5330473-01 ASM, LASER AIMER, 9 INCH ENGLISH WITH ALL LANGUAGES SUPPLEMENT 3.7.2
5085115 ASM, DOUBLE FOOT SWITCH,EVR 3.7.8
5075505 Component, JPI grid for 715,785 3.7.6
5330066 Component, Grid, EVR 3.7.6
Please refer to below table to identify power cable and plug to related country:
Item Country FRU Part # Cable with plug Part #_Plug Plug Type Voltage
1 Albania 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
2 Algeria 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
3 Argentina 5407045 N/A IRAM 2073 220V
4 Australia 5407042 N/A AS/NZS 3112 230V
5 Austria 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
6 Bahrain 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
7 Bangladesh 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
8 Belarus 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
9 Belgium 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
10 Bolivia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
11 Bosnia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
12 Brazil 5407039 N/A NBR 14136 127V
13 Brazil 5449309 2415149 NBR 14136 220V
14 Brunei 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 240V
15 Burkina Faso 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
7-65
16 Cambodia 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
17 Cameroon 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
18 Chile 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
19 China 5408320 N/A GB 1002 220V
20 Croatia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
21 Colombia 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 110V
22 Costa Rica 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 120V
23 Cote d’Ivoire 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
24 Cyprus 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 240V
25 Czech Repulblic 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
26 Egypt 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
27 France 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
28 Germany 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
29 Greece 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
30 Guatemala 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 110V
31 Honduras 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 110V
32 HongKong 5407032 5399115 BS 546 220V
33 HongKong 5407033 BS 1363A 220V
34 HongKong 5408320 N/A GB 1002 220V
35 Hungary 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
36 India 5407032 5399115 BS 546 230V
37 Indonesia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
38 Indonesia 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
39 Iraq 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
40 Iraq 5407032 5399115 BS 546 230V
41 Iraq 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
42 Ireland 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
43 Israel 5407050 N/A SI-32 220V
44 Italy 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
45 Jamaica 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 110V
46 Japan 5407035 N/A NEMA 5-20P 100V
47 Japan 5407036 N/A L6-20P 200V
7-66
Replacement
48 Jordan 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
49 Jordan 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
50 Kazakhstan 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
51 Kuwait 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 220V
52 Laos 5407038 N/A NEMA 5-15P 220V
53 Lebanon 5407032 5399115 BS 546 220V
54 Lebanon 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 220V
55 Libya 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
56 Libya 5407032 5399115 BS 546 220V
57 Luxembourg 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
58 Macedonia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
59 Malaysia 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 240V
60 Malta 5407032 5399115 BS 546 230V
61 Malta 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
62 Mexico 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 127V
63 Montenegro 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
64 Morocco 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
65 New Zealand 5407042 N/A AS/NZS 3112 230V
66 Netherlands 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
67 Nigeria 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
68 Oman 5407031 2415149 CEE7 240V
69 Oman 5407032 5399115 BS 546 240V
70 Pakistan 5407032 5399115 BS 546 230V
71 Panama 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 120V
72 Paraguay 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
73 Peru 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
74 Philippines 5407038 N/A NEMA 5-15P 220V
75 Poland 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
76 Portugal 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
77 Qatar 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 240V
78 Romania 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
79 Russia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
7-67
80 Saudi Arabia 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 220V
81 Serbia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
82 Singapore 5407032 5399115 BS 546 230V
83 Singapore 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
84 Slovakia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
85 South Africa 5407032 5399115 BS 546 220V
86 South Korea 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
87 Spain 5407031 2415149 CEE7 230V
88 Switzerland 5407048 5399117 SEV 1011 230V
89 Taiwan 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 110V
90 Thailand 5407038 N/A NEMA 5-15P 220V
91 Trinidad & Tobago 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 115V
92 Tunisia 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
93 Turkey 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
94 Ukraine 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
95 United Arab Emirates 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 220V
96 United Kingdom 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 230V
97 Uruguay 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
98 Venezuela 5408318 N/A NEMA 5-15P 120V
99 Vietnam 5407031 2415149 CEE7 220V
100 Vietnam 5407033 5399116 BS 1363A 220V
101 United States 5407035 N/A NEMA 5-20P 120V
7-68
Chapter8. Periodic Maintenance
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product Service Manual
8.1. Overview
This procedure describes how to conduct performance checks and maintenance procedures. Use the
procedure in conjunction with PM checklist in section 9.2. Follow the procedures in the order they appear
here and record all required information on the checklist.
Serious injury and property damage can result from incorrectly performed service procedures. Observe
all operating and safety procedures in this document.
Procedures should be performed by service personnel specifically trained by GE HUALUN
WARNING
Medical Systems, Inc. to calibrate the Brivo OEC 715/785/865 C-Arm and Workstation.
8.1.1. Safety
Ingress of Fluids
The system must never be operated or stored in locations where conductive fluids, like
WARNING water and saline solution, might spill on the equipment.
Always unplug the AC power cable from the wall outlet before cleaning the equipment. Do not allow
water, soap, or other liquids to drip into the equipment and cause short circuits, electric shock and fire
hazards.
Unauthorized Modifications
Under no circumstances should the safety interlock in the system be bypassed, jumped, or otherwise
disabled.
All GE Healthcare systems comply with International Electro Technical Commission safety
standard IEC-60601. Do not connect any external device to the system that does not
NOTE meet the requirements of IEC-60601. Only devices provided or approved by GE HUALUN
Medical Systems, Inc. should be connected to the system.
Motorized Mechanical Operation
The Vertical Column is motorized and should be observed continuously during operation to avoid
pinching or colliding with people and object.
If covers are removed, use extreme care when operating motorized features. Do not carelessly place
objects on the equipment or bump or lean against the equipment. Do not wear loose clothing that may
be caught by mechanical mechanisms. Keep hands and fingers clear of motorized equipment while the
motors are in operation.
Electrical Shock
This system can generate lethal voltages. Practice safe electrical testing procedures
WARNING when performing periodic maintenance procedures.
After taking X-rays, the high voltage cables can retain a lethal charge, even if you power
down the system. Even though the contacts are recessed, high voltages can arc several
WARNING
inches from their terminals if the cables are removed from the connector wells. Use
caution when disconnecting high voltage cables even when the power is turned off. If
you remove these connections, immediately discharge their contacts against the high
voltage tank case (ground).
8-2
Periodic Maintenance
X-radiation Exposure
The X-ray tube assembly produces X-radiation when energized. Never operate this device without X-ray
shielding in place. Use lead shielding and draping to protect personnel.
Lead aprons, radiation monitors, and appropriate radiation shields must be utilized for
WARNING the protection of all personnel in the vicinity while performing tests. Living human
anatomy should never be used as a phantom or demonstration aid. Do not produce
radiation in hallways.
Many of the PCB's in this system contain components, which are sensitive to Electro-
CAUTION
Static Discharge (ESD). Observe ESD safety procedures.
8.1.2. Tools and Test Equipment

In addition to standard service tools and test equipment, the following special tools and test equipment
are required to complete the PM procedure.
Standard Tool
Item Tool
1 Oscilloscope Tektronix 2236 or equivalent
2 Multimeter or equivalent
4 Lead Apron
5 kV meter
6 Dosimeter
7 Ampere meter or equivalent
9 Erasable marker (whiteboard marker)
10 mAs meter
11 Precision flat head screwdriver (3mm or less) to adjust camera iris, focus
12 Transparent adhesive tape, with cutter (or need scissor or knife to cut the tape)
Special Tool
Item Tool GE part number
1 Three copper sheets, each 1mm thick 00-877682-01
2 9-inch BAFT Tool 00-878105-02
3 PWA, extend board 5085609
8-3
8.2. PM Checklist
Brivo OEC 715/785/865 PM Checklist

Administrative Information
Medical Facility Information Field Service Engineer Information
Hospital or Clinic Name: FSE name:
Address: City:
Employee SSO:
State: Country:
Postal Code/Zip: Contact Person:
Installation Date:
Contact Phone: Department:
System Configuration
Workstation Software Version: MCB Software Version:
Serial Number: System ID:
Safety Inspection
Antistatic Drag-wires Footswitch cable and pins
Electrical Plug and power cord Ground Continuity
Interconnect Cable and Connector
PC Maintenance
PC Clean Yes No Replace Cell Battery (If needed) Yes No
System Function Checks
Power On Checks Pass Fail
C-Arm Checks Workstation Checks
Mechanical Movement: Pass Fail Mechanical Movement : Pass Fail
Key Switch: Pass Fail Workstation Operation: Pass Fail
C-Arm Controls: Pass Fail UPS Battery Performance Check: Pass Fail
Emergency Switch: Pass Fail System Status Backup: Yes No
X-ray Generator Accuracy Tests
Low Dose:
99kVp@2.0mA: ,
Normal Fluoro:
66kVp@4.0mA: , 110kVp@1.0mA:
HLF:
KV Accuracy (± 7%)
55kVp@4.0mA(Actual 6.0): , 110kVp@4.0mA(Actual 6.0):
Digital spot:
55kVp@4.0mA: , 80kVp@4.0mA: , 110kVp@4.0mA:
Radiography:
55 kVp@40mAs : , 80 kVp@40mAs: , 110 kVp@20mAs:
8-4
Low Dose:
2.0mA@80kVp: ,
Normal Fluoro:
0.1mA@80kVp: , 4.0mA@110kVp: ,
HLF:
4.0mA(Actual 6.0)@110kVp: ,
4.0mA(Actual 4.5)@110KVp: , (Dose Group: Normal 50 and HLF 50)
 mA Accuracy (± 10%) Digital Spot:
3.2mA(Actual 6.4)@80kVp: ,
4.0mA(Actual 10)@110kVp: , ( For 100V/110V/120V input)
4.0mA(Actual 16)@110KVp: , (For 200V/220V/230V/240V input)
Radiography:
For power input: 100V/110V/120V:
40KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): , 110KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): ,,
For power input: 200V/220V/230V/240V
40KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): , 110KVp@40mAs (Actual 10mA): ,
mAs Accuracy(±10%) 40kV, 40mAs: , 110kV, 1mAs: , 110kV, 2mAs: , 110KV, 40mAs: ,
Image Quality Check

Image Intensifier Field Size Check
Mag Mode NORM（210 ±10） MAG1（155 ±8） MAG2 （115 ±8）
Displayed Image Diameter (mm)
Auto Technique Tracking and Image Resolution Check
Auto Technique Tracking Image Resolution
Copper Specification(kVp) Specification (LP/mm)
Measured Adjustment Mag Mode Measured Adjustment
Filters
715/785 865 (kVp) done? (Field Size) (LP/mm) done?
(mm) 718/785 865
1 64±4 62±4 Yes No NORM (9”) ≥ 2.0 ≥2.2 Yes No
2 74±4 72±4 Yes No MAG1 (6”) ≥2.6 ≥3.0 Yes No
3 82±4 80±4 Yes No MAG2 (4.5”) ≥3.1 ≥3.5 Yes No
Shading Correction Check Pass Fail
Dose Check
No adjustment necessary: Measured if
Measured as found:
Dose rate Check 715/785 865 adjusted:
mR/min
4.1±0.3mR/min 3.1±0.3mR/min mR/min
DAP Accuracy Check Pass Fail (Need Calibration) DAP Calibration Done
Reporting
Install Equipment Covers Yes No
Reporting complete Yes No
Periodic maintenance of the system is required to maintain the system lifecycle. The first periodic
maintenance shall be implemented after first 13 months’ use, then it is suggested to do once per year by
a GE qualified service engineer.
8-5
8.3. Administrative Information

Medical Facility Information:
Enter all information about the medical facility where the system is installed.
Field Service Engineer Information:
Enter Field Service Engineer name, Region ID number and Employee ID number.
System Configuration:
Complete each field in the System Configuration section. This section identifies specific information about
the system being maintained.
8.4. Safety Inspection

Follow this procedure to inspect system components. Look for loose, damaged, or missing parts. Check
each component for proper operation.
Electrical circuits inside the equipment use voltages that are capable of causing serious
WARNING injury or death from electrical shock. Use appropriate precautions.
If the system has power applied, power off the system and unplug the C-Arm’s AC power cord from AC
outlet. Remove C-arm and workstation covers as needed.
8.4.1. Antistatic Drag Wires

Check the system’s antistatic drag wires. There is one suspended below the workstation and one
underneath the C-Arm. Both wires must securely attach to the system and not be damaged or
encumbered by debris.
8.4.2. Electrical Plug and power cord

Inspect the C-Arm’s AC power cord and AC line plug for damage and missing parts. Make sure all wiring
insulation is intact. Ensure that there are no broken or frayed wires. Make sure grounding pin is present
on AC line plug, and that all conductors on plug are secure and in good condition.
Some devices such as high voltage cables and electrolytic capacitors can retain a
WARNING dangerous static charge for long periods after power has been removed. Do not touch
these components unless power has been completely removed and they have discharged.
8.4.3. Interconnect cable and Connector

Check the interconnect cable for damage or other problems. Verify that connector on cable mates well
with the connector on C-Arm and that there are no bent or missing pins. Make sure the strain relief
attaches securely to both the interconnect cable and connector.
8.4.4. Footswitch cable and pins

Inspect footswitch cable and verify that the cable, connector and pins are not damaged.
8-6
8.4.5. Ground Continuity

Perform the ground continuity test described below.
WARNING
Do not perform this continuity test with the AC plug connected to a power receptacle.
Connect the Interconnect Cable to the C-Arm and verify continuity between the following:
From To Spec
Workstation
The right-top screw of WorkStation back cover AC Power Plug Ground Pin < 0.5 
Any one of screws to fix Monitor AC Power Plug Ground Pin < 0.5 
Mainframe
Any one of screws on the tube cover AC Power Plug Ground Pin < 0.5 
Any one of screws to fix the Image Intensifier AC Power Plug Ground Pin < 0.5 
Metal surface of central C-arm. AC Power Plug Ground Pin < 0.5 
Comments: Close to the zero mark of orbital.
Metal surface of lock wrench of interconnector cable AC Power Plug Ground Pin < 0.5 
If there is special ground continuity regulation for in used system, FE shall follow local
NOTE regulation and perform the test by Ground Continuity test equipment.
Below is the special regulation for Ground Continuity:
The resistance measured from the ground pin on the power cord to any accessible
conductive surface in the system (e.g., the chasis) shall not exceed 0.3 Ohm per European
norm EN 62353, specification.
The resistance measured from the ground pin on the power cord to any accessible
conductive surface in the system (e.g., the chasis) shall not exceed 0.2 ohms per IEC
60601-1 or equivalent.
8-7
8.5. PC Clean and UPS Performance Check

8.5.1. PC clean
1. Refer to section 7.3.4, remove the workstation back, side, front covers.
2. Remove PC cover.
3. Clean the PC outside and inside.

4. Fasten all PC internal card and cables.
5. Re-plug in cables connected to PC.
Recommend to replace the cell battery regularly after being installed for 3/6/9 years, if
NOTE needed.
8-8
8.5.2. UPS performance check:

1. Power on system, waiting for system boot up completely.
2. Double click UPS Display/Menu button, UPS battery capacity
will be displayed on screen. If the displayed capacity is less
than 3 min, the UPS need be replaced.
3. Login software service tool, in log viewer Tab, in Exception
Code input area input 0408018 then click search button. If
code 0408018 is recorded in log, the UPS also need be
replaced.
UPS Display/Menu Button
4. Reassemble computer cover.

5. Reassemble all workstation covers which were removed in
step1.
8-9
8.6. System Function checks

Check the following areas of the C-Arm and workstation for proper operation.
8.6.1. Perform Power On Checks

WARNING Observe safety procedures when operating motorized features.
Perform the following steps with the system powered up and normally booted.
1. Connect the integrated cable in the C-Arm connector and lock it. Connect the Footswitch cable to the
C-Arm.
2. Plug the AC power cord into the receptacle.
3. Press the system on key located on the C-Arm control panel. Verify that the workstation and C-Arm
complete their software boot and initialization with no errors reported on the workstation and C-Arm
displays.
8.6.2. C-Arm Checks

Mechanical Movement Test:
Refer to section 3.6.2 for C-arm mechanical movement checks.
If wigwag brake can’t prevent Wig Wag motion effectively, or the lock and release
NOTE positions can’t fit as the label indicating, perform below procedure to refresh the force of
wigwag brake.
38.5N<Force of wigwag brake <76.9N
Wigwag brake PM:
1. Pull up the handle far enough (about 3mm) that it clears the fixed shaft.
2. Turn the handle anticlockwise
3. Push down the handle.
8-10
If lateral brake can’t prevent lateral motion effectively, perform below procedure to
NOTE refresh the force of wigwag brake.
54N<Force of wigwag brake <90N
Lateral brake PM:
Set
Screw
Screw cap
Two screws inside Set
Screw
Friction pad
1. Remove screw caps, cover and screws inside.

2. Fasten the screw to refresh the force of brake.
If above step 1/2 can refresh the force, perform below procedure
NOTE
Set screw inside
3. Loose the set screws.

4. Tighten the brake shoe by adjusting the screw adjuster to left in above picture;
5. Check the force of lateral brake and adjust the screw adjuster, until the lateral brake is effective
again.
6. Secure the screw adjuster with the set screws.
7. Reinstall the screws, cover and screw cap which were removed in step1.
8-11
C-Arm Controls Check:

Refer to section 3.6.2 for C-Arm Controls Check.
Perform the following C-Arm control checks:
Some of the following procedures produce X-rays. Take appropriate precautions.
WARNING
X-ray Key/X-ray Switch Functional Test:

Perform the following test to verify that the system’s X-ray and key switches are operating satisfactorily.
WARNING This procedure produces X-rays. Take appropriate precautions.
1. Place the X-ray Keyswitch in STANDBY position ( ). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays are
generated. Press Vertical lift button and verify that vertical lift column is not operational.
2. Place X-ray Keyswitch in XRAYOFF position ( ). Press Handswitch and verify that no X-rays are
generated. Press vertical lift button and verify the vertical lift column is operational.
3. Place X-ray Keyswitch in ON position ( ). Press Handswitch/Footswitch and vertical lift button to
verify X-ray and vertical lift column are enable.
Emergency Switch:
Perform the following test to verify the emergency switch.
1. Press the emergency switch during raising C- Emergency Switch
arm.
2. Verify that vertical column operation and
exposure are disabled.
3. Release the emergency switch. Verify that the
vertical column operation and exposure are
available.
8-12
8.6.3. Workstation Checks

Mechanical Movement:
Refer to 3.6.1 for Workstation mechanical movement check.
Adjust the monitor vertical movement annually, according to below procedure:
NOTE
10N<Force of monitor vertically movement<50N
Monitor vertical movement PM:
1. For 865 need remove monitor back cover.
2. Screw the nut to adjust the tightness of the monitor movement in moderate strength.
Brivo OEC 715/785 Back View Brivo OEC 865 Back View
If friction of monitor horizontal movement is not effective, perform below procedure to
NOTE refresh the friction of monitor horizontal movement.
10N<Force of monitor horizontal movement<50N
Monitor horizontal movement PM:
1. Remove screws on two sides of monitor support
cover.
2. Remove 2 inside screws.
3. Rotate the secure nut clock wisely to increase
friction for horizontal rotation
8-13
Workstation Operation Function Check:

Refer to Refer to 3.6.1 for Workstation operation Function check.
System Status Backup:
Refer to 5.2.6 perform below procedure:
1. Perform integrity check.
2. Backup system Database.
3. Export system setup and administration configuration, if needed.
8.7. X-ray Generator Accuracy Tests

Below tests are to measure the kVp/mA/mAs accuracy of the X-ray generator system.
8.7.1. kVp Accuracy

Refer to section4.2.1 to perform kVp accuracy check and perform KVp calibration if needed.
8.7.2. mA Accuracy
Refer to section4.3.1 to perform mA accuracy check and perform mA calibration if needed.
8.7.3. mAs Accuracy

Refer to section4.4.1 to perform mAs accuracy check and perform mAs calibration if needed.
8-14
8.8. Image Quality check

8.8.1. Field Size Check
1. Select relative field size, open the collimator to the maximum, and take an exposure.
2. Read the BAFT tick mark on the boundary of the image. The size of the image should be within the
range of the values below:
Displayed Image Diameter (mm) 210 ±10 155 ±8 115 ±8
3. If the requirement is not met, you must perform I.I. Field Size Calibration in 4.6.5.
8.8.2. Auto Technique Tracking

1. Select Auto Fluoro mode and the NORM field size via control panel.
2. Open the collimator Iris and leaves completely.
3. Place copper filters on the collimator and take exposure. Verify that the kVp tracks within the range
indicated in table below.
Model Copper Filter Thickness 1mm 2mm 3mm
Brivo OEC 715
kVp range 64±4kVp 74±4kVp 82±4kVp
Brivo OEC 785
Brivo OEC865 kVp range 62±4kVp 72±4kVp 80±4kVp
4. Remove all copper filters.
5. If the kVp is not in the range, refer to 4.6.7 for calibration.
8.8.3. Image Resolution

Use the converging line pairs/millimeter (Lp/mm) tool on the Image Intensifier. Verify the resolution in
Lp/mm is equal to, or greater than the following values:
Field Size NORMAL MAG1 MAG2
Resolution Brivo OEC Brivo OEC Brivo OEC Brivo OEC Brivo OEC Brivo OEC
(Lp/mm) 715/785 865 715/785 865 715/785 865
≥ 2.0 ≥ 2.2 ≥ 2.6 ≥ 3.0 ≥ 3.1 ≥ 3.5
Record test results on PM checklist.

If the resolution check fails, refer to section 4.6.8 for Camera Focus calibration.
8.8.4. Shading Correction Check

Refer to 4.6.9 to perform shading correction check. Perform calibration if needed.
8-15
8.9. Dose Check

8.9.1. Dose Rate Check
Entrance exposure is the amount of radiation available at the entrance point of patient anatomy.
Entrance exposure is measured 9" above the surface of the Image Intensifier in the center of the X-ray
beam. This measurement is used to represent the average thickness of patient anatomy.
1. Using a dosimeter for the measurements. Place the dosimeter probe on the I.I. grid center. Use 2mm
copper to cover the beam path on the X-ray tube. Take exposure in Auto fluoro mode. Dose rate
should be within 4.10.3 mR/min (for Brivo OEC 715/785)/3.1±0.3mR/min (for Brivo OEC 865).
2. Indicate if adjustments were made on the Checklist.
8.9.2. DAP Accuracy Check

Refer to 4.7 to perform DAP accuracy check. Perform the DAP calibration, if needed.
The field size in the form should be measured by field size measure tool.
NOTE
8.10. Reporting
8.10.1. Install Equipment Covers
Install all equipment covers you removed earlier. Make sure all air filters are clean and properly attached
to the covers.
8.10.2. Complete PM Comments

Write any comments important to the PM procedure in the Comments section of the PM Checklist.
8-16
Chapter9. Technical Reference
9.1. Overview
The policy of GE Healthcare is one of continual product development and improvement.
For this reason, GE Healthcare reserves the right to change the operating characteristics and
specifications of newer products at any time, without prior notice, and without incurring any obligation
relating to previously manufactured items.
The specifications listed are limited to general performance and physical data. Specifications of optional
equipment provided by other manufacturers are given in the applicable manuals provided with those
options.
9.2. System Specifications

9.2.1. Safety Classification
Class I, Type B, IEC60601-1
Ordinary protection against ingress of water
Degree of Protection:
 System: IPX0
 Footswitch: IPX8
9.2.2. Environmental Requirements

Operating Conditions:
Temperature: +10°C~+40°C (+50F~+104F)
Transportation and Storage:
Temperature: -20°C~+55°C (-4F~+131F)
Humidity: 10~95% Relative, non-condensing
9.2.3. Power Requirements

Voltage: AC 100V/110V/120V|200V|220V/230V/240V
Frequency: 50Hz/60Hz
Rated Momentary Line Current (shorter than 5s):
 30A (100V/110V/120V)
9-2
Technical Reference
 28A (200V)
 25A (220V/230V/240V)
Rated Continuous Line Current:
 20A (100V/110V/120V)
 12A (200V)
 10A (220V/230V/240V)
Maximum line impedance: 0.3  |0.6  |0.6 
NOTE 16A power supply is required in China. And 20 A is required in Japan.
9.2.4. Circuit Breaker

Breaker for 110V:
 Rated Voltage AC 250 V
 Frequency 50 Hz /60 Hz
 Rated Current 20A (AC)
Breaker for 220V:
 Rated Voltage AC 250 V
 Frequency 50 Hz /60 Hz
 Rated Current 12A (AC)
9.2.5. Earth leakage current

Normal condition 0.5mA
Single fault condition 0.5mA
9-3
9.2.6. Physical Specifications

C-Arm
SID 39.3’’ (100cm)

Horizontal travel 8’’ (20cm)
Vertical travel 17.5’’ (44.5cm)
Orbital rotation 120°(90°underscan /30°over scan)
Lateral rotation ±205°
Wig-Wag 25°(±12.5°)
Weight 260±10kg
9-4
Technical Reference
Workstation
Weight: 170±10kg
Option Weight
Laser Aimer (tube) 0.65±0.05kg
Laser Aimer (Image Intensifier) 2.15±0.2kg
Film Cassette holder 1.35±0.1kg
Video Distributor 2.3±0.2kg
Skin Spacer 0.35±0.1kg
Removable filter 0.30±0.1 kg
Removable grid 1.60±0.1 kg
19” Mono LCD Monitor 5.0±0.05kg
9-5
9.3. Specification of Key Components

9.3.1. X-Ray Generator
Nominal electric power 2.0kw (100kV, 20mA, 0.1s)
Maximum electric power
Normal Fluoro 440W (110kV, 4mA)
High Level Fluoro (HLF) 660W (110kV, 6mA; 55kV, 12mA)
Low dose 220W (110kV, 2mA)
Digital Spot 1760W (110kV, 16mA)
Radiography 2.2 kW (110kV, 20mA) @ 200V, 220V, 230V,
240V;
1.1 kW (110kV, 10mA) @ 100V, 110V, 120V.
High frequency generator 40kHz

Voltage 40kV~110kV
Normal Fluoro When the X-ray tube current reaches its
highest value of 4mA, the obtainable highest
X-ray tube voltage is 110kV.
High Level Fluoro (HLF) When the X-ray tube current reaches its
Low dose when the X-ray tube current reaches its
Digital Spot When the X-ray tube current reaches its
Radiography: 20mA, stationary @ 200V, 220V, 230V, 240V;
the obtainable highest X-ray tube voltage is
110kV;
10mA, stationary @ 100V, 110V, 120V; the
obtainable highest X-ray tube voltage is 110kV.
Current
Normal Fluoro 0.1 mA~4 mA; when the X-ray tube voltage
reaches its highest value of 110kV, the
obtainable highest X-ray tube current is 4mA.
High Level Fluoro (HLF) 0.2 mA~12 mA; when the X-ray tube voltage
9-6
Technical Reference

Low dose 0.1 mA~2 mA; when the X-ray tube voltage
Digital Spot 0.2mA~16 mA; when the X-ray tube voltage
Radiography 1mAs~80mAs @ 200V, 220V, 230V, 240V;
current: 20mA, stationary; the obtainable
highest X-ray tube voltage is 110kV;
1mAs~40mAs @ 100V, 110V, 120V; current:
10mA, stationary; the obtainable highest X-ray
tube voltage is 110kV.
Radiography
Voltage 40~110kVp
Value of mAs 1.0, 1.3, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10, 13,
16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80 mAs @ 200V, 220V,
230V, 240V;
1.0, 1.3, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10, 13,
16, 20, 25, 32, 40 mAs @ 100V, 110V, 120V;
Pulse Fluoro 1/2/4/8pps
The lowest Current Time Product or the 40kVp, 1mAs
combination of Loading Factors
9-7
9.3.2. X-Ray tube

Nominal high voltage 110 kV
Nominal input power 2.2 kW
Maximum anode heat capacity 53 kJ
Target material Tungsten
Target angle 10°
The reference axis From the center of the spot to the center
of the image intensifier
Small focal spot 0.6×1.4 mm
Large focal spot 1.4 mm
Anode Stationary
Typical filament specification 4.2V, 3.5A
Maximum filament current 4.6A
Weight 0.65 kg
Manufacturer LOHMANN, 110/3DF
Maximum voltage between anode and 55kV
ground
Maximum voltage between cathode and -55kV
ground
Maximum filament voltage 24V AC
X-ray radiation angle 10 degree
Tolerance: Tube voltage:  7%
The tube current:  10%
The current time product:  10%
9-8
Technical Reference
9.3.3. X-ray tube assembly

Maximum continuous heat dissipation 177W
Tube assembly dimension (length×Width×Height) 327mm ×132 mm×238 mm
Tube assembly weight 17.5 kg
Maximum heat capacity 900,000HU
Maximum cooling rate 12,500HU/min
Cooling method Nature cooling
Maximum symmetrical radiation field on the X-axis 100cm from the spot:
Fluoro: 235 mm (diagonal)
Radiography: 240mm (diameter)
9.3.4. Collimator
Input power: DC 5V, 1W
Electrical connection mode: through 3mm, 12pins connector
Mechanical connection mode: cast aluminum bracket, screw fitting
 Iris collimator:
Fluoroscopy
Nominal diameter: 23/15/11cm (9”/6”/4.5”)
X-Ray beam continuously adjustable to an area of less than 5×5 cm at the image receptor
Radiography
Nominal diameter circle: 23cm (9”)
 Shutter collimator
Rotation: 360°
Operation: Controlled on panel
9-9
9.3.5. Others
Grid
Type Circular
Material Brivo OEC 715/785: Al
Brivo OEC 865: carbon fiber
Lines/cm Brivo OEC 715/785: 40
Brivo OEC 865: 60
Ratio Brivo OEC 715/785: 8:1
Brivo OEC 865: 10:1
Focus distance 100 cm
Image Intensifier
Type 3 Fields 2 Fields 1 Fields
Input field size 9’’(23 cm) 6’’(15cm) 4.5’’(11cm)
Central resolution Brivo OEC 715/785 44Lp/cm 50Lp/cm 54Lp/cm
Central resolution Brivo OEC 865 52Lp/cm 58Lp/cm 68Lp/cm
Monitor
Type Monochrome LCD
Size 19’’
Image Storage
Capacity 100,000 images
Size 1K x 1K
Digital Processor
Function Negate, Edge Enhancement, Auto
Brightness/Contrast, Manual Brightness/Contrast
Adjustment, Rotation/Reversal/Invert, Smart Metal,
Zoom/Roam, Swap, Recursive Noise Reduction and
Last Image Hold
9-10
Technical Reference
9.4. Tube Rating Chart

The following charts and data describe tube characteristics when operated with three-phase full-wave
rectification, a reasonable approximation to the high frequency generator with minimal ripple.
9.4.1. Filament Emission Characteristics

Small Focal Spot
Large Focal Spot
9-11
9.4.2. Single Load Ratings

Small Focal Spot
Large Focal Spot
9-12
Technical Reference
9.4.3. Thermal Characteristic

Anode Heating and cooling characteristics:
Tube Housing heating and cooling characteristic:

Joules
800 000
300W 200W
640 000
480 000
320 000
160 000
0
0 25 50 75 100
Time (minutes)
9-13
9.5. Radiation Safety Specification

Operators are strongly urged to be familiar with the current recommendations from the International
Commission on Radiological Protection. (ICPR)
Take radiation protection of the patient and operator into consideration seriously.
Scatter data in this manual is only for reference.
9.5.1. Scatter Data
Filter in the X-Ray tube assembly 3.35mm Al

Additional filter 0mmAl
Total filter (without removable filter) 3.35mmAl
Dose area product rate is less than
1.0mGy/h, averaged over any area of
100cm2 of which no principal linear
Leakage radiation
P P
dimension exceeds 20cm at 1m from the

focal spot under conditions of loading.
(110kVp, 2mA)
SID (focal spot to image receptor distance) 100cm
Patients must be kept as far as possible from the focus, with minimum distance of 20cm.
WARNING Make sure not to operate when a plastic cover in x-ray assembly is disassembled, which
properly make the distance meet the above requirements.
The operating table matched this equipment should be made of small attenuation
NOTE
equivalent material, otherwise, X-ray dose may be increased.
9-14
Technical Reference
9.5.2. Scatter radiation specification

Dose Contour Plot Test
This test method is according to clause 203.13.4 in IEC 60601-2-43:2010. This test is performed at
fluoroscopic mode in 110kV.The radiation field size is 100 cm2 at the entrance of the phantom.
The measurement is performed at 2 planes at typical height: 1m & 1.5m from the ground.
The scatter radiation is measured in 2 layouts as vertical and lateral configuration.
For the vertical configuration, the table is at height 1m. I.I. is above the tube.
For the lateral configuration, the table is at height 1m. The center of I.I. is at same altitude as the center
of phantom. The distance from the surface of I.I. to center of phantom is 40cm.
The layout is as below:
9-15
Lateral configuration, 1.5m:
Lateral configuration, 1m:
9-16
Technical Reference
Vertical configuration, 1.5m:
Vertical configuration, 1m:
9-17
Significant Zones of Occupancy Test

This test method is according to clause 13.4 in IEC 60601-1-3:2008.
9-18
Technical Reference
Horizontal Plane& Vertical Plane Test

This test is performed at in fluoroscopic mode in 70kV, 3mA, without shielding.
Horizontal Plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane perpendicular to the beam axis at a
height indicated by reference point C1. C1 is the 30-inch SSD, and is illustrated in the Vertical Plane
illustration, below. The measurement points are 25 cm apart. The table following the illustration
shows expected scatter radiation at each point.
Measurement
Point Dose Rate
H1 3.32 mGy/hr
H2 0.67 mGy/hr
H3 0.28 mGy/hr
H4 0.19 mGy/hr
S1 3.60 mGy/hr
S2 0.81 mGy/hr
S3 0.36 mGy/hr
S4 0.19 mGy/hr
9-19
Vertical Plane
The following illustration shows measurement points in a plane through the beam axis at a height
indicated by reference point C1, which represents the 30-inch SSD. The measurement points are 25
cm apart. The table following the illustration shows expected scatter radiation at these points.
Measurem Dose Rate

T1 1.56 mGy/hr
T2 0.60 mGy/hr
T3 0.28 mGy/hr
C1 0.01 Gy/min
B1 Too close to phantom for
measurement
B2 2.03 mGy/hr
B3 0.76 mGy/hr
9-20
Technical Reference
9.6. Material Safety Data Sheets

Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheets are available from the manufacture upon request. Contact
the following manufacturers with regard to the materials listed:
Oil Sinkiang Kelamayi Lubricating Oil Plant
Address: Jinlong Town Youlong Road No. 8, Kelamayi City , Sinkiang Uigur Munisipality
Post Code: 834003
Tel: 0990-6831426
9.7. Material Recycling

Parts or accessories at end–of–life:
The disposing of parts and accessories must be in accordance with national regulations or local
regulations for waste processing. All materials and components that could have risks to the environment
must be removed from the end–of–life parts and accessories (For examples: transformer oil, etc...).
Please consult your local GEMS representative before discarding these products.
Packing materials:
The materials used to pack our equipment are recycled. They must be collected and processed in
accordance with the local regulations.
9-21
11. Appendix-System Schematics
Appendix
List
Name SCH Revision Total Pages

Bluestone OEC 715 System Interconnect Diagram 3 8
Appendix- 2

$ $
Rev1 Initial Release ECO2134470 Yan Xinyu 2012-Jun-1
Rev2 1. Change 5331642 to 5085782 ECO2134470 Yan Xinyu 2012-Aug-15

2. Update 5085708 and 5085709
% %
pins # due to change to Harting
connector
Rev3 Update computer page ECO2134470 Yan Xinyu 2012-Aug-20
& &
' '
( (
) )
* *
MATERIAL: NA FINISH: NA
ᮦᩱ 㺘䶒༴⨶
DESIGNER :
SCALE: FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION
NA ➨୍ゅᢞᙳἲ
CHECKER: ẚ౛
+
RECHECKER:
TITLE: REV:
STANDARD : ௳ྡ %OXHVWRQH2(&6\VWHP,QWHUFRQQHFW'LDJUDP +
APPROVAL:
GE Hualun Medical System Co., Ltd 6&+
YY/MM/DD 䙊⭘⭥≄ॾՖ५⯇䇮༷ᴹ䲀‫ޜ‬ਨ
ᖺ/᭶/᪥ 6+((72)
$

5085717
Bluestone Wiring Diagram ASM5085484

J3
23
L L L
24
L
WKS SIDE N
25
26
N
N
N
$ $
PWR DVI-IN
5085778
Distributor 5085733
DVI-OUT DVI-OUT
5085777
AC OUT DVI-IN DVI-IN
Monitor Left Monitor Right
5085734
UPS PWR PWR
Key Membrane
5075513 5085610
AC IN CTRL J2 J3
Printer Mouse Key Control Board

5085608
5085749
J1 PE 5085766
5085780
ASM5085484
% ASM5085484 5085717 %
220V J2 5085779 5085721
BT1 22 5085715
WKS_AC220V_L
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
J1
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
5085803 21
1
L
PRI_TRANS_L1 Brn Gry 20 USB USB HDMI USB DVI-D PS2 USB
2
PRI_TRANS_L2
UPS_OUTPUT
100V
3
Blk 19 #22 #14 #19 #15 #18 #4 #11
ON_BATT
220V To WKS
REMOTE
4 18
PRI_TRANS_N1 Wht
GND
5 10V 18 N
Red Brn 17
6 Yel 10V WKS_AC220V_N
7
Yel 16 ATX/PWR
PRI_TRANS_N2 28V To Lift Column SEC_TRANS_28V_L
8
15 #1
9 100V
Blu SEC_TRANS_28V_N
L
14
10
L1 SEC_TRANS_220V_L 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
11 Gry Org 13
N 10V SEC_TRANS_220V_N L 1
PJ10 CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_1 On/Off
12 N1 Blu 220V To MF
PJ14 1 COM3
Grn
10V PJ2
2X1_2R50
Blk L1 2
4X1_5R08 2 CMPTR_ONOFF_CTRL_2
Computer #21
5085712
2X3_6R35_6R35
N 3
SATA
N1 4
PJ1
PJ9 PJ4 1 +12V_CMPTR #25 5075515 Ether
SATA
PWR
6x1_6R35 Jtag 2X1_3R96 2 GND_CMPTR
5085713 #10
5
DVD
PWR_LED_L 6 1 SYS_PWR_REQ
Brn Blu
Power PWR_LED_N
5085729
ASM5085484 AUX_PWR_IN_L1 1 J3
2 PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR ETHERNET ADAPTOR
WIFI ADAPTOR
Indicator 110V PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR 5085517
L N 110V 5085836 2
3
5085518
5085764
JUMPER +5V&+12V Ether #26
4 SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
Filter AUX_PWR_IN_L2 3 PJ13 J8 4x1_5R08
#24
Filter SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
5331600 AUX_PWR_IN_N1 4 3x2_4R20_4R20 J2
5
COM2 Ether USB
5331600 Ether PWR
& L N 1 BRAKER
5
220V 6 12V_ERR #6 #13 #12 &
2 BRAKER JUMPER 7 RDY_ERR
AUX_PWR_IN_N2 6
PJ8
Brn Blu 3
4
BT2 8 MF_PWR
5085710 5085804
5 HDB26F
PDU_CONNECT_2
Out
9
Out
5085723
6
Circuit
7 AUX_PWR_IN_L1 AUX_PWR_OUT_L1
10 PDU_CONNECT_1
CLC5085900
5331605
Breaker
8
9
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
220V 24V
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT 11 RSRV_FROM_PDU_1
5085722
GND_CMPTR
+12V_CMPTR
10
GND_CMPTR
5085740
GND_CMPTR
GND_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
5085606 RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
In
In
11
SIB_RxD
12
SIB_TxD
L N 5085711 220V 48V AUX_PWR_OUT_L1 1 13 RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
Brn Blu
AUX_PWR_OUT_L2 2 PJ12 14 MAINS_LOST_ERR
5408320
AUX_PWR_IN_N2 AUX_PWR_OUT_N2
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1 3 2x2_4R20_4R20 15 RSRV_FROM_SIB_1
AUX_PWR_OUT_N2 4 16 RSRV_FROM_SIB_2 2 3 5
Power Cord 1 6 2 7 5 4 Ether
17 RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
5085714 18 RSRV_FROM_SIB_4 J3 J7 J1
SYS_PWR_REQ 1
PRI_TRANS_L1 1 19 INTLC_CABLE DB9F DB9M RJ45
5085782
PJ7 PRI_OVR_VLTGE_ERR 2
PRI_TRANS_N1 2 20 INTLC_BOARD
RED 1 1 Xray_Lamp_A 4X1_6R35 PRI_UDR_VLTGE_ERR 3
PRI_TRANS_L2 3 21 ACK_PDU2SIB
BLACK 2 2 Xray_Lamp_B SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR 4 1 +5V_ROUTER
PRI_TRANS_N2 4 22 SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD J5
J9 SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR 5 Jtag AS 2 GND_CMPTR
2x1_3R96
5085781
Expo Indicator 23 SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY
12V_ERR 6
GND 5331608 5331638 UPS_CTRL1 1 PJ15 24 MF_PWR_ON_CMD
5085730
RDY_ERR 7
Xray_Lamp_A 1 1 Xray_Lamp_A 2X1_5R08 25 RDY J6

UPS_CTRL2 2
MF_PWR 8
PJ6 PJ3 PE PJ5
' 2 2
5X1_6R35 3X1_2R50 4X1_2R50
26 BEEP_INVALIT_KEY_CMD
PDU_CONNECT_2 9
HDB26F '
Xray_Lamp_B 3 3 Xray_Lamp_B
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
PDU_CONNECT_1 10
1 1 2 3 4
J17 RSRV_FROM_PDU_1 11
SYSTEM INTERFACE BOARD
INTERLOCK_BOARD
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
INTERLOCK_CABLE
BUTTON_LED_+12V
BUTTON_LED_GND
INTERLOCK_COM
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2 12
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC28V_L
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
2 MF_AC28V_L MAINS_LOST_ERR
13
14
5085605
12 MF_AC28V_N RSRV_FROM_SIB_1 15
5 INTERLOCK_CABLE RSRV_FROM_SIB_2 16
4 INTERLOCK_COM RSRV_FROM_SIB_3 17
PE 1 5085765
6 INTERLOCK_BOARD RSRV_FROM_SIB_4 18
5085727
10 WK_B INTLC_CABLE 19
11 WK_A INTLC_BOARD 20
B
15 WK_Y ACK_PDU2SIB 21
16 WK_Z SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD 22
,QWHUFRQQHFW:.6 17 RS485_SHIELD
UPS Power Button SYS_PWR_OFF_DENY 23
8 XRAY_INDICATOR_A 5085833 MF_PWR_ON_CMD 24 J8
5085724
14 XRAY_INDICATOR_B RDY 25 3x1_5R08
NC HDB15F RJ45
MF_AC220V_L 1 RESERVED_1
UPS_CTRL1
System Power Button BEEP_INVALIT_KEY_CMD 26 1 2 3
2 C RESERVED_2 1 1 NO
MF_AC220V_N 3 RESERVED_3 UPS_CTRL2 2 2 C

5085810
RESERVED_4
5085770
( RESERVED_5
J15
2x1_2R54
+
BUTTON_LED_+12V 1 1 X1
(
-
BUTTON_LED_GND 2 2 X2
N
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1 3 3
A O
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2 4 4 C
PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J16 1 2
4x1_2R54 J4 J2
USB
RX_D2+
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
BI_D3+
BI_D4+
TX_D1-
BI_D3-
BI_D4-
Room Interface Ether A User

Wireless SW
5085811
User Interface
5085748
7,7/( REV:

௳ྡ %OXHVWRQH2(&6\VWHP,QWHUFRQQHFW'LDJUDP
) )

*(+XDOXQ0HGLFDO6\VWHP&R/WG 6&+
䙊⭘⭥≄ॾՖ५⯇䇮༷ᴹ䲀‫ޜ‬ਨ
6+((72)

5085725
PROXIMITY SWITCH_DOWN
$ UP DOWN PANEL LEFT UP DOWN PANEL RIGHT $
Motor 5332771
RX_D2+
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
BI_D3+
BI_D4+
BI_D3-
BI_D4-
ASM5085392 5085632 5085633
5085385
1 2 3 4 X1 1 2 3 4 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DOWN_SECURITY_N
DOWN_SECURITY_N
GPIO_IN3 1
GigE
BROWN
BLACK
BLUE
LIH 2
DOWN_N
GND_PS1
DOWN_N
GND_PS1
UP_N
UP_N
TXD485+ 3
BROWN
BLUE
RXD485- 4
GND_PS2
Camera
5
GPIO_IN2 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
GND_PS2 7
5075006
5085756 TXD485- 8
J4 J6 or
5085719
RXD485+ 9
PE 4x1_5R08 5x1_5R08
+12V_CAMERA 10
5085003
1 UP_N
Membrane GND_PS2 11
MF_AC28V_L 1 UP/DOWN Board 2

DX1
5085611
DX2 DX3 DX4
GPIO_OUT3
GPIO_OUT2
12
13
MF_AC28V_N
2
3
J1
3x1_5R08
5085607 J2
3
4
GND_PS1
FRAME_SYNC 14
6x1_5R08 DX1 DX2 DX3 DX4 GND_PS2 15 HDB15M

5 DOWN_N
6 DOWN_SECURITY_N 5085726 F2 6
J3
2x1_5R08 Display Board 5085602 J1 II_GND 8 DB15M I. I
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
J5 DB9F
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DX5 DB15M F1 14
5075001 PE
HAND_FLU
1
HAND_HLF
HAND_COM
PE
% 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 II_PWR 15
or %
DOWN_SECURITY_TO_MCB_N
GND_PS1
DOWN_PROTECT_TO_MCB_N
KEY_N
LED_YELLOW_N
INTERLOCK_A
INTERLOCK_B
5085732 5075008
SPI_MOSI
SPI_MISO
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
+15V_DB
UDB_OVERCUR_N
SPI_CLK
+5V_DB
+5V_DB
SPI_CS2
SPI_CS1
5085757
DB_INT
5085736
UP_TO_MCB_N
UDB_ENABLE
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
5085741
EMERGENCYSW 5085735 1 1 +5V_LASER

HANDSW 5330849 5085759 2 2 GND_PS1 +5V_LASER 1 1 COM
J7
5085113 1 2 3 4 5
2x1_3R00
2 2 +
MF_AC28V_L GND_PS1 3 3 -
MF_AC28V_N 5085760
HandSW 4 4 NO
Laser Aimer SW
Connector 2 1 J18
5333002
5085744
4x1_2R50 4x1_3R00
5085763
+
5085746
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
Laser Aimer 5085812
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
EMERGENCY_SWT1
-
EMERGENCY_SWT2
+
5085720 Laser Aimer 5085812
-
MX14 MX1 MX2
5085737 UPDOWN DISPLAY CAMERA
L N SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
BOARD BOARD DB15M 1
11W1M HDB26F SHUT_WIDTH_MOT- 2
MX8 SHUT_WIDTH_POSN 3
FLU HLF HANDSW
BASE I.I SHUT_ROT_MOT+ 4
MX11
4x1_2R50 5W1F SHUT_ROT_MOT-
EMERENCY/KEY 5
J13
HAND_FLU
/INTERLOCK L N IGBT Fan SHUT_ROT_POSN 6 Collimator
5085771
1
2x1_2R54 DB9F MX10
KeySW
FOOTSW 2 HAND_HLF_SECURITY LASER AIMER 5329282
IRIS_MOT+ 7
5417680
& STANDARD
5085817 1
2
1
2
KEY_N
GND_PS1
3 HAND_COM Mother Board 2x1_4R14
P2
N2
IGBT T1
T2
IRIS_MOT- 8
&
COL_POTS_REF+ 9
5085096 On Off J12

4
5
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_HLF
MX3
HAND/FOOT
5085601 MX4 5326477 COL_POTS_REF- 10
3x1_2R50 5085758 COLLIMATOR P G E M G E P G E M G E 5329280
SW 2 3 3 2 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
J14 IRIS_POSN
FOOT_HLF
Xray 11
FOOT_FLU
HDB15F
off FOOT_CONN HDB15M 5329281
FOOT_COM
1 1 KEYSW_ON
1 12
PE
5x2_2R50 5331682
5085700
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
2 2 KEYSW__OFF
3
2 FOOT_HLF 4 4 FOOT_HLF MX5
3 3 KEYSW_COM
5 SEAL BOARD KV_LOW_ALM_N 1 5 3 1 5 3 1 5 3 1 5 3 1
2 2
7 DB15F KJ3 KJ4 KJ5 KJ6
6 KV_HIGH_ALM_N 2
FOOT_FLU FOOT_FLU
PE
PE 1 1
2396522
MX12 PROTECT_A 1 1 BLACK
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N 3
FOOT_COM 5 5 FOOT_COM MX7 POWER MX9 MX6 KJ2
1 +15V_PSW 2 2 BROWN REMOVE FILTER
7x2_5R50 IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N 4
2 1
BUTTON1 3 3 BUTTON1
MBP1
WKS COM/XRAY ON
_4R20
KVC BOARD FILAMENT
DC_ERROR_ALM_N 5
2 GND_PS1 3 3 BLUE PROXIMITY SWITCH_A
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY 6 6 FOOT_HLF_SECURITY DB9M HDB26M 5W5F
4
5
3
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N 6
J11 5085808
8 8 3x1_2R50
1 2 7 6
SAFETY_EN 7
3 4 9 8 9 9 FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
5 2 MF_AC28V_L PE EXPOSURE_EN 8
6 7
7 7 BUTTON2 5085745 PROTECT_B 1 1 BLACK
12 MF_AC28V_N INTERLOCK_C
8 9
5 INTERLOCK_CABLE
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY 10 10
9
+15V_PSW 2 2 BROWN REMOVE FILTER
BUTTON2 INTERLOCK_D 10 KJ1
4 INTERLOCK_COM
1 1
5085743 GND_PS1 11
GND_PS1 3 3 BLUE PROXIMITY SWITCH_B
2 2 FOOTSW
6 INTERLOCK_BOARD J5 BASE KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE 12
J10 5085808
3x1_2R50
2x1_2R50 5085819
KV Control Board
2396522
10 WK_B 5085743 GND_PS1 13
11 WK_A
TX_D1+ 1 B 15 WK_Y
COM
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
GND_PS1
14
15
5326487
TX_D1- 2 1 THERMAL_SWITCH_A
5085747
16 WK_Z KV_SET_INPUT 16 FILLA1 1
RX_D2+ 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
2
17 RS485_SHIELD GND_PS1 17 FILLA2 2
5085772 BI_D3+ 4 CN4
2396522
3 KV_GND
A 8 XRAY_INDICATOR_A 1 +5V_PS2 KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT 18 FILCOM 3
BI_D3- 5
14 XRAY_INDICATOR_B +5V_PS1 1
9 GND_PS1 FILSM1 4
4 OIL_TEMP_GND
RX_D2- 6 2 +5V_PS2 GND_PS1 19
RESERVED_1 +5V_PS1 2
CN3 10 GND_PS1 FILSM2 5
5 KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
BI_D4+ 7 3 GND_PS2 +15V_KVC 20
' BI_D4- 8 RESERVED_2 +5V_PS1 3

PS1 11 GND_PS1
PS2 4 GND_PS2 -15V_KVC 21
6 THERMAL_SWITCH_B '
+5V_PS1 4 +24V_PS1 7 MA_CAT
RESERVED_3 5085800 12
5085801 GND_PS2 +15V_KVC 22
5075002
DC_BUS_N
5
FLU HLF
5329279
GND_PS1 5 +24V_PS1 8 OIL_TEMP
MF_AC220V_L RESERVED_4 13
-15V_KVC 1
Fuse
1 CN2 6 +24V_PS2 23
2 C RESERVED_5 GND_PS1 6
CN2
14 +15V_PS1 7 +24V_PS2 +15V_KVC 24
2 Monoblock 9 +5V_SEALING
GND_PS1 10 KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
(With Seal BD
7 15
MF_AC220V_N 3 8 +12V_PS2 25
KJ7
GND_PS1 8 PE 16 -15V_PS1 26
CN1 CN1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
,QWHUFRQQHFW0) 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 +5V_PS2 5330746)
DC_BUS_P

20V_AC1
20V_AC2
20V_AC3
20V_AC4
20V_AC5
20V_AC6
20V_AC7
20V_AC8
FOOTSW PE
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_L
OPTION 5085753
1 PE
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
BUTTON1
FOOT_HLF
5085115
FOOT_FLU
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
BUTTON2
PS2 POWER
RESISTANCE R
5085816
5085762
5085755
GND_PS1
5085731
5085739
PS1 POWER
BT3
GND 5331608 5085754
RESISTANCE 5085805 5085728
AR
5330823 5085802 20V_AC1
20V
5329161 DC_BUS_P 20V_AC2
1 5329161 20V_AC3
5085742
2
MF_AC220V_N DC_BUS_N
N
N
3 4 20V
MF_AC28V_L
Filter
5 5331600
L
28V 20V_AC4
MF_AC220V_L
L
6 7 20V_AC5
+P -N +P -N
8 9 20V
5085752
20V_AC6
5085761
MF_AC28V_N
AC2 20V_AC7
AC1
J4 5329278 5329278 20V
27 20V_AC8
MF_AC220V_N 28
5085738
29
( (
RECT+
30
RECT-
MF_AC220V_L 31
32 1
1
2
2
J6
2x1_2R50
Bluestone Wiring Diagram
5085773
RECT
MF SIDE
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC28V_L
5329275
5085751
7,7/( REV:

) ௳ྡ %OXHVWRQH2(&6\VWHP,QWHUFRQQHFW'LDJUDP )

6+((72)

HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
INTERLOCK_BOARD
LED_YELLOW_N
+12V_CAMERA
INTERLOCK_D
FRAME_SYNC
HAND_COM
GPIO_OUT3
GPIO_OUT2
FOOT_COM
HAND_FLU
HAND_HLF
FOOT_HLF
FOOT_FLU
GPIO_IN3
GPIO_IN2
BUTTON1
BUTTON2
SPI_MISO
SPI_MOSI
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
RXD485+
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
TXD485+
+15V_DB
RXD485-
TXD485-
SPI_CLK
+5V_DB
+5V_DB
SPI_CS2
SPI_CS1
DB_INT
LIH
$ $
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DOWN_PROTECT_TO_MCB_N 1
DISPLAY MX2 DB15M CAMERA
MX1 HDB26F MX3 HDB15M HAND/FOOT SW
UDB_OVERCUR_N 2
BOARD
1 SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
UP_TO_MCB_N 3 MX14
2 SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
4
11W1M 3 SHUT_WIDTH_POSN
DOWN_TO_MCB_N 5
4 SHUT_ROT_MOT+
DOWN_SECURITY_TO_MCB_N 6
UPDOWN
BOARD 5 SHUT_ROT_MOT-
UDB_ENABLE 7
6 SHUT_ROT_POSN
+24V_UDB 8 MX4
7 IRIS_MOT+
% GND_PS1 9
HDB15F 8 IRIS_MOT- %
9 COL_POTS_REF+
COLLIMATOR 10 COL_POTS_REF-
11 IRIS_POSN
12
13
14
+24V_PS2 1 15
GND_PS2 2
1 THERMAL_SWITCH_A
+5V_PS1 3
2
GND_PS1 4 MX12
CCB MCB FDB KV_GND
& -15V_PS1 5
7x2_5R50_ 5085603
3
&
5085600 5085604 4 OIL_TEMP_GND
4R20
GND_PS1 6
5 KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
GND_PS1 7 POWER
6 THERMAL_SWITCH_B
+12V_PS2 8
MX5
7 MA_CAT
GND_PS2 9
DB15F 8 OIL_TEMP
+5V_PS1 10
9 +5V_SEALING
GND_PS1 11
SEAL BOARD 10 KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE

+15V_PS1 12
11
GND_PS1 13
12 +15V_PSW
+24V_PS1 14
13 GND_PS1
EMERGENCY_SWT1 1
14 PROTECT_A
' REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1 2
Mother Board '
15 PROTECT_B
EMERGENCY_SWT2 3
5085601
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2 4 MX11
KEYSW_ON 5
DB9F
MX6 1 FILLA1
KEYSW_OFF 6
EMERENCY/KEY/ 2 FILLA2
INTERLOCK_COM 7
INTERLOCK 5W5F
3 FILSM1
KEYSW_COM 8
4 FILSM2
INTERLOCK_BOARD 9
WKS COM/ FILAMENT
I.I 5 FILCOM
LASR AIMER XRAY ON
+5V_LASER 1 MX10 KVC BOARD
MX7 DB9M
GND_PS1 2
2x1_4R14 MX9 HDB26M MX8 5W1F
( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 C1 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MBP1 (
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
II_GND
II_PWR
KV_LOW_ALM_N
WK_A
WK_Y
WK_B
WK_Z
KV_SET_INPUT
EXPOSURE_EN
INTERLOCK_C
INTERLOCK_D
F2
F1
SAFETY_EN
+15V_KVC
+15V_KVC
+15V_KVC
-15V_KVC
-15V_KVC
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
E-BOX
7,7/( REV:

) )
6+((72)

$ $
COMPUTER
% %
& &
' '
( (
7,7/( REV:

) )
6+((72)

$ $
Interlock_Cable
% %
Interlock_Com
Interlock_Board
Interconnect Interlock_Board MX11 Interlock_Com

PDU Cable Mother Board

Interlock_Com
& INTERLOCK &
CCB
Interlock_A
Interlock_Board
Display Board MX1

Interlock_A
Interlock_D
MCB
' '
Interlock_B
Interlock_D
Interlock_B
WKS Side MF Side
KVB MX9 FDB
Interlock_C Interlock_C
( (
7,7/( REV:


6+((72)


GROUNDING
$ $
BEAD BEAD BEAD BEAD BEAD
MB
DB CCB FDB UDB LASER SEALING HD/FT
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PWR
GND_PS1
0 ohm
% PS1 GND_PS1 %
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
0 ohm
GND_PS2
MCB EM/KEY FLIAMENT COLLIMATOR KVCB IGBT
BEAD BEAD
PWR/SIGNAL
& &
PS2 GND_PS2
GND_PS2
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
Connector on MF PINS
GND_PS2
CAMERA I.I
BEAD
485
INTERCONNECT
' MF SIDE '
COMPUTER GND_CMPTR WKS SIDE
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PWR
( (
SIB SIGNAL PDU KCB

BEAD BEAD BEAD
7,7/( REV:

)
)
6+((72)

$ $
220VAC
Main 6.3A Bluestone Wiring Diagram

28VAC
Transformer Fuse
% FUSE DISTRIBUTION %
28VAC
SIB
+5Vin_CMPTR 3.15A Fuse
WKS 220VAC Computer
Breaker PC/Monitor/Printer/... +12Vin_CMPTR 1A Fuse
110V Only
+12V_CMPTR
PDU
& &
25A/12A 220VAC 0.5A Fuse
110VAC/220VAC
Breaker 110VAC/220VAC JUMPER
MF 28VAC Drive Transformer

Motor/IGBT Driver For IGBT
28VAC
MF 220VAC
PS1/PS2/DCBUS
UDB
220VAC RECT
AC/DC MOTOR
' Mother Board '

+5V_PS1
+15V_PS1 +5V_PS1
2.5A
+5V_DB +15V_PS1
1.25A
+15V_DB -15V_PS1
1.25A
-15V_MCB
Fuse Fuse Fuse
MF CAPACITY
220VAC -15V_PS1 +15V_CCB -15V_CCB
PS1 +5V_CCB
+24V_PS1
+5V_LASER +15V_MCB -15V_FDB
GND_PS1 +15V_FDB
+5V_SEALING -15V_KVCB
63A FUSE IGBT

+12V_PS2 2.5A
+15V_KVCB
+5V_MCB
Fuse
1.25A
+15V_KVC
+24V_PS2 Fuse
MF 2.5A
220VAC +24V_PS1
Fuse
+24V_FDB
+12V_PS2
1.25A
+12V_CAMERA +24V_PS2
1.25A
+24V_MCB_PS2
PS2 GND_PS2 Fuse Fuse
+24V_UDB
+24V_MCB_PS1 +12V_MCB_PS2
( (
7,7/( REV:

)
௳ྡ %OXHVWRQH2(&6\VWHP,QWHUFRQQHFW'LDJUDP )

6+((72)

$ $

%
2. Update 5085708 and 5085709
%
pins # due to change to Harting
connector
& &
' '
( (
) )
* *
ᮦᩱ 㺘䶒༴⨶
DESIGNER :
CHECKER: ẚ౛
+
RECHECKER:
TITLE: REV:
APPROVAL:
ᖺ/᭶/᪥ 6+((72)
$

5085717

J3
23
L L L
24
L
$
WKS SIDE N
25
26
N
N
N
$
PWR DVI-IN
5085778
Distributor 5085733
DVI-OUT DVI-OUT
5085777
AC OUT DVI-IN DVI-IN
5085734
UPS PWR PWR
Key Membrane
5075513 5085610
AC IN CTRL J2 J3

5085608
5085749
J1 PE 5085766
5085780
% ASM5085484
ASM5085484 5085717 %
220V J2 5085779 5085721
BT1 22 5085715
WKS_AC220V_L
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
J1
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
5085803 21
1
L
2
PRI_TRANS_L2
UPS_OUTPUT
100V
3
Blk 19 #22 #14 #19 #15 #18 #4 #11
ON_BATT
220V To WKS
REMOTE
4 18
PRI_TRANS_N1 Wht
GND
5 10V 18 N
Red Brn 17
7
Yel 16 ATX/PWR
8
15 #1
9 100V
Blu SEC_TRANS_28V_N
L
14
10
L1 SEC_TRANS_220V_L 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
11 Gry Org 13
PJ14
1 COM3
Grn
10V PJ2
2X1_2R50
Blk L1 2
Computer #21
5085712
2X3_6R35_6R35
N 3
SATA
N1 4
PJ1
PJ9 PJ4 1 +12V_CMPTR #25 5075515 Ether
SATA
PWR
5085713 #10
5
DVD
Brn Blu
Power PWR_LED_N
5085729
WIFI ADAPTOR
L N 110V 5085836 2
3
5085518
5085764
4 SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
#24
Filter SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
5331600 3x2_4R20_4R20 J2
5
& 5331600
1 BRAKER
AUX_PWR_IN_N1 4
220V 6 12V_ERR
COM2
#6
Ether
#13
USB
#12
Ether PWR &
L N 5
AUX_PWR_IN_N2 6
PJ8
Brn Blu 3
4
BT2 8 MF_PWR
5085710 5085804
5 HDB26F
PDU_CONNECT_2
Out
9
Out
5085723
6
Circuit
10 PDU_CONNECT_1
CLC5085900
5331605
Breaker
8
9
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
220V 24V
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
5085722
GND_CMPTR
+12V_CMPTR
10
GND_CMPTR
5085740
GND_CMPTR
GND_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
5085606 RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
In
In
11
SIB_RxD
12
SIB_TxD
Brn Blu
5408320
17 RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
SYS_PWR_REQ 1
5085782
PRI_TRANS_N2 4 22 SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD J5
2x1_3R96
5085781
12V_ERR 6
5085730
RDY_ERR 7

' 2 2
UPS_CTRL2 2
PJ6 PJ3 PE PJ5 26 BEEP_INVALIT_KEY_CMD
MF_PWR 8
HDB26F '
5X1_6R35 3X1_2R50 4X1_2R50 PDU_CONNECT_2 9
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
PDU_CONNECT_1 10
1 1 2 3 4
INTERLOCK_BOARD
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
INTERLOCK_CABLE
BUTTON_LED_+12V
BUTTON_LED_GND
INTERLOCK_COM
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2 12
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC28V_L
2 MF_AC28V_L
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
MAINS_LOST_ERR
13
14
5085605
PE 1 5085765
5085727
B 11 WK_A INTLC_BOARD 20
5085724
NC HDB15F RJ45
2 C UPS_CTRL1 1 1 NO
RESERVED_2
5085810
( RESERVED_4
(
5085770
+
J15 BUTTON_LED_+12V 1 1 X1
RESERVED_5 2x1_2R54 -
BUTTON_LED_GND 2 2 X2
N
A SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1 3 3
O
PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J16 1 2
4x1_2R54 J4 J2
USB
RX_D2+
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
BI_D3+
BI_D4+
BI_D3-
BI_D4-

Wireless SW
5085811
User Interface
5085748
7,7/( REV:

) )

6+((72)

5085725
Motor 5332771 UP DOWN PANEL LEFT UP DOWN PANEL RIGHT
RX_D2+
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
BI_D3+
BI_D4+
BI_D3-
BI_D4-
$ ASM5085392 5085632 5085633 $
5085385
1 2 3 4 X1 1 2 3 4 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DOWN_SECURITY_N
DOWN_SECURITY_N
GPIO_IN3 1
GigE
BROWN
BLACK
BLUE
LIH 2
DOWN_N
GND_PS1
DOWN_N
GND_PS1
UP_N
UP_N
TXD485+ 3
BROWN
BLUE
RXD485- 4
GND_PS2
Camera
5
GPIO_IN2 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
GND_PS2 7 5075006
5085756 TXD485- 8
J4 J6 or
5085719
RXD485+ 9
PE 4x1_5R08 5x1_5R08
+12V_CAMERA 10
5085003
1 UP_N
Membrane GND_PS2 11

DX1
5085611
DX2 DX3 DX4
GPIO_OUT3
GPIO_OUT2
12
13
MF_AC28V_N
2
3
J1
3x1_5R08
5085607 J2
3
4
GND_PS1
FRAME_SYNC 14

5 DOWN_N
J3
2x1_5R08 Display Board 5085602 J1 II_GND 8 DB15M I. I
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
J5 DB9F
DX5 DB15M
HAND_FLU
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F1 14
5075001 PE 1
HAND_HLF
HAND_COM
PE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 II_PWR 15
or
GND_PS1
KEY_N
LED_YELLOW_N
INTERLOCK_A
INTERLOCK_B
% 5085732 5075008 %
SPI_MISO
SPI_MOSI
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
+15V_DB
UDB_OVERCUR_N
SPI_CLK
+5V_DB
+5V_DB
SPI_CS2
SPI_CS1
5085757
DB_INT
5085736
UP_TO_MCB_N
UDB_ENABLE
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
5085741

J7
5085113 1 2 3 4 5
2x1_3R00
2 2 +
MF_AC28V_N 5085760
HandSW 4 4 NO
Laser Aimer SW
Connector J18
2 1 5085744 5333002
4x1_2R50 4x1_3R00
5085763
+
5085746
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
Laser Aimer 5085812
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
EMERGENCY_SWT1
-
EMERGENCY_SWT2
+
5085720 Laser Aimer 5085812
-
MX14 MX1 MX2
L N SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
BOARD BOARD DB15M 1
FLU HLF HANDSW
MX11
EMERENCY/KEY 5
J13
1 HAND_FLU
/INTERLOCK L N IGBT Fan SHUT_ROT_POSN 6 Collimator
5085771
2x1_2R54 MX10
KeySW DB9F
IRIS_MOT+ 7
5417680
STANDARD
5085817 1
2
1
2
KEY_N
GND_PS1
P2
N2
IGBT T1
T2
IRIS_MOT- 8
HAND_FLU_SECURITY COL_POTS_REF+ 9
5085096 On Off J12

4
MX3
5085601 MX4 5326477
& 3x1_2R50
5 HAND_HLF
5085758
HAND/FOOT
SW
COLLIMATOR P
2
G
3
E
3
M
2
G
4
E
4
P
1
G
1
E
1
M
1
G
2
E
2
5329280
COL_POTS_REF- 10
&
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
J14 IRIS_POSN
FOOT_HLF
Xray 11
FOOT_FLU
HDB15F
off FOOT_CONN HDB15M 5329281
FOOT_COM
1 1 KEYSW_ON
1 12
PE
5x2_2R50 5331682
5085700
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
2 2 KEYSW__OFF
3
3 3 KEYSW_COM
2 2
6 KV_HIGH_ALM_N 2
PE FOOT_FLU FOOT_FLU
PE
1 1
2396522
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N 3
2 1
BUTTON1 3 3 BUTTON1
MBP1
WKS COM/XRAY ON
_4R20
KVC BOARD FILAMENT
DC_ERROR_ALM_N 5
4
5
3
J11 5085808
8 8 3x1_2R50
1 2 7 6
SAFETY_EN 7
6 7
8 9
5 INTERLOCK_CABLE
9
4 INTERLOCK_COM
1 1
5085743 GND_PS1 11
2 2 FOOTSW
J10 5085808
3x1_2R50
2x1_2R50 5085819
KV Control Board
2396522
10 WK_B 5085743 GND_PS1 13
11 WK_A
TX_D1+ 1
B 15 WK_Y
COM
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
GND_PS1
14
15
5326487
5085747
RX_D2+ 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
2
17 RS485_SHIELD GND_PS1 17 FILLA2 2
5085772 BI_D3+ 4 CN4
2396522
3 KV_GND
8 XRAY_INDICATOR_A 1 +5V_PS2 KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT 18 FILCOM 3
BI_D3- 5
A
9 GND_PS1 FILSM1 4
4 OIL_TEMP_GND
RX_D2- 6 2 +5V_PS2 GND_PS1 19
5 KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
RESERVED_2 +5V_PS1 3 11 GND_PS1 6 THERMAL_SWITCH_B

BI_D4- 8
PS1 PS2 4 GND_PS2 -15V_KVC 21
+5V_PS1 4 7 MA_CAT
+24V_PS1
' RESERVED_3 5085800 12
5085801 GND_PS2 +15V_KVC 22
5075002 '
DC_BUS_N
5
FLU HLF
5329279
GND_PS1 8 OIL_TEMP
MF_AC220V_L RESERVED_4 5 13 +24V_PS1 -15V_KVC 1
Fuse
1 CN2 6 +24V_PS2 23
2
C
RESERVED_5 GND_PS1 6
CN2
14 +15V_PS1 7 +24V_PS2 +15V_KVC 24
MF_AC220V_N 3
GND_PS1
7
8 PE
15
16 -15V_PS1
8 +12V_PS2 25
26
KJ7 (With Seal BD
CN1 CN1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
,QWHUFRQQHFW0) 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 +5V_PS2 5330746)

DC_BUS_P
20V_AC1
20V_AC2
20V_AC3
20V_AC4
20V_AC5
20V_AC6
20V_AC7
20V_AC8
FOOTSW PE
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_L
OPTION 5085753
1 PE
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
BUTTON1
5085115
FOOT_HLF
FOOT_FLU
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
BUTTON2
PS2 POWER
RESISTANCE R
5085816
5085762
5085755
GND_PS1
5085731
5085739
GND 5331608 PS1 POWER
BT3
5085754
RESISTANCE 5085805 5085728
AR
5085802
5330823 20V_AC1
20V
5329161 DC_BUS_P 20V_AC2
1 5329161 20V_AC3
5085742
2
N
N
3 4 20V
MF_AC28V_L
Filter
5 5331600 28V 20V_AC4
L
MF_AC220V_L
L
6 7 20V_AC5
+P -N +P -N
8 9 20V
5085752
20V_AC6
5085761
MF_AC28V_N
AC2 20V_AC7
AC1
J4 5329278 5329278 20V
27 20V_AC8
MF_AC220V_N 28
5085738
29
AC_IN_N
AC_IN_P
30
(
MF_AC220V_L 31
32
1
1
2
2
J6
2x1_2R50
Bluestone Wiring Diagram (
5085773
RECT
MF SIDE
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC28V_L
5329275
5085751
7,7/( REV:


6+((72)

HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
INTERLOCK_BOARD
LED_YELLOW_N
+12V_CAMERA
INTERLOCK_D
FRAME_SYNC
HAND_COM
GPIO_OUT3
GPIO_OUT2
FOOT_COM
HAND_FLU
HAND_HLF
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_HLF
GPIO_IN3
GPIO_IN2
BUTTON1
BUTTON2
SPI_MOSI
SPI_MISO
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
RXD485+
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
TXD485+
+15V_DB
RXD485-
TXD485-
SPI_CLK
+5V_DB
SPI_CS2
SPI_CS1
+5V_DB
DB_INT
LIH
$ $
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
UDB_OVERCUR_N 2
BOARD
1 SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
UP_TO_MCB_N 3 MX14
2 SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
4
DOWN_TO_MCB_N 5
4 SHUT_ROT_MOT+
UPDOWN
UDB_ENABLE 7
6 SHUT_ROT_POSN
+24V_UDB 8 MX4
% 7 IRIS_MOT+ %
GND_PS1 9
HDB15F 8 IRIS_MOT-
9 COL_POTS_REF+
11 IRIS_POSN
12
13
14
+24V_PS2 1 15
GND_PS2 2
1 THERMAL_SWITCH_A
+5V_PS1 3
& GND_PS1 4 MX12

CCB
&
MCB FDB 3 KV_GND
-15V_PS1 5
7x2_5R50_ 5085603 5085600 5085604
4R20 4 OIL_TEMP_GND
GND_PS1 6
5 KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
GND_PS1 7 POWER
6 THERMAL_SWITCH_B
+12V_PS2 8
MX5
7 MA_CAT
GND_PS2 9
DB15F 8 OIL_TEMP
+5V_PS1 10
9 +5V_SEALING
GND_PS1 11

+15V_PS1 12
11
GND_PS1 13
12 +15V_PSW
+24V_PS1 14
13 GND_PS1
' EMERGENCY_SWT1 1
14 PROTECT_A
'
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1 2
Mother Board
15 PROTECT_B
EMERGENCY_SWT2 3
5085601
KEYSW_ON 5
DB9F
MX6 1 FILLA1
KEYSW_OFF 6
INTERLOCK_COM 7
INTERLOCK 5W5F
3 FILSM1
KEYSW_COM 8
4 FILSM2
INTERLOCK_BOARD 9
WKS COM/ FILAMENT
I.I 5 FILCOM
LASR AIMER XRAY ON
MX7 DB9M
GND_PS1 2
( (
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 C1 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MBP1
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
II_GND
II_PWR
KV_LOW_ALM_N
WK_A
WK_Y
WK_B
WK_Z
KV_SET_INPUT
EXPOSURE_EN
INTERLOCK_C
INTERLOCK_D
F2
F1
SAFETY_EN
+15V_KVC
+15V_KVC
+15V_KVC
-15V_KVC
-15V_KVC
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
E-BOX
7,7/( REV:

) )
6+((72)

$ $
COMPUTER
% %
& &
' '
( (
7,7/( REV:

) )
6+((72)

$ $
Interlock_Cable
% Interlock_Com %
Interlock_Board


Interlock_Com
&
INTERLOCK &
CCB
Interlock_A
Interlock_Board
Display Board MX1

Interlock_A
Interlock_D
MCB
' Interlock_B '
Interlock_D
Interlock_B
WKS Side MF Side
KVB MX9 FDB
( (
7,7/( REV:


6+((72)


$ GROUNDING $
MB
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PWR
GND_PS1
% 0 ohm %
PS1 GND_PS1
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
0 ohm
GND_PS2
BEAD BEAD
PWR/SIGNAL
& &
PS2 GND_PS2
GND_PS2
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
GND_PS2
CAMERA I.I
BEAD
485
INTERCONNECT
' '
MF SIDE
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PWR
( (
SIB SIGNAL PDU KCB

BEAD BEAD BEAD
7,7/( REV:

)
)
6+((72)

$ $
220VAC

28VAC
Transformer Fuse
FUSE DISTRIBUTION
% %
28VAC
SIB
WKS 220VAC Computer
110V Only
+12V_CMPTR
PDU
& 25A/12A 220VAC 0.5A Fuse &

110VAC/220VAC

28VAC
MF 220VAC
PS1/PS2/DCBUS
UDB
220VAC RECT
AC/DC MOTOR
Mother Board
' +5V_PS1 '
+15V_PS1 +5V_PS1
2.5A
Fuse
+5V_DB +15V_PS1
1.25A
Fuse
+15V_DB -15V_PS1
1.25A
Fuse
-15V_MCB
MF CAPACITY
220VAC -15V_PS1 +5V_CCB +15V_CCB -15V_CCB
PS1
+24V_PS1 +5V_LASER +15V_MCB -15V_FDB
GND_PS1 +15V_FDB -15V_KVCB

+5V_SEALING
63A FUSE IGBT

+12V_PS2 2.5A
+5V_MCB
+15V_KVCB
Fuse
1.25A
+15V_KVC
+24V_PS2 Fuse
MF 2.5A
220VAC +24V_PS1
Fuse
+24V_FDB
+12V_PS2
1.25A
+12V_CAMERA +24V_PS2
1.25A
+24V_MCB_PS2
PS2 GND_PS2 Fuse Fuse
+24V_UDB
( (
7,7/( REV:

)

6+((72)

$ $

2. Update 5085708 and 5085709
%
pins # due to change to Harting %
connector
& &
' '
( (
) )
* *
ᮦᩱ 㺘䶒༴⨶
DESIGNER :
CHECKER: ẚ౛
+
RECHECKER:
TITLE: REV:
APPROVAL:
ᖺ/᭶/᪥ 6+((72)
$

5085717

J3
23
$ L
24
L L $
L
WKS SIDE N
25
26
N
N
N
PWR DVI-IN
5085778
Distributor 5085733
DVI-OUT DVI-OUT 5085774
5085777
AC OUT DVI-IN USB DVI-IN
5085734
PWR
UPS PWR
Key Membrane
5075513 5085610
AC IN CTRL J2 J3

5085608
% 5085749
J1 PE 5085766
%
5085780
ASM5085484
ASM5085484 5085717
220V J2 5085779 5085721
BT1 22 5085715
WKS_AC220V_L
SEC_TRANS_220V_N
SEC_TRANS_220V_L
J1
SEC_TRANS_28V_N
SEC_TRANS_28V_L
5085803 21
1
L
2
PRI_TRANS_L2
UPS_OUTPUT
100V
3
Blk 19 #22 #14 #19 #15 #18 #4 #11
ON_BATT
REMOTE
220V To WKS
4 18
PRI_TRANS_N1 Wht
GND
5 10V 18 N
Red Brn 17
7
Yel 16 ATX/PWR
8
15 #1
9 100V
Blu SEC_TRANS_28V_N
L
14
10
L1 SEC_TRANS_220V_L 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
11 Gry Org 13
PJ14 1 COM3
Grn
10V PJ2
2X1_2R50 #21
Blk L1 2
Computer
5085712
2X3_6R35_6R35
N 3
SATA
N1 4
PJ1 PJ9 PJ4 1 +12V_CMPTR #25 5075515 Ether
SATA
PWR
5085713
5
DVD #10
Brn Blu
Power PWR_LED_N
5085729
WIFI ADAPTOR
L N 110V 5085836 2
3
5085518
5085764
4 SEC_OVR_VLTGE_ERR
#24
& Filter
5331600
5331600 AUX_PWR_IN_N1 4 3x2_4R20_4R20 J2
5 SEC_UDR_VLTGE_ERR
COM2 Ether USB Ether PWR
&
1 BRAKER
5
220V 6 12V_ERR #6 #13 #12
L N
3 AUX_PWR_IN_N2 6
PJ8
Brn Blu
4
BT2 8 MF_PWR
5085710 5085804
5 HDB26F
PDU_CONNECT_2
Out
9
Out
5085723
6
Circuit
10 PDU_CONNECT_1
CLC5085900
5331605
Breaker
8
9
AUX_PWR_IN_N1
220V 24V
AUX_PWR_OUT_N1
5085722
GND_CMPTR
+12V_CMPTR
10
GND_CMPTR
5085740
GND_CMPTR
GND_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
+5V_CMPTR
5085606
In
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2
In
11
SIB_RxD
12
SIB_TxD
Brn Blu
5408320
17 RSRV_FROM_SIB_3
SYS_PWR_REQ 1
5085782
PRI_TRANS_N2 4
22 SYS_PWR_OFF_CMD J5
2x1_3R96
5085781
12V_ERR 6
5085730
RDY_ERR 7

UPS_CTRL2 2
MF_PWR
' '
8
PJ6 PJ3 PE PJ5 HDB26F
2 2 26 BEEP_INVALIT_KEY_CMD
5X1_6R35 3X1_2R50 4X1_2R50 PDU_CONNECT_2 9
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1
PDU_CONNECT_1 10
1 2 3 4
INTERLOCK_BOARD
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1
SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_2
INTERLOCK_CABLE
BUTTON_LED_+12V
BUTTON_LED_GND
INTERLOCK_COM
RSRV_FROM_PDU_2 12
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC28V_L
2 MF_AC28V_L
RSRV_FROM_PDU_3
MAINS_LOST_ERR
13
14
5085605
PE 1 5085765
5085727
B 11 WK_A INTLC_BOARD 20
5085724
NC HDB15F RJ45
2 C UPS_CTRL1 1 1 NO
RESERVED_2
5085810
RESERVED_4
5085770
+
J15 BUTTON_LED_+12V 1 1 X1
RESERVED_5
( 2x1_2R54 -
BUTTON_LED_GND 2 2 X2 (
N
A SYS_ONOFF_CTRL_1 3 3
O
PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J16 1 2
4x1_2R54 J4 J2
USB
RX_D2+
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
BI_D3+
BI_D4+
BI_D3-
BI_D4-

Wireless SW
5085811
User Interface
5085748
7,7/( REV:

)
)
6+((72)

$ 5085725
$
Motor 5332771 UP DOWN PANEL LEFT UP DOWN PANEL RIGHT
RX_D2+
TX_D1+
RX_D2-
TX_D1-
BI_D3+
BI_D4+
BI_D3-
BI_D4-
ASM5085392 5085632 5085633
5085385
1 2 3 4 X1 1 2 3 4 X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DOWN_SECURITY_N
DOWN_SECURITY_N
GPIO_IN3 1
GigE
BROWN
BLACK
BLUE
LIH 2
DOWN_N
GND_PS1
DOWN_N
GND_PS1
UP_N
UP_N
TXD485+ 3
BROWN
BLUE
RXD485- 4
GND_PS2
Camera
5
GPIO_IN2 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
GND_PS2 7
5075006
5085756 TXD485- 8
J4 J6 or
5085719
RXD485+ 9
PE 4x1_5R08 5x1_5R08
+12V_CAMERA 10
5085003
1 UP_N
Membrane GND_PS2 11

DX1
5085611
DX2 DX3 DX4
GPIO_OUT3
GPIO_OUT2
12
13
MF_AC28V_N
2
3
J1
3x1_5R08
5085607 J2
3
4
GND_PS1
FRAME_SYNC 14

5 DOWN_N
% J3
I. I %
2x1_5R08 Display Board 5085602 J1 II_GND 8 DB15M
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
HAND_FLU_SECURITY
J5 DB9F
DX5 DB15M
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F1 14
5075001 PE
HAND_FLU
HAND_HLF
1
HAND_COM
PE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 II_PWR 15
or
GND_PS1
KEY_N
LED_YELLOW_N
INTERLOCK_A
INTERLOCK_B
5085732 5075008
SPI_MISO
SPI_MOSI
DOWN_TO_MCB_N
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
+15V_DB
UDB_OVERCUR_N
SPI_CLK
SPI_CS2
SPI_CS1
+5V_DB
+5V_DB
5085757
DB_INT
5085736
UP_TO_MCB_N
UDB_ENABLE
+24V_UDB
GND_PS1
5085741

J7
5085113 1 2 3 4 5
2x1_3R00
2 2 +
MF_AC28V_N 5085760
HandSW 4 4 NO
Laser Aimer SW
Connector J18
2 1 5085744 5333002
4x1_2R50 4x1_3R00
5085763
+
5085746
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1
Laser Aimer 5085812
REF_EMERGENCY_SWT2
EMERGENCY_SWT1
-
EMERGENCY_SWT2
+
5085720
Laser Aimer 5085812
-
MX14 MX1 MX2
L N SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
BOARD BOARD DB15M 1
FLU HLF HANDSW
MX11
EMERENCY/KEY 5
& J13
1 HAND_FLU
/INTERLOCK L N IGBT Fan SHUT_ROT_POSN 6 Collimator &
5085771
2x1_2R54 MX10
KeySW DB9F
IRIS_MOT+ 7
5417680
STANDARD
5085817 1
2
1
2
KEY_N
GND_PS1
P2
N2
IGBT T1
T2
IRIS_MOT- 8
HAND_FLU_SECURITY COL_POTS_REF+ 9
5085096 On Off J12

4
5 HAND_HLF
MX3
HAND/FOOT
5085601 MX4 5326477 COL_POTS_REF- 10
3x1_2R50 5085758 COLLIMATOR P G E M G E P G E M G E 5329280
SW 2 3 3 2 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
J14 IRIS_POSN
FOOT_HLF
Xray 11
FOOT_FLU
off
HDB15F
KEYSW_ON FOOT_CONN HDB15M 5329281
FOOT_COM
1 1
1 12
PE
5x2_2R50 5331682
5085700
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
2 2 KEYSW__OFF
3
3 3 KEYSW_COM
2 2
6 KV_HIGH_ALM_N 2
FOOT_FLU FOOT_FLU
PE
PE 1 1
2396522
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N 3
2 1
BUTTON1 3 3 BUTTON1
MBP1
WKS COM/XRAY ON
_4R20
KVC BOARD FILAMENT
DC_ERROR_ALM_N 5
4
5
3
J11 5085808
8 8 3x1_2R50
1 2 7 6
SAFETY_EN 7
6 7
8 9
5 INTERLOCK_CABLE
9
4 INTERLOCK_COM
1 1
5085743 GND_PS1 11
2 2 FOOTSW
J10 5085808
3x1_2R50
2x1_2R50 5085819
KV Control Board
2396522
10 WK_B 5085743 GND_PS1 13
B 11 WK_A
TX_D1+ 1
15 WK_Y
COM
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
GND_PS1
14
15
5326487
5085747
RX_D2+ 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
2
A 17 RS485_SHIELD GND_PS1 17 FILLA2 2
' 5085772 BI_D3+ 4 CN4

'
2396522
3 KV_GND
8 XRAY_INDICATOR_A 1 +5V_PS2 KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT 18 FILCOM 3
BI_D3- 5
9 GND_PS1 FILSM1 4
4 OIL_TEMP_GND
RX_D2- 6 2 +5V_PS2 GND_PS1 19
5 KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
BI_D4- RESERVED_2 +5V_PS1 3 11 GND_PS1 6 THERMAL_SWITCH_B

8
PS1 PS2 4 GND_PS2 -15V_KVC 21
+5V_PS1 4 7 MA_CAT
+24V_PS1
RESERVED_3
5085800 12
5085801 GND_PS2 +15V_KVC 22
5075002
DC_BUS_N
5
FLU HLF
5329279
GND_PS1 8 OIL_TEMP
MF_AC220V_L C RESERVED_4 5 13 +24V_PS1 -15V_KVC 1
Fuse
1 CN2 6 +24V_PS2 23
2 RESERVED_5 GND_PS1 6
CN2
14 +15V_PS1 7 +24V_PS2 +15V_KVC 24
(With Seal BD
7 15
MF_AC220V_N 3 8 +12V_PS2 25
KJ7
GND_PS1 8 PE 16 -15V_PS1 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN1 CN1
,QWHUFRQQHFW0) 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 +5V_PS2 5330746)
DC_BUS_P

20V_AC1
20V_AC2
20V_AC3
20V_AC4
20V_AC5
20V_AC6
20V_AC7
20V_AC8
FOOTSW PE
MF_AC220V_L
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_N
MF_AC220V_L
OPTION 5085753
1 PE
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
BUTTON1
FOOT_HLF
5085115
FOOT_FLU
GND_PS2
+5V_PS1
FOOT_COM
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
BUTTON2
PS2 POWER
RESISTANCE R
5085816
5085762
5085755
GND_PS1
5085731
5085739
GND 5331608 PS1 POWER
BT3
5085754
RESISTANCE 5085805 5085728
AR
5330823 5085802 20V_AC1
20V
5329161 DC_BUS_P 20V_AC2
1 5329161 20V_AC3
5085742
2
N
N
3 4 20V
MF_AC28V_L
Filter
5 5331600 28V 20V_AC4
L
MF_AC220V_L
L
6 7 20V_AC5
+P -N +P -N
8 9 20V
5085752
20V_AC6
5085761
MF_AC28V_N
AC2 20V_AC7
AC1
J4
( 27
5329278 5329278 20V
20V_AC8
(
MF_AC220V_N 28
5085738
29
AC_IN_N
AC_IN_P
30
MF_AC220V_L 31
32
1
1
2
2
J6
2x1_2R50
5085773
RECT
MF SIDE
MF_AC28V_N
MF_AC28V_L
5329275
5085751
7,7/( REV:


6+((72)

HAND_FLU_SECURITY
HAND_HLF_SECURITY
FOOT_FLU_SECURITY
FOOT_HLF_SECURITY
INTERLOCK_BOARD
LED_YELLOW_N
+12V_CAMERA
INTERLOCK_D
FRAME_SYNC
HAND_COM
GPIO_OUT3
GPIO_OUT2
FOOT_COM
HAND_FLU
HAND_HLF
FOOT_FLU
FOOT_HLF
GPIO_IN3
GPIO_IN2
BUTTON1
BUTTON2
SPI_MOSI
SPI_MISO
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
GND_PS2
RXD485+
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
TXD485+
+15V_DB
RXD485-
TXD485-
SPI_CLK
+5V_DB
SPI_CS2
SPI_CS1
+5V_DB
DB_INT
LIH
$ $
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
UDB_OVERCUR_N 2
BOARD
1 SHUT_WIDTH_MOT+
UP_TO_MCB_N 3 MX14
2 SHUT_WIDTH_MOT-
4
DOWN_TO_MCB_N 5
4 SHUT_ROT_MOT+
UPDOWN
UDB_ENABLE 7
6 SHUT_ROT_POSN
+24V_UDB 8 MX4
7 IRIS_MOT+
GND_PS1 9
% HDB15F 8 IRIS_MOT- %
9 COL_POTS_REF+
11 IRIS_POSN
12
13
14
+24V_PS2 1 15
GND_PS2 2
1 THERMAL_SWITCH_A
+5V_PS1 3
2
GND_PS1 4 MX12
CCB MCB FDB 3 KV_GND
& -15V_PS1 5
7x2_5R50_ 5085603 5085600 5085604 4 OIL_TEMP_GND
&
4R20
GND_PS1 6
5 KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
GND_PS1 7 POWER
6 THERMAL_SWITCH_B
+12V_PS2 8
MX5
7 MA_CAT
GND_PS2 9
DB15F 8 OIL_TEMP
+5V_PS1 10
9 +5V_SEALING
GND_PS1 11

+15V_PS1 12
11
GND_PS1 13
12 +15V_PSW
+24V_PS1 14
13 GND_PS1
EMERGENCY_SWT1 1
14 PROTECT_A
' REF_EMERGENCY_SWT1 2
Mother Board '
15 PROTECT_B
EMERGENCY_SWT2 3
5085601
KEYSW_ON 5
DB9F
MX6 1 FILLA1
KEYSW_OFF 6
INTERLOCK_COM 7
INTERLOCK 5W5F
3 FILSM1
KEYSW_COM 8
4 FILSM2
INTERLOCK_BOARD 9
WKS COM/ FILAMENT
I.I 5 FILCOM
LASR AIMER XRAY ON
MX7 DB9M
GND_PS1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 C1 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MBP1
( (
XRAY_INDICATOR_A
XRAY_INDICATOR_B
KV_FEEDBACK_CATHODE
KV_UNBALANCE_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_OUTPUT
OVERCURRENT_ALM_N
KV_FEEDBACK_ANODE
IGBT_ERROR_ALM_N
DC_ERROR_ALM_N
KV_HIGH_ALM_N
II_GND
II_PWR
KV_LOW_ALM_N
WK_A
WK_Y
WK_B
WK_Z
KV_SET_INPUT
EXPOSURE_EN
INTERLOCK_C
INTERLOCK_D
F2
F1
SAFETY_EN
+15V_KVC
+15V_KVC
+15V_KVC
-15V_KVC
-15V_KVC
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
GND_PS1
E-BOX
7,7/( REV:

) )
6+((72)

$ $
COMPUTER
% %
& &
' '
( (
7,7/( REV:

) )
6+((72)

$ $
% Interlock_Cable %
Interlock_Com
Interlock_Board

& Bluestone Wiring Diagram &

Interlock_Com
INTERLOCK
CCB
Interlock_A
Interlock_Board
Display Board MX1

Interlock_A
' '
Interlock_D
MCB
Interlock_B
Interlock_D
Interlock_B
WKS Side MF Side
KVB MX9 FDB
( (
7,7/( REV:


6+((72)


$ GROUNDING $
MB
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PWR
GND_PS1
% 0 ohm %
PS1 GND_PS1
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
0 ohm
GND_PS2
BEAD BEAD
PWR/SIGNAL
& &
PS2 GND_PS2
GND_PS2
PWR/SIGNAL
PWR/SIGNAL
GND_PS2
CAMERA I.I
BEAD
485
INTERCONNECT
' '
MF SIDE
PWR/SIGNAL
SIGNAL
PWR
( (
SIB SIGNAL PDU KCB

BEAD BEAD BEAD
7,7/( REV:

)
)
6+((72)

$ $
220VAC

28VAC
Transformer Fuse
FUSE DISTRIBUTION
% %
28VAC
SIB
WKS 220VAC Computer
110V Only
+12V_CMPTR
PDU
& 25A/12A 220VAC 0.5A Fuse &

110VAC/220VAC

28VAC
MF 220VAC
PS1/PS2/DCBUS
UDB
220VAC RECT
AC/DC MOTOR
' Mother Board '

+5V_PS1
+15V_PS1 +5V_PS1
2.5A
+5V_DB +15V_PS1
1.25A
+15V_DB -15V_PS1
1.25A
-15V_MCB
Fuse Fuse Fuse
MF CAPACITY
220VAC -15V_PS1
PS1 +5V_CCB +15V_CCB -15V_CCB
+24V_PS1
+5V_LASER +15V_MCB -15V_FDB
GND_PS1
+5V_SEALING +15V_FDB -15V_KVCB
63A FUSE IGBT

+12V_PS2 2.5A
+15V_KVCB
+5V_MCB
Fuse
1.25A
+15V_KVC
+24V_PS2 Fuse
MF
220VAC +24V_PS1
2.5A
+24V_FDB 1.25A 1.25A
PS2 GND_PS2 Fuse +12V_PS2
Fuse
+12V_CAMERA +24V_PS2 Fuse +24V_MCB_PS2
+24V_UDB
( (
7,7/( REV:

)

6+((72)

Service Manual - Brivo OEC 865 5358651-1EN

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Service Manual - Brivo OEC 865 5358651-1EN

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GE Healthcare

Mobile C-Arm X-Ray Product

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.

WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.

ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.

ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

UPOZORNENIE Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

2.2.4. Display Board ............................................................................................................................................. 2-32

3.5.6. DICOM Worksheet .................................................................................................................................... 3-31

4.3.2. mA calibration............................................................................................................................................ 4-11

5.2.5. Imaging Processing Config .................................................................................................................. 5-12

7.3.11. Monitors ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-37

8.7.3. mAs Accuracy ............................................................................................................................................ 8-14

9.6. Material Safety Data Sheets .......................................................................................................................... 9-21

1.1.3. Service Philosophy

1.1.5. Unauthorized Modifications

1.1.6. Manual Organization and Use

 Installation Procedure –Information of pre-installation, unpacking and installation check.

1.2.1. Safety Hazard Alerts

NOTE is given in situation requiring special attention.

1.2.2. Ingress of Fluids

1.2.3. Electrical Shock

1.2.5. Thermal hazards

1.2.6. Equipment Stability

1.2.8. Motorized Mechanical Movement

1.2.9. Work on Parts with Lead Materail

1.2.10. Safety Interlock

Item Label Quantity Description

This label indicates the position of

This label indicates the position of

This label indicates the position of

This label indicates the position of

This label indicates the position of

This label indicates the position of

This label indicates that the

Pay attention to your feet keep

This label is attached below

Monoblock heat label

This label on the control panel of

Potential equalization terminal

Pay attention to keep your

This label indicates that you

This label on the footswitch

This symbol indicates the location

System rating plate indicates

20 1 This is the label of collimator.

This is the label of laser warning.

This label warns the operator or

This label indicates the

25 2 This is the label of branding.

26 Blank N/A Not used

This label indicates the system

This label can be found on the X-

29 1 USB warning label

30 1 C-Arm weight label

31 1 Workstation weight label

Image Intensifier label for Brivo

Image Intensifier label for Brivo

Hg label is attached on the

34 1 removable copper 0.1mm Cu

This label indicates the system